1
AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON OCTOBER 16, 1998
REGISTRATION NO. 333-64663
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
------------------------
AMENDMENT NO. 1
TO
FORM S-4
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER THE
SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
NETWORK PLUS CORP.
(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)
------------------------
DELAWARE 4813
(State or Other Jurisdiction of (Primary Standard Industrial 04-3430576
Incorporation or Organization) Classification Code Number) (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
------------------------
234 COPELAND STREET, QUINCY, MASSACHUSETTS 02169; (617) 786-4000
(Address, Including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, Including Area Code, of
Registrant's Principal Executive Offices)
------------------------
JAMES J. CROWLEY, ESQ.
EXECUTIVE VICE PRESIDENT AND CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER
234 COPELAND STREET
QUINCY, MASSACHUSETTS 02169
(617) 786-4000
(Name, Address, Including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, Including Area Code,
of Agent for Service)
------------------------
WITH A COPY TO:
JEFFREY N. CARP, ESQ.
HALE AND DORR LLP
60 STATE STREET
BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS 02109
(617) 526-6000
------------------------
APPROXIMATE DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PROPOSED SALE OF THE SECURITIES TO THE
PUBLIC: As soon as practicable after this Registration Statement becomes
effective.
If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered in
connection with the formation of a holding company and there is compliance with
General Instruction G, check the following box. [ ]
If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering
pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and
list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective
registration statement for the same offering. [ ]
If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d)
under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act
registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement
for the same offering. [ ]
------------------------
THE REGISTRANT HEREBY AMENDS THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT ON SUCH DATE OR
DATES AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO DELAY ITS EFFECTIVE DATE UNTIL THE REGISTRANT SHALL
FILE A FURTHER AMENDMENT THAT SPECIFICALLY STATES THAT THIS REGISTRATION
STATEMENT SHALL THEREAFTER BECOME EFFECTIVE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 8(a) OF
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933, AS AMENDED, OR UNTIL THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT
SHALL BECOME EFFECTIVE ON SUCH DATE AS THE COMMISSION, ACTING PURSUANT TO SAID
SECTION 8(a), MAY DETERMINE.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO COMPLETION OR AMENDMENT. A
REGISTRATION STATEMENT RELATING TO THESE SECURITIES HAS BEEN FILED WITH THE
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION. THESE SECURITIES MAY NOT BE SOLD NOR MAY
OFFERS TO BUY BE ACCEPTED PRIOR TO THE TIME THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT BECOMES
EFFECTIVE. THIS PROSPECTUS SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER TO SELL OR THE
SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY NOR SHALL THERE BE ANY SALE OF THESE SECURITIES
IN ANY STATE IN WHICH SUCH OFFER, SOLICITATION OR SALE WOULD BE UNLAWFUL PRIOR
TO REGISTRATION OR QUALIFICATION UNDER THE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY SUCH STATE.
SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED OCTOBER 16, 1998
PROSPECTUS
NETWORK PLUS CORP.
OFFER TO EXCHANGE ONE SHARE OF
13.5% SERIES A1 CUMULATIVE PREFERRED STOCK DUE 2009
FOR EACH OUTSTANDING SHARE OF
13.5% SERIES A CUMULATIVE PREFERRED STOCK DUE 2009
------------------------
Network Plus Corp., a Delaware corporation ("Network Plus" or the
"Company"), hereby offers, upon the terms and subject to the conditions set
forth in this Prospectus and the accompanying Letter of Transmittal (which
together constitute the "Exchange Offer"), to exchange up to 40,000 shares of
its 13.5% Series A1 Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009 (the "New Preferred
Shares") for up to 40,000 shares of its outstanding 13.5% Series A Cumulative
Preferred Stock Due 2009 (the "Original Preferred Shares", and, together with
the New Preferred Shares, the "Series A Preferred Stock") that were issued in a
transaction exempt from registration under the Securities Act of 1933, as
amended (the "Securities Act").
The terms of the New Preferred Shares are substantially identical in all
respects to the terms of the Original Preferred Shares for which they may be
exchanged pursuant to the Exchange Offer, except that (i) the offer of the New
Preferred Shares will have been registered under the Securities Act and,
therefore, the New Preferred Shares will be freely transferable by holders
thereof (except as provided below) and not bear a legend regarding restrictions
on transfer, (ii) holders of the New Preferred Shares will not be entitled to
certain rights of the holders of the Original Preferred Shares under the
Registration Agreement (as defined), which rights with respect to the Original
Preferred Shares will terminate on consummation of the Exchange Offer and (iii)
the New Preferred Shares will not contain any provisions regarding the payment
of Special Dividends (as defined).
Dividends on each New Preferred Share will accrue from the last date on
which dividends were paid on the Original Preferred Share surrendered in
exchange therefor or, if no dividends have been paid on such Original Preferred
Share, from the date of original issuance of such Original Preferred Share.
Dividends on the New Preferred Shares will accrue at a rate of 13.5% per annum
of the Specified Amount (as defined) and will be payable quarterly in arrears on
March 1, June 1, September 1 and December 1 of each year, commencing December 1,
1998. Dividends will be payable in cash, except that on each dividend payment
date occurring on or prior to September 1, 2003, dividends may be paid, at the
Company's option, either in cash or by allowing such dividends ("Accumulated
Dividends") to be added to the Specified Amount, which shall initially be equal
to the liquidation preference.
The New Preferred Shares will be redeemable at the option of the
Company, in whole or in part, at any time on or after September 1, 2003, at the
redemption prices set forth herein, plus accumulated and unpaid dividends
thereon, if any, to the redemption date. The New Preferred Shares will be
subject to mandatory redemption on September 1, 2009. In addition, the Company
is required to use all or a specified portion of the proceeds of any Senior
Notes Offering or Public Equity Offering (each as defined) to redeem the New
Preferred Shares at the redemption prices and upon the terms set forth herein.
See "Description of the Series A Preferred Stock--Optional Redemption" and
"Description of the Series A Preferred Stock--Mandatory Redemption".
The Company is a holding company that conducts substantially all its
operations through subsidiaries, and the New Preferred Shares will be
effectively subordinated to all obligations of the Company's subsidiaries
(including trade payables). The Certificate of Designation permits the Company
and its subsidiaries to incur substantial amounts of additional debt and other
liabilities. See "Description of the Series A Preferred Stock".
The Original Preferred Shares were originally issued and sold on September
3, 1998 in a transaction exempt from registration under the Securities Act (the
"Initial Offering"). Accordingly, the Original Preferred Shares may not be
reoffered, resold or otherwise pledged, hypothecated or transferred in the
United States unless registered under the Securities Act or unless an applicable
exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act is available.
The New Preferred Shares are being offered hereunder to satisfy certain
obligations of the Company under the Registration Agreement (as defined). Based
upon interpretations by the Staff (the "Staff") of the Securities and Exchange
Commission (the "Commission") issued to third parties, the Company believes that
the New Preferred Shares issued pursuant to the Exchange Offer in exchange for
the Original Preferred Shares may be offered for resale, resold and otherwise
transferred by holders thereof (other than any holder which is (i) an
"affiliate" of the Company within the meaning of Rule 405 under the Securities
Act, (ii) a broker-dealer who acquired Original Preferred Shares directly from
the Company or (iii) a broker-dealer who acquired Original Preferred Shares as a
result of market making or other trading activities) without compliance with the
registration and prospectus delivery provisions of the Securities Act provided
that such New Preferred Shares are acquired in the ordinary course of such
holders' business and such holders are not engaged in, and do not intend to
engage in, and have no arrangement or understanding with any person to
participate in, a distribution of such New Preferred Shares. Each broker-dealer
that receives New Preferred Shares for its own account pursuant to the Exchange
Offer must acknowledge that it will deliver a prospectus in connection with any
resale of such New Preferred Shares. The Letter of Transmittal accompanying this
Prospectus (the "Letter of Transmittal") states that by so acknowledging and by
delivering a prospectus, a broker-dealer will not be deemed to admit that it is
an "underwriter" within the meaning of the Securities Act. This Prospectus, as
it may be amended or supplemented from time to time, may be used by a
broker-dealer in connection with resales of New Preferred Shares received in
exchange for Original Preferred Shares where such New Preferred Shares were
acquired by such broker-dealer as a result of market-making activities or other
trading activities. The Company has agreed that, for a period ending 90 days
after the completion of this Exchange Offer, it will make this Prospectus
available to any broker-dealer for use in connection with any such resale. See
"Plan of Distribution".
The Original Preferred Shares and the New Preferred Shares constitute new
issues of securities with no established trading market. Any Original Preferred
Shares not tendered and accepted in the Exchange Offer will remain outstanding.
To the extent that Original Preferred Shares are tendered and accepted in the
Exchange Offer, a holder's ability to sell untendered, and tendered but
unaccepted, Original Preferred Shares could be adversely affected. Following
consummation of the Exchange Offer, the holders of Original Preferred Shares
will continue to be subject to the existing restrictions on transfer thereof and
the Company will have no further obligation to such holders to provide for the
registration under the Securities Act of the Original Preferred Shares except
under certain limited circumstances. See "Registration Rights". No assurance can
be given as to the liquidity of the trading market for either the Original
Preferred Shares or the New Preferred Shares.
The Company will not receive any proceeds from the issuance of New
Preferred Shares in the Exchange Offer. The Exchange Offer is not conditioned
upon any minimum number of Original Preferred Shares being tendered for
exchange. The Exchange Offer will expire at 5:00 p.m., New York City time, on
, 1998, unless extended (the "Expiration Date"). The date of
acceptance for exchange of the Original Preferred Shares (the "Exchange Date")
will be the first business day following the Expiration Date, upon surrender of
the Original Preferred Shares. Original Preferred Shares tendered pursuant to
the Exchange Offer may be withdrawn at any time prior to the Expiration Date;
otherwise such tenders are irrevocable.
------------------------
SEE "RISK FACTORS" BEGINNING ON PAGE 14 FOR A DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN
FACTORS THAT SHOULD BE CONSIDERED BY PARTICIPANTS IN THE EXCHANGE OFFER.
------------------------
THESE SECURITIES HAVE NOT BEEN APPROVED OR DISAPPROVED BY THE SECURITIES AND
EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION NOR HAS THE SECURITIES
AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION PASSED UPON THE
ACCURACY OR ADEQUACY OF THIS PROSPECTUS. ANY REPRESENTATION TO THE CONTRARY IS A
CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
------------------------
The date of this Prospectus is , 1998
3
NOTICE TO INVESTORS
Based on interpretations by the staff of the Securities and Exchange
Commission (the "Commission") set forth in no-action letters issued to third
parties, the Company believes that the New Preferred Shares issued pursuant to
the Exchange Offer in exchange for Original Preferred Shares may be offered for
resale, resold and otherwise transferred by a holder thereof without compliance
with the registration and prospectus delivery provisions of the Securities Act,
provided that the holder is acquiring the New Preferred Shares in the ordinary
course of its business, is not participating and has no arrangement or
understanding with any person to participate in the distribution of the New
Preferred Shares and is not an "affiliate" of the Company within the meaning of
Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Holders of Original Preferred Shares wishing to
accept the Exchange Offer must represent to the Company that such conditions
have been met. Each broker-dealer who holds Original Preferred Shares acquired
for its own account as a result of market-making or other trading activities and
who receives New Preferred Shares for its own account in exchange for such
Original Preferred Shares pursuant to the Exchange Offer must acknowledge that
it will deliver a prospectus in connection with any resale of such New Preferred
Shares. The Company believes that none of the registered holders of the Original
Preferred Shares is an "affiliate" (as such term is defined in Rule 405 under
the Securities Act) of the Company.
This Prospectus, as it may be amended or supplemented from time to time,
may be used by a broker-dealer in connection with resales of New Preferred
Shares received in exchange for Original Preferred Shares acquired by such
broker-dealer as a result of market-making or other trading activities. The
Letter of Transmittal states that by acknowledging that it will deliver a
prospectus in connection with any resale of such New Preferred Shares, and by
delivering a prospectus, a broker-dealer will not be deemed to admit that it is
an "underwriter" within the meaning of the Securities Act. The Company has
agreed to make this Prospectus (as it may be amended or supplemented) available
to any such broker-dealer that requests copies of such Prospectus in the Letter
of Transmittal for use in connection with any such resale for a period of up to
90 days after the completion of this Exchange Offer. See "Plan of Distribution".
Prior to the Exchange Offer, there has been no public market for the New
Preferred Shares. There can be no assurance as to the liquidity of any markets
that may develop for the New Preferred Shares, the ability of holders to sell
the New Preferred Shares, or the price at which holders would be able to sell
the New Preferred Shares. The Company does not intend to apply for listing of
the New Preferred Shares for trading on any securities exchange or for inclusion
of the New Preferred Shares in any automated quotation system. The National
Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. ("NASD") has designated the Original
Preferred Shares as securities eligible for trading in the Private Offerings,
Resales and Trading through Automatic Linkages ("PORTAL") market of the NASD and
the Company has been advised that Goldman, Sachs & Co., Lehman Brothers Inc. and
Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated have heretofore acted as
market makers for the Original Preferred Shares. The Company has been advised by
each of the aforesaid market makers that it currently intends to make a market
in the New Preferred Shares. Future trading prices of the New Preferred Shares
will depend on many factors, including, among other things, prevailing interest
rates, the Company's operating results and the market for similar securities.
Historically, the market for securities similar to the New Preferred Shares has
been subject to disruptions that have caused substantial volatility in the
prices of such securities. There can be no assurance that any market for the New
Preferred Shares, if such market develops, will not be subject to similar
disruptions. See "Risk Factors -- Absence of Public Market".
The Company will not receive any proceeds from, and has agreed to bear the
expenses of, the Exchange Offer. No underwriter is being used in connection with
the Exchange Offer.
THE EXCHANGE OFFER IS NOT BEING MADE TO, NOR WILL THE COMPANY ACCEPT
SURRENDERS FOR EXCHANGE FROM, HOLDERS OF ORIGINAL PREFERRED SHARES IN ANY
JURISDICTION IN WHICH THE EXCHANGE OFFER OR THE ACCEPTANCE THEREOF WOULD NOT BE
IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SECURITIES OR BLUE SKY LAWS OF SUCH JURISDICTION.
i
4
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
This Prospectus includes "forward-looking statements", including statements
containing the words "believes", "anticipates", "expects" and words of similar
import. All statements other than statements of historical fact included in this
Prospectus including, without limitation, such statements under "Summary", "Risk
Factors", "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
Results of Operations" and "Business" and elsewhere herein, regarding the
Company or any of the transactions described herein, including the timing,
financing, strategies and effects of such transactions and the Company's growth
strategy and anticipated growth, are forward-looking statements. Important
factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations
are disclosed in this Prospectus, including, without limitation, in conjunction
with the forward-looking statements in this Prospectus and/or under "Risk
Factors". The Company does not intend to update these forward-looking
statements.
------------------------
Market data and certain industry forecasts used throughout this Prospectus
were obtained from internal surveys, market research, publicly available
information and industry publications. Industry publications generally state
that the information contained therein has been obtained from sources believed
to be reliable, but that the accuracy and completeness of such information is
not guaranteed. Similarly, internal surveys and market research, while believed
to be reliable, have not been independently verified, and none of the Company or
the Purchasers makes any representation as to the accuracy of such information.
------------------------
Network Plus and the Network Plus logo are registered service marks of the
Company and Simplicity Pricing is a service mark of the Company. This Prospectus
also makes reference to trade names, trademarks and service marks of other
companies, which are the property of their respective owners.
------------------------
AVAILABLE INFORMATION
The Company has filed with the Commission a Registration Statement on Form
S-4 (the "Registration Statement", which term shall include all amendments,
exhibits, annexes and schedules thereto) pursuant to the Securities Act, and the
rules and regulations promulgated thereunder, covering the New Preferred Shares
being offered hereby. This Prospectus does not contain all the information set
forth in the Registration Statement, certain parts of which are omitted in
accordance with the rules and regulations of the Commission. Statements made in
this Prospectus as to the contents of any contract, agreement or other document
referred to in the Registration Statement are not necessarily complete. With
respect to each such contract, agreement or other document filed as an exhibit
to the Registration Statement, reference is made to the exhibit for a more
complete description of the matter involved, and each such statement shall be
deemed qualified in its entirety by such reference.
The Company is subject to the informational requirements of the Exchange
Act, and in accordance therewith is required to file reports and other
information with the Commission. All reports and other information filed by the
Company with the Commission may be inspected without charge at the public
reference facilities maintained by the Commission at 450 Fifth Street, NW,
Washington, D.C. 20549, and at the regional offices of the Commission located at
Seven World Trade Center, 13th Floor, New York, New York 10048 and Citicorp
Center, 500 West Madison Street, Suite 1400, Chicago, Illinois 60661. Copies of
such documents can be obtained at the public reference section of the
Commission, 450 Fifth Street, NW, Washington, D.C. 20549, at prescribed rates.
The Commission maintains a Web site (http://www.sec.gov) that contains reports,
proxy and information statements and other information regarding registrants,
including the Company, that file electronically with the Commission.
ii
5
While any New Preferred Shares remain outstanding, the Company will make
available, upon request, to any holder and any prospective purchaser of New
Preferred Shares the information required pursuant to Rule 144A(d)(4) under the
Securities Act during any period in which the Company is not subject to Section
13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act.
Potential investors may also obtain a copy of the Certificate of
Designation governing the Series A Preferred Stock and the Exchange and
Registration Rights Agreement referred to herein by writing to the Company at
234 Copeland Street, Quincy, Massachusetts 02169, Attention: Chief Financial
Officer.
------------------------
THE COMPANY WAS INCORPORATED IN DELAWARE IN JULY 1998, AND ITS WHOLLY OWNED
OPERATING SUBSIDIARY, NETWORK PLUS, INC., WAS INCORPORATED IN MASSACHUSETTS IN
MARCH 1990. THE ADDRESS OF THE COMPANY'S PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICE IS 234
COPELAND STREET, QUINCY, MASSACHUSETTS 02169, AND ITS TELEPHONE NUMBER IS (617)
786-4000.
iii
6
SUMMARY
The following summary is qualified in its entirety by, and should be read
in conjunction with, the more detailed information and financial data, including
the financial statements and related notes, appearing elsewhere in this
Prospectus. Unless otherwise indicated, all references to the Company or Network
Plus refer to Network Plus Corp., a Delaware corporation, and its wholly owned
subsidiary Network Plus, Inc., a Massachusetts corporation ("NPI"). Please refer
to the Glossary for the definitions of certain terms used herein and elsewhere
in this Prospectus.
THE COMPANY
OVERVIEW
Network Plus, founded in 1990, is a leading facilities-based integrated
communications provider ("ICP") offering switched long distance, data and
enhanced telecommunications services. The Company's customers consist primarily
of small and medium-sized businesses located in major markets in the
Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States. The Company also
provides international wholesale transport and termination services to major
domestic and international telecommunication carriers. In addition, the Company
intends to offer local services on a commercial basis beginning in late 1998. As
of July 15, 1998, the Company served over 34,000 customers representing in
excess of 150,000 access lines and 30,000 toll-free numbers. All customers are
directly invoiced by the Company on a Network Plus bill. As of July 15, 1998,
the Company had a 152-person sales force located in eight regional offices, and
in 1997 had total revenue of $98 million.
The Company owns network components where economically advantageous and
leases components where more capital efficient. The Company has switches in
Quincy, Massachusetts and Orlando, and intends to add switches throughout the
second half of 1998 and continuing through 1999 in Atlanta, Chicago, Los Angeles
and New York City as well as multiple local traffic switches in the Northeastern
and Southeastern regions of the United States. In May 1998, over 60% of the
Company's revenue was generated by customer traffic carried on its network, and
the Company expects this percentage to increase as the Company further expands
its facilities-based infrastructure. The Company recently entered into two
20-year indefeasible right-of-use ("IRU") agreements pursuant to which it
acquired 625 route miles of dark fiber (1,830 digital fiber miles), that, when
fully deployed and activated, will form a redundant fiber ring connecting major
markets throughout New England and the New York metropolitan area and provide
the Company with significant transmission capacity.
The Company believes that, because of its large and highly focused sales
force and superior customer support, the Company will be successful in rapidly
acquiring new customers, cross-selling local services to its existing long
distance customers, continuing to migrate "off-net" long distance customers to
its network, cross-selling enhanced products and services and maintaining a high
rate of customer retention. The Company experienced a compounded annual growth
rate in customers in the three-year period ended December 31, 1997 of 68%.
The Company's business strategy is to leverage its eight-year operating
history, existing customer base and substantial in-region experience to (i) be a
one-stop ICP offering comprehensive bundled voice and data solutions, (ii)
acquire and retain market share through its direct sales force and focused
customer service, (iii) enhance its facilities-based infrastructure where
economically advantageous and continue the migration of traffic to its network,
(iv) build and retain market share through advanced technologies and an advanced
operational support system, (v) target the market of small and medium-sized
businesses, which the Company believes to be underserved, with a focus on the
Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States, (vi) increase
international wholesale sales and (vii) expand through strategic acquisitions
and alliances.
1
7
NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE
The Company pursues a capital-efficient network deployment strategy that
involves purchasing switches and acquiring or leasing fiber optic transmission
facilities on an incremental basis to satisfy customer demand. The Company
believes that its switch-based, lease-or-acquire transport strategy provides
significant competitive advantages. By owning network components, the Company is
able to generate higher operating margins and maintain greater control over its
network operations. The Company structures its network expansion decisions in a
manner designed to (i) reduce up-front capital expenditures required to enter
new markets, (ii) avoid the risk of stranded investment in under-utilized fiber
networks and (iii) enter markets and generate revenue and positive cash flow
more rapidly than if the Company first constructed its own facilities. Where
market penetration does not economically justify the deployment of its own
network, the Company utilizes the networks of alternative carriers.
In addition to its 625 route miles of dark fiber, Network Plus currently
owns and maintains (i) a Northern Telecom, Inc. ("Nortel") international gateway
and interexchange switch in Quincy, Massachusetts, and (ii) a Nortel
interexchange switch in Orlando. The Company is currently deploying both a
Nortel international gateway and interexchange switch in Los Angeles and a
Nortel interexchange switch in Chicago. The Company has a Network Operations
Center in Quincy, Massachusetts, which monitors the Company's entire network
from a central location, increasing the security, reliability and efficiency of
the Company's operations. The Company is also planning the deployment of local
switching facilities throughout the Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the
United States. The Company intends to further expand its network in geographic
areas where customer concentrations or traffic patterns make expansion
economically advantageous.
SERVICES
Network Plus offers retail telecommunications services primarily to small
and medium-sized businesses. Retail offerings currently include long distance
and toll-free services (both with and without Advanced Intelligent Network
("AIN") features), multiple access options, calling and debit card, paging,
data, and custom management control features. The Company plans to add local
exchange services, Internet services and additional AIN features in the latter
part of 1998 and into 1999. The Company also offers international wholesale
services primarily to interexchange carriers ("IXCs") and international
telecommunications carriers. In May 1998, retail and wholesale offerings
accounted for approximately 78% and 22%, respectively, of the Company's total
revenue.
LARGE AND GROWING SALES FORCE
As of July 15, 1998, Network Plus had a 152-member, highly focused sales
force consisting of a 140-person direct retail sales force, a six-person
international wholesale sales force and a six-person agent and reseller sales
force. The Company's sales approach is to build long-term relationships with its
customers, with the intent of becoming the single-source provider of their
telecommunications services. The Company trains its sales force in-house with a
customer-focused program that promotes increased sales through both customer
attraction and customer retention. All members of the sales force are given
incentives through a commission structure under which commissions are paid on an
ongoing basis for as long as a customer continues to purchase services from the
Company. This "lifetime residual" is intended to motivate the sales force to
remain actively involved with customers and participate in the customer
retention and support process. The Company believes that this customer
support-focused commission structure and in-house training are unique in the
industry and provide the Company with a competitive advantage in attracting and
retaining customers. The sales force is currently located in eight offices and,
by year end 1999, the Company expects to open additional sales offices and
expand its sales force to approximately 400 members. The Company expects that it
will continue to utilize a modular sales force structure and that existing
employees with substantial sales experience will manage new sales offices,
ensuring a continuation of the Company's customer-focused culture. The Company's
sales force director,
2
8
regional sales directors, branch managers and team leaders have an average
employment tenure of over five years with the Company.
MANAGEMENT
Robert T. Hale, Jr., the Company's President and Chief Executive Officer
and a Director and co-founder, has more than 10 years of experience in the
telecommunications industry. Robert T. Hale, the Company's Chairman and
co-founder, has more than eight years of experience in the telecommunications
industry, is a Director and former Chairman of the 600-member Telecommunications
Reseller Association (the "TRA") and has been Chairman of the TRA's Underlying
Carrier Committee since 1992. Network Plus's eight-member Executive Officer
group has an average employment tenure of more than three years with the Company
and an average of over 11 years of experience in the telecommunications
industry. The Company believes that the quality, tenure and teamwork of its
management team will be critical factors in the implementation of its expansion
strategy.
MARKET OPPORTUNITY
As a result of the Telecommunications Act of 1996 (the "Telecommunications
Act") and other federal, state and international initiatives, numerous
telecommunications markets have been opened to competition. In addition, the
increasing globalization of the world economy, along with an increased reliance
on data transmission and Internet access, has expanded the traditional
telecommunications markets. After completing its planned expansion, the Company
expects to have 18 sales offices in 12 states in the Northeastern and
Southeastern regions of the United States. According to industry data, in 1997
there were approximately 8.7 million business lines in the Company's markets in
the Northeastern region (the New England states, New York and New Jersey) and
4.8 million business lines in the Company's markets in the Southeastern region
(Florida, Georgia, North Carolina, South Carolina and Tennessee). The Company
anticipates significant demand for its services, based on its belief that small
and medium-sized businesses are not aggressively targeted by large
telecommunications providers and are underserved with respect to customer
service and support.
BUSINESS STRATEGY
Network Plus intends to undertake an aggressive growth strategy to meet its
goal of becoming the ICP of choice providing one-stop telecommunications
solutions to customers in its markets. The Company's future success will depend
upon its ability to implement this strategy. Unlike many emerging
telecommunications companies, the Company has a proven eight-year operating
history. The Company believes that the collective talent and telephony
experience of its management and employee base provide a competitive advantage
and position the Company to effectively implement its growth strategy, which
includes the following:
PROVIDE INTEGRATED TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A key element in the Company's growth will be the implementation of a
marketing and operating plan that emphasizes an integrated voice and data
telecommunications solution. To a large extent, customers the Company expects to
target have not previously had the opportunity to purchase bundled services from
a single provider. The Company believes that these customers will prefer one
source for all of their telecommunications requirements, including products,
billing and service. The Company intends to be the single source of, and provide
a consolidated bill for, integrated local, long distance and other
telecommunications services, in addition to providing a single point of contact
for customer service, product inquiries, repairs and billing questions. The
Company believes that offering one-stop integrated communications services will
enable it to further penetrate its
3
9
existing markets, expand its customer base, capture a larger portion of its
customers' total expenditures on telecommunications services and increase
customer retention.
EXPAND SALES FORCE AND FOCUS ON CUSTOMER SERVICE
The Company intends to significantly expand its sales force to both acquire
and support a growing customer base. As of July 15, 1998, the Company's sales
force consisted of 152 members and is expected to grow to approximately 400 by
year end 1999. To support its customer base, the Company provides customer
service 24 hours per day, 365 days per year, and estimates that its customer
service representatives currently have an average response time for answering
incoming calls of under 15 seconds. In addition, the commission structure of the
Company's direct retail sales force is designed to promote a high level of
ongoing customer care and to assure that the sales staff remains actively
involved in the customer service process. Similarly, the compensation of
customer support personnel is designed to promote a high level of ongoing
customer care and retention. The Company believes that its sales and customer
service processes have resulted in a customer retention rate that is higher than
that of many competitors and differentiate the Company as a customer-focused
ICP, giving it a competitive advantage.
ENHANCE FACILITIES-BASED INFRASTRUCTURE
The Company intends to continue the migration of customer traffic to its
own network and to cross-sell new services, such as local service, to its
customers. Expansion of the Company's facilities-based infrastructure with both
fiber and switches will increase the proportion of telecommunications traffic
that is originated or terminated on its network, which the Company believes will
result in higher long-term operating margins and greater control over its
operations. The Company's approach to network design is structured to minimize
the capital investment necessary to provide service, avoid spending capital
where not economically justifiable, better match the commitment of capital to
the onset of revenue-generating activities and generate cash flow more quickly.
Throughout the second half of 1998 and continuing through 1999, the Company
intends to enhance its facilities by purchasing and installing (i) Nortel
interexchange switches in Chicago and New York, (ii) a Nortel interexchange and
local switch in Atlanta, (iii) a Nortel interexchange and international gateway
switch in Los Angeles and (iv) multiple local traffic switches throughout the
Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States. In addition, the
Company intends to begin offering high-quality dedicated and dial-up Internet
services.
CONTINUE INVESTING IN ADVANCED TECHNOLOGIES AND AN ADVANCED OPERATIONAL SUPPORT
SYSTEM
Network Plus expects to continue to invest in advanced technologies that
provide strategic advantages by integrating the Company's network facilities
with its operational support system ("OSS") to enhance service response time.
The Company intends to deploy Nortel's Service Builder throughout its network
infrastructure, which will elevate the Company's network from a state-of-the-art
SS7 network to a next-generation intelligent network. Service Builder will also
permit the rapid deployment of "designer" intelligent network products and
services such as nationwide "follow me" numbers and Time-of-Day Routing, as well
as accelerate the Company's compliance with legally mandated services such as
local number portability ("LNP"). To support integrated provisioning and
customer care for all products and services, the Company is developing an open
scalable client/server Oracle-based platform that is expected to better
integrate its operations, both geographically and among departments. The Company
believes that these technologies will provide a long-term competitive advantage
by allowing a more rapid implementation of switched local services in its
markets, shortening the time between the receipt of a customer order and the
generation of revenue and enabling a higher level of focused customer care.
4
10
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TARGET UNDERSERVED MARKETS WITH A SUPER-REGIONAL FOCUS
Network Plus intends to continue targeting small and medium-sized
businesses in the Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States,
its primary service areas, while expanding into other markets in the
Mid-Atlantic region, Illinois and California. The Company will seek to be among
the first to market integrated communications services in many of its markets.
The Company believes that the Northeastern and Southeastern regions are
particularly attractive due to a number of factors, including (i) the population
density in the Northeast; (ii) a large number of rapidly growing metropolitan
clusters in the Southeast, such as Atlanta, Miami/Fort Lauderdale and Orlando;
and (iii) the relatively small number of significant competitors to the
incumbent local exchange carriers ("ILECs"). In addition, the Company believes
that small and medium-sized businesses have been underserved by large
competitors with respect to customer service and support, and that its emphasis
on customer service, support and satisfaction provides it with a distinct
competitive advantage. The Company also believes that ILECs, such as regional
Bell operating companies ("RBOCs"), and the largest national carriers primarily
concentrate their sales and marketing efforts on residential and large business
customers and that the market for small and medium-sized businesses is generally
less competitive.
INCREASE INTERNATIONAL WHOLESALE SALES
The Company intends to continue targeting the sale of both international
and domestic termination and transport services to wholesale customers such as
large IXCs and international telecommunications carriers. The Company believes
that the international market represents a growing opportunity as a result of
the rapidly increasing globalization of the world economy. The Company's
international department is focused on the development of offshore
telecommunications relationships that provide the Company with lower
international termination costs as well as greater price stability than can be
obtained from U.S.-based carriers. These relationships are being leveraged by
the Company to obtain revenue through the domestic termination of offshore-
originated traffic, in addition to their primary role of enabling the Company to
offer international termination to its customers. The Company has already made
significant investments in its international network capabilities, including a
Nortel international gateway switch in Quincy, Massachusetts and lease and
indefeasible right of use ("IRU") arrangements for international submarine cable
capacity in TAT 12/13 and Americas I in the Atlantic Ocean and TPC-5 in the
Pacific Ocean, as well as various subsidiary feeder cable systems. In addition
to increasing revenue, the Company expects that its strategy of selling
international wholesale services will lower the overall cost of carrying
international traffic and result in more attractive service offerings in its
core retail markets. As of June 1, 1998, the Company provided its international
wholesale services to 13 domestic and foreign telecommunications carriers, and
in May 1998 such services accounted for 22% of the Company's revenue.
EXPAND THROUGH STRATEGIC ACQUISITIONS AND ALLIANCES
As part of its expansion strategy, the Company plans to consider
acquisitions, joint ventures and strategic alliances in telecommunications,
Internet access and other related service areas. The Company believes that
acquisitions of, and joint ventures and other strategic alliances with, related
or complementary businesses may enable it to more rapidly expand by adding new
customers, new services, additional customer service and technical support
capabilities, and additional cash flow. The acquisitions could be funded by
cash, bank financing or the issuance of debt or equity securities. The Company
is evaluating and often engages in discussions regarding various acquisition
opportunities, but is not currently a party to any agreement for a material
acquisition.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5
11
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RECENT DEVELOPMENTS
FIBER ACQUISITIONS
The Company entered into two 20-year IRU agreements in July 1998 pursuant
to which it acquired 625 route miles of dark fiber (1,830 digital fiber miles).
When the fiber is fully deployed and activated, it will form a redundant fiber
ring connecting major markets throughout New England and the New York
metropolitan area, providing the Company with significant transmission capacity.
The Company anticipates activation of the New York-to-Boston segment in the
second half of 1998 and activation of the full fiber ring in 1999.
RECENT HIRES
The Company hired the following employees during the summer of 1998, who
provide the Company with significant expertise in the design, development and
provisioning of local telecommunications services and networks:
Michael F. Oyster has joined Network Plus as President of the Local
Services Division. Mr. Oyster has 22 years of experience in the
telecommunications industry, including local services, long distance services,
and voice and data equipment. Most recently, Mr. Oyster was the Regional Vice
President and General Manager of Teleport Communications Group ("TCG") in New
York.
Joseph Haines has joined Network Plus as Vice President of Local Operations
and will be responsible for the design, engineering and implementation of the
Company's local service offering. From 1992 to 1998, Mr. Haines held various
positions with TCG, most recently as Regional Vice President of Operations for
TCG's largest network. In that position, Mr. Haines was responsible for
constructing and deploying network transmission and switching facilities. Mr.
Haines developed and managed TCG's national network management center,
supervising TCG's network of switches and multiplexing equipment.
Lisa Korner has joined Network Plus as Director of New Market Development,
and will be responsible for market analysis, territory development planning and
regulatory/LEC implementation. From 1989 to 1998, Ms. Korner held various
positions with TCG, most recently as Sales Director responsible for all sales to
general business customers in New York and also as Manager of the independent
sales channel consisting of over 50 agents.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6
12
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
THE EXCHANGE OFFER
The Exchange Offer............ The Company is offering, upon the terms and
subject to the conditions of the Exchange
Offer, to exchange one New Preferred Share for
each Original Preferred Share. The terms of the
New Preferred Shares are substantially
identical in all respects to the terms of the
Original Preferred Shares for which they may be
exchanged pursuant to the Exchange Offer,
except that (i) the offer of the New Preferred
Shares will have been registered under the
Securities Act and, therefore, the New
Preferred Shares will be freely transferable by
holders thereof (except as otherwise described
herein) and not bear a legend regarding
restrictions on transfer, (ii) holders of the
New Preferred Shares will not be entitled to
certain rights of the holders of the Original
Preferred Shares under the Registration
Agreement (as defined below), which rights with
respect to the Original Preferred Shares will
terminate on consummation of the Exchange
Offer, and (iii) the New Preferred Shares will
not contain any provisions regarding the
payment of Special Dividends.
New Preferred Shares issued pursuant to the
Exchange Offer in exchange for the Original
Preferred Shares may be offered for resale,
resold and otherwise transferred by holders
thereof (other than any holder which is (i) an
"affiliate" of the Company within the meaning
of Rule 405 under the Securities Act, (ii) a
broker-dealer who acquired Original Preferred
Shares directly from the Company or (iii)
broker-dealers who acquired Original Preferred
Shares as a result of market making or other
trading activities) without compliance with the
registration and prospectus delivery provisions
of the Securities Act provided that such New
Preferred Shares are acquired in the ordinary
course of such holders' business and such
holders are not engaged in, and do not intend
to engage in, and have no arrangement or
understanding with any person to participate
in, a distribution of such New Preferred
Shares. Each broker-dealer that receives New
Preferred Shares for its own account in
exchange for Original Preferred Shares, where
such Original Preferred Shares were acquired by
such broker-dealer as a result of market-making
activities or other trading activities, must
acknowledge that it will deliver a prospectus
in connection with any resale of such New
Preferred Shares. See "Plan of Distribution".
Minimum Condition............. The Exchange Offer is not conditioned upon any
minimum number of Original Preferred Shares
being tendered for exchange.
Expiration Date............... The Exchange Offer will expire on the
Expiration Date, which is at 5:00 p.m., New
York City time, on , 1998 unless
extended.
Exchange Date................. The first date of acceptance for exchange for
the Original Preferred Shares will be the first
business day following the
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7
13
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Expiration Date, upon surrender of the Original
Preferred Shares.
Conditions to the Exchange
Offer......................... The obligation of the Company to consummate the
Exchange Offer is subject to certain
conditions. See "The Exchange Offer--Conditions
to the Exchange Offer". The Company reserves
the right to terminate or amend the Exchange
Offer at any time prior to the Expiration Date
upon the occurrence of certain specified
events.
Withdrawal Rights............. Tenders may be withdrawn at any time prior to
the Expiration Date. Any Original Preferred
Shares not accepted for any reason will be
returned without expense to the tendering
holders thereof as promptly as practicable
after the expiration or termination of the
Exchange Offer.
Procedures for Tendering
Original Preferred Shares..... See "The Exchange Offer--How to Tender".
Federal Income Tax
Consequences.................. For federal income tax purposes, U.S. Holders
(as defined) should not recognize any taxable
gain or loss as a result of the exchange of
Original Preferred Shares for New Preferred
Shares.
Effect on Holders of Original
Preferred Shares............ As a result of the making of the Exchange
Offer, and upon acceptance for exchange of all
validly tendered Original Preferred Shares
pursuant to the terms of the Exchange Offer,
the Company will have fulfilled a covenant
contained in the terms of the Original
Preferred Shares and the Exchange and
Registration Rights Agreement, dated September
1, 1998 (the "Registration Agreement"), among
the Company and Goldman, Sachs & Co., Lehman
Brothers Inc., and Merrill Lynch, Pierce,
Fenner & Smith Incorporated (collectively, the
"Purchasers"), and, accordingly, the holders of
the Original Preferred Shares will have no
further registration or other rights under the
Registration Agreement, except under certain
limited circumstances. See "Registration
Rights". Holders of the Original Preferred
Shares who do not tender their Original
Preferred Shares in the Exchange Offer will
continue to hold such Original Preferred Shares
and will be entitled to all the rights and
limitations applicable thereto under the
Certificate of Designation. All untendered, and
tendered but unaccepted, Original Preferred
Shares will continue to be subject to the
restrictions on transfer provided for in the
Original Preferred Shares and the Preferred
Shares. To the extent that Original Preferred
Shares are tendered and accepted in the
Exchange Offer, the trading market, if any, for
the Original Preferred Shares could be
adversely affected. See "Risk Factors--Failure
to Exchange".
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8
14
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use of Proceeds............... The Company will not receive any proceeds from
the issuance of New Preferred Shares in the
Exchange Offer.
Exchange Agent................ American Stock Transfer & Trust Company is
serving as exchange agent (the "Exchange
Agent") in connection with the Exchange Offer.
THE SERIES A PREFERRED STOCK
The Exchange Offer applies to 40,000 outstanding Original Preferred Shares.
The terms of the New Preferred Shares are substantially identical in all
respects to the terms of the Original Preferred Shares for which they may be
exchanged pursuant to the Exchange Offer, except that (i) the offer of the New
Preferred Shares will have been registered under the Securities Act and,
therefore, the New Preferred Shares will be freely transferable by holders
thereof (except as otherwise described herein) and not bear a legend regarding
restrictions on transfer, (ii) holders of the New Preferred Shares will not be
entitled to certain rights of the holders of the Original Preferred Shares under
the Registration Agreement, which rights with respect to the Original Preferred
Shares will terminate on consummation of the Exchange Offer and (iii) the New
Preferred Shares will not contain any provisions regarding the payment of
Special Dividends. See "Description of the Series A Preferred Stock".
Issuer........................ Network Plus Corp.
Securities Offered............ 40,000 shares of 13.5% Series A1 Cumulative
Preferred Stock Due 2009, par value $.01 per
share (the "New Preferred Shares" and, together
with the Original Preferred Shares, the "Series
A Preferred Stock").
Liquidation Preference........ $1,000 per share.
Dividends..................... Dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock will
accrue at a rate of 13.5% per annum of the
Specified Amount thereof and will be payable
quarterly in arrears on March 1, June 1,
September 1 and December 1 of each year,
commencing December 1, 1998. Dividends will be
payable in cash, except that on each dividend
payment date occurring on or prior to September
1, 2003, dividends may be paid, at the
Company's option, either in cash or by allowing
such dividends ("Accumulated Dividends") to be
added to the Specified Amount, which shall
initially be equal to the liquidation
preference. It is not anticipated that the
Company will pay any dividends in cash for any
period ending on or prior to September 1, 2003.
Ranking....................... The Series A Preferred Stock will rank senior
to all other classes of equity securities of
the Company outstanding upon consummation of
this Offering. The Company may not authorize
any new class of Parity Stock or Senior Stock
without the approval of the holders of at least
a majority of the shares of Series A Preferred
Stock then outstanding, voting or consenting,
as the case may be, as one class. See
"Description of the Series A Preferred
Stock--Ranking". The Series A Preferred Stock
will rank junior to all indebted-
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9
15
ness and other liabilities of the Company and
any subsidiary of the Company. As of June 30,
1998, on a pro forma basis after giving effect
to the Initial Offering and this Exchange
Offer, (i) the total amount of outstanding
liabilities of the Company, including trade
payables, would have been approximately $26.3
million and (ii) the total amount of
outstanding liabilities of the Company's
subsidiary, including trade payables, would
have been approximately $26.3 million,
approximately $4.3 million of which would have
been secured indebtedness. On October 7, 1998,
the Company entered into a loan agreement in
respect of the New Revolving Credit Facility
(as defined) which provides for borrowings of
up to $60 million. See "Capitalization" and
"Description of Certain Indebtedness".
Optional Redemption........... The Series A Preferred Stock will be redeemable
at the option of the Company, in whole or in
part, at any time on or after September 1, 2003
at the redemption prices set forth herein plus
accumulated and unpaid dividends, if any, to
the date of redemption.
Mandatory Redemption.......... The Series A Preferred Stock is subject to
mandatory redemption at its Specified Amount,
plus, without duplication, accumulated and
unpaid dividends, if any, on September 1, 2009
out of any funds legally available therefor. If
the Company consummates a Senior Notes Offering
(as defined), the net proceeds of which
(excluding underwriting or other placement fees
and proceeds placed in escrow at the closing
thereof pursuant to the terms of such offering)
received by the Company exceed $100 million,
the Company must redeem the outstanding Series
A Preferred Stock with the net proceeds of such
offering at a redemption price of 108% of the
Specified Amount thereof, plus, without
duplication, accumulated and unpaid dividends
to the date of redemption. If the Company
consummates any Public Equity Offerings (as
defined) on or before September 1, 2001, the
Company must apply the first $25 million of net
proceeds from such Public Equity Offering or
Offerings and 50% of each dollar of net
proceeds in excess of $25 million (excluding
underwriting or other placement fees and
calculated on a cumulative basis beginning with
the first such Public Equity Offering) to
redeem the Series A Preferred Stock at the
prices set forth herein plus accumulated and
unpaid dividends, if any, to the date of
redemption.
Change of Control............. In the event of a Change of Control, holders of
the Series A Preferred Stock will have the
right to require the Company to purchase their
Series A Preferred Stock, in whole or in part,
at a price equal to 101% of the Specified
Amount thereof, plus, without duplication,
accumulated and unpaid dividends, if any, to
the date of purchase.
Voting Rights................. Except as described below, and other than as
otherwise required by Delaware law, holders of
the Series A Preferred Stock will have no
voting rights. The Certificate of Designa-
10
16
tion will provide that, upon the failure of the
Company (1) to pay dividends for six or more
dividend periods (whether or not consecutive),
(2) to satisfy any mandatory redemption
obligation with respect to the Series A
Preferred Stock, (3) to comply with the
covenants set forth in the Certificate of
Designation or (4) to make certain payments on
certain indebtedness, the holders of the
outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock,
voting together as a class, will be entitled to
elect to serve on the Board of Directors the
lesser of (x) two additional members of the
Board and (y) that number of directors
constituting 25% of the members of the Board;
and the size of the Board will be immediately
and automatically increased by such number. See
"Description of the Series A Preferred
Stock--Voting Rights".
Certain Covenants............. The Certificate of Designation contains certain
covenants that, among other things, will limit
the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries
to incur additional indebtedness, issue stock
in subsidiaries, pay dividends or make other
distributions in respect of Junior Stock,
repurchase Junior Stock, make certain
investments, enter into certain transactions
with affiliates, sell assets of the Company and
its subsidiaries, and enter into certain
mergers and consolidations.
Registration Covenant;
Exchange Offer................ Pursuant to the Registration Agreement, the
Company has agreed to use its best efforts to
commence the Exchange Offer or to use its best
efforts to cause the Original Preferred Shares
to be registered under the Securities Act so as
to permit resales. If the Company is not in
compliance with its obligations under the
Registration Agreement, Special Dividends will
accrue on the Series A Preferred Stock under
certain circumstances. If the Exchange Offer is
consummated on the terms and within the period
contemplated by this Prospectus, no Special
Dividends will accrue. No Special Dividends
will accrue on the New Preferred Shares. See
"Description of the Series A Preferred
Stock -- Registration Covenant; Exchange
Offer".
For additional information regarding the Series A Preferred Stock, see
"Notice to Investors", "The Exchange Offer", "Description of the Series A
Preferred Stock" and "Certain Federal Income Tax Considerations".
RISK FACTORS
An investment in the Series A Preferred Stock involves a high degree of
risk. Participants in the Exchange Offer should carefully consider the matters
set forth under "Risk Factors".
11
17
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY FINANCIAL DATA
(in thousands, except per share data)
The following table presents summary financial data for the years ended
December 31, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 and 1997 and the six month periods ended
June 30, 1997 and 1998. The financial and balance sheet data for the years
ending December 31, 1995, 1996 and 1997 have been derived from financial
statements (including those set forth elsewhere in this Prospectus) that have
been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, independent accountants. The
financial statements as of December 31, 1996 and 1997 and for each of the years
in the three year period ended December 31, 1997 and the report of
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP relating thereto are included elsewhere in this
Prospectus, and the summary financial data presented below are qualified in
their entirety by reference thereto. The financial data presented for the years
ended December 31, 1993 and 1994 and the six month periods ended June 30, 1997
and June 30, 1998 are derived from the unaudited financial statements of the
Company and in the opinion of management include all adjustments (consisting
only of normal recurring adjustments) necessary for a fair presentation of the
Company's results of operations and financial condition for those periods. The
data for the six month period ended June 30, 1998 are not necessarily indicative
of results for the year ending December 31, 1998 or indicative of future
periods. The summary financial data should be read in conjunction with
"Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations" and the financial statements, including the notes thereto, of the
Company appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus.
SIX MONTHS
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, ENDED JUNE 30,
----------------------------------------------- -----------------
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1997 1998
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenue......................................... $14,427 $30,754 $49,024 $75,135 $98,209 $49,381 $52,305
Direct cost of revenue.......................... 7,120 16,061 35,065 57,208 78,106 38,440 38,828
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Gross profit.................................... 7,307 14,693 13,959 17,927 20,103 10,941 13,477
Selling, general and administrative............. 7,233 11,631 17,698 19,224 25,704 10,567 11,935
Depreciation and amortization................... 67 180 276 539 994 324 951
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Operating income (loss)......................... 7 2,882 (4,014) (1,836) (6,595) 50 591
Interest income................................. 13 37 202 95 86 60 12
Interest expense................................ (5) (2) (40) (312) (557) (177) (578)
Other income (expense), net..................... 27 (65) 7,547 3,468 3,875 12 (97)
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Net income (loss)............................... $ 42 $ 2,852 $ 3,695 $ 1,415 $(3,191) $ (55) $ (72)
======= ======= ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
Net income (loss) per share-basic and diluted... $ -- $ .29 $ .37 $ .14 $ (.32) $ (.01) $ (.01)
======= ======= ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
Weighted average shares outstanding............. 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
======= ======= ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
OTHER FINANCIAL DATA:
Capital expenditures............................ $ 815 $ 813 $ 860 $ 2,135 $ 3,363 $ 1,605 $ 2,364
EBITDA(1)....................................... 74 3,084 (3,738) (1,303) (5,601) 374 1,542
Net cash provided by (used for) operating
activities.................................... 1,689 1,904 2,463 1,051 (3,386) (1,120) 11,327
Net cash provided by (used for) investing
activities.................................... (1,949) 368 (184) (2,014) (3,357) (1,606) (2,348)
Net cash provided by (used for) financing
activities.................................... 19 (1,255) (1,903) 1,596 6,004 2,602 (2,287)
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges(2)........... 9.4x 1,511.0x 101.2x 5.7x -- 0.8x 1.1x
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12
18
JUNE 30, 1998
DECEMBER 31, ---------------------
----------------------------------------------- AS
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 ACTUAL ADJUSTED(3)
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -----------
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Cash....................................... $ 215 $ 1,232 $ 1,608 $ 2,241 $ 1,502 $ 8,194 $33,594
Current assets............................. 2,545 9,264 16,441 19,771 28,521 25,090 52,990
Property and equipment, net................ 819 1,435 1,507 3,075 6,957 8,361 8,361
Working capital............................ 1,592 4,388 2,369 1,621 (3,128) (5,188) 13,712
Total assets............................... 4,647 11,264 18,005 22,915 35,581 33,678 61,578
Other long-term obligations................ 14 24 11 664 3,623 3,167 5,067
Redeemable Series A Preferred Stock(4)..... -- -- -- -- -- -- 33,141
Total stockholders' equity (deficit)....... 539 2,117 3,922 4,101 309 233 (408)
- ---------------
(1) EBITDA consists of net income (loss) before interest and other income,
income taxes, depreciation and amortization. It is a financial performance
measure commonly used in the telecommunications industry and is presented to
assist in an understanding of the Company's operating results. However, it
is not intended to represent cash flows or results of operations in
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles ("GAAP").
(2) For purposes of calculating the ratio of earnings to fixed charges,
"earnings" represent net income before income taxes plus fixed charges, and
"fixed charges" consist of interest expense. For the year ended 1997,
earnings were insufficient to cover fixed charges by $3.1 million.
(3) Gives effect to (i) the Initial Offering (after deducting discounts and
offering expenses payable by the Company, estimated to total $2.5 million)
and the application of the estimated net cash proceeds therefrom, including
the repayment of $9.0 million of borrowings under the Former Bank Credit
Facility (see "Description of Certain Indebtedness") and (ii) the payment of
a $5.0 million dividend to the Company's stockholders and the reinvestment
of $1.9 million by one of the Company's stockholders (representing such
stockholder's approximate net after-tax proceeds of the dividend) in the
form of a long-term loan to the Company. See "Use of Proceeds" and
"Description of Certain Indebtedness -- Stockholder Loan".
(4) Series A Preferred Stock with an initial liquidation preference of $40.0
million was issued by the Company as part of the Units offered in the
Initial Offering. Each Unit consisted of one share of Series A Preferred
Stock, 7.75 Initial Warrants and 15 Contingent Warrants, each Warrant to
purchase one share of Common Stock. An assumed initial value of $4.65
million was allocated to additional paid-in capital, representing the
portion of the purchase price of the Units allocated to the Initial
Warrants, less $0.3 million of the costs associated with the Initial
Offering allocable to the Initial Warrants. No assurance can be given that
the value allocated to the Initial Warrants will be indicative of the price
at which the Initial Warrants may actually trade. Costs of $2.2 million
associated with the Initial Offering have been allocated to the Series A
Preferred Stock.
13
19
RISK FACTORS
In addition to the other information in this Prospectus, prospective
participants in the Exchange Offer should consider carefully the following risk
factors:
NEGATIVE CASH FLOW AND OPERATING LOSSES
The Company had operating losses in each of the years ending December 31,
1997, 1996 and 1995 and negative cash flow in the year ended December 31, 1997,
and there can be no assurance that the Company will achieve or sustain
profitability or generate positive cash flow in the future. The Company expects
to incur significant expenditures in the future in connection with the
acquisition, development and expansion of its network, information technology
systems, employee base, services and customer base.
To the extent the Company's cash needs exceed the Company's available cash
and existing borrowing availability, the funding of these expenditures will be
dependent upon the Company's ability to raise substantial financing. The Company
estimates that, for 1998 and 1999, capital required for expansion of its
infrastructure and services and to fund negative cash flow will be approximately
$140 million. At December 31, 1997, the Company had approximately $1.5 million
in cash and cash equivalents available for such purposes. In addition, the
Company continues to consider potential acquisitions or other arrangements that
may fit the Company's strategic plan. Any such acquisitions or arrangements are
likely to require additional equity or debt financing, which the Company will
seek to obtain as required and may also require that the Company obtain the
consent of its debt holders. The Company may be required to apply all or a
portion of any such financing to redeem all or a portion of the Series A
Preferred Stock. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations" and "Business -- Business Strategy".
SUBSTANTIAL FUTURE CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS; NEED FOR ADDITIONAL FINANCING;
SUBSTANTIAL LEVERAGE
The Company's ability to meet its projected growth is dependent upon its
ability to secure substantial additional financing in the future. The Company
believes that its current cash resources and available cash from the New
Revolving Credit Facility (see "Description of Certain Indebtedness"), together
with the proceeds of the Initial Offering, will be sufficient to fund the
Company's operating losses and planned capital expenditures through at least
August 1999. The New Revolving Credit Facility has a term of 18 months, and the
Company does not expect to have sufficient free cash to repay such facility at
maturity. Accordingly, the Company expects that it will be required to refinance
such facility. To meet its future financing requirements, sources of funding may
include public offerings or private placements of equity or debt securities,
bank loans and additional capital contributions from new or existing
stockholders. The Company may be required to apply all or a portion of any such
financing to redeem all or a portion of the Series A Preferred Stock. There can
be no assurance that additional financing will be available to the Company or,
if available, that it can be obtained on a timely basis, on terms acceptable to
the Company, and within the limitations contained in the Company's commercial
lending agreements and the Certificate of Designation. Failure to obtain such
financing could result in the delay or abandonment of the Company's development
and expansion plans and could have a material adverse effect on the Company.
The Company's business plan for the next 12 months is to a large extent
dependent upon the availability of the New Revolving Credit Facility. There can
be no assurance that the New Revolving Credit Facility or the financing
available thereunder will remain available to the Company through any given
period. In the event the New Revolving Credit Facility ceases to be available to
the Company, the Company believes that its cash resources will be sufficient to
fund the Company's operating losses and capital expenditures for only a limited
time. In such event, the Company would be unable to implement its growth
strategy in accordance with its projected schedule, if at all. See
"Business -- Growth Strategy". Accordingly, the failure of the Company to
maintain the availability of
14
20
such facility through at least August 1999 would have a material adverse effect
on the business and prospects of the Company.
After giving effect to proposed borrowings under the New Revolving Credit
Facility, the Company will have a significant amount of indebtedness
outstanding. In addition, as a result of its growth strategy, the Company
expects to incur additional indebtedness in the future. The Company's ability to
make cash payments with respect to its outstanding indebtedness and the Series A
Preferred Stock, and to repay its obligations on such indebtedness and preferred
stock at maturity, will depend on its future operating performance, which will
be affected by prevailing economic conditions and financial, business and other
factors, certain of which are beyond the Company's control. On or prior to
September 1, 2003, the Company may pay dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock
by allowing such dividends to be added to the Specified Amount of the Series A
Preferred Stock. It is not anticipated that the Company will pay any dividends
in cash for any period ending on or prior to September 1, 2003. Accordingly, the
Specified Amount of the Series A Preferred Stock and the cash dividend
obligation in respect thereof may increase significantly. If the Company is
unable to service its indebtedness or other obligations, it will be forced to
examine alternative strategies that may include actions such as reducing or
delaying capital expenditures, restructuring or refinancing its indebtedness or
preferred stock, or seeking additional debt or equity financing. There can be no
assurance that any of these strategies could be effected on satisfactory terms,
if at all.
The degree to which the Company is leveraged could have important
consequences to the holders of the Securities, including the following: (i) the
Company will have significant and increasing cash interest expense and
significant principal repayment obligations with respect to outstanding
indebtedness; (ii) the Company's degree of leverage and related debt service
obligations could limit its ability to plan for, and make it more vulnerable
than some of its competitors to the effects of, an economic downturn or other
adverse developments; (iii) any cash flow from the operations of the Company may
need to be dedicated to debt service payments and might not be available for
other purposes; and (iv) the Company's ability to obtain additional financing in
the future for working capital, capital expenditures, debt service requirements
or other purposes could be impaired. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis
of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" and "Business -- Business
Strategy".
HOLDING COMPANY STRUCTURE
The Company is a holding company with no material sources of income or
assets other than the stock of its subsidiary, and the Securities will be
obligations exclusively of the Company. Since all of the Company's operations
are conducted through its subsidiary, the Company's cash flow and its ability to
meet its own obligations, including payment of dividends on the Series A
Preferred Stock, are dependent upon the earnings of its subsidiary and the
distributions of those earnings to the Company, or upon loans or other payments
of funds made by such subsidiary to the Company. The Company's subsidiary is a
separate and distinct legal entity and will have no obligation, contingent or
otherwise, to pay any dividends or make any other distributions to the Company
or to otherwise pay amounts due with respect to the Series A Preferred Stock or
to make funds available for such payments. Future debt instruments of the
Company's subsidiary likely will impose significant restrictions that affect,
among other things, the ability of the Company's subsidiary to pay dividends or
make loans, advances or other distributions to the Company. The Certificate of
Designation permits the Company's subsidiaries to enter into agreements
containing such restrictions. See "Description of Certain Indebtedness". The
ability of the Company's subsidiary to pay dividends and make other
distributions also will be subject to, among other things, applicable state laws
and regulations.
The Series A Preferred Stock will be structurally subordinated to all
existing and future indebtedness, trade payables, preferred stock and other
obligations of the Company's subsidiary (including, without limitation, the New
Revolving Credit Facility). Therefore, the Company's right
15
21
and the rights of its creditors, including the holders of the Series A Preferred
Stock, to participate in the assets of the subsidiary upon the subsidiary's
liquidation or reorganization will be subject to the prior claims of the
subsidiary's creditors and holders of preferred stock, if any, except to the
extent that the Company may itself be a creditor with recognized claims against
the subsidiary, in which case the claims of the Company would still be
effectively subordinated to any security interests in or mortgages or other
liens on the assets of such subsidiary and would be subordinate to any
indebtedness of the subsidiary senior to that held by the Company. As of June
30, 1998, on a pro forma basis after giving effect to the Offering, the total
amount of outstanding consolidated liabilities of the Company, including trade
payables, would have been approximately $26.3 million, approximately $4.3
million of which would have been secured obligations, and (ii) the total amount
of outstanding liabilities of the Company's subsidiary, including trade
payables, would have been approximately $26.3 million, approximately $4.3
million of which would have been secured obligations. See "Description of
Certain Indebtedness". The Certificate of Designation limits, but does not
prohibit, the incurrence of additional indebtedness by the Company and its
subsidiary. Therefore, both the Company and its subsidiary will retain the
ability to incur substantial additional indebtedness, and the Company expects
that it and its subsidiary may incur substantial additional indebtedness in the
future.
ABILITY TO PAY DIVIDENDS ON THE SERIES A PREFERRED STOCK
The ability of the Company to pay any dividends is subject to applicable
provisions of state law, and its ability to pay cash dividends on the Series A
Preferred Stock will be subject to the terms of any indebtedness of the Company
then outstanding. The ability of the Company to pay cash dividends is dependent
upon the receipt of cash from its Subsidiary. See "Risk Factors -- Holding
Company Structure". The ability of the Company to pay cash dividends is also in
part dependent upon the continued availability of the New Revolving Credit
Facility, and there can be no assurance that such facility will remain in
effect. See "Risk Factors -- Substantial Future Capital Requirements; Need for
Additional Financing; Substantial Leverage".
Under Delaware law the Company is permitted to pay dividends on its capital
stock, including the Series A Preferred Stock, only out of its surplus, or in
the event that it has no surplus, out of its net profits for the year in which a
dividend is declared or for the immediately preceding year. Surplus is defined
as the excess of a company's total assets over the sum of its total liabilities
plus the par value of its outstanding capital stock. In order to pay dividends
in cash, the Company must have surplus or net profits equal to the full amount
of the cash dividends at the time such dividend is declared. Delaware law
permits the Board of Directors of the Company to revalue the Company's assets
and liabilities from time to time to their fair market value in order to create
surplus. The Company cannot predict what the value of its assets or the amount
of its liabilities will be in the future, nor the amounts of its net profits,
and, accordingly, there can be no assurance that the Company will be able to pay
cash dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock.
TAX CONSEQUENCES OF DISTRIBUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SERIES A PREFERRED STOCK
It is anticipated that the redemption price of the Series A Preferred Stock
will exceed its issue price (i.e., the portion of the purchase price of a Unit
sold in the Initial Offering that was initially allocated to the Series A
Preferred Stock). As a result, a holder will be required to treat such excess as
a series of constructive distributions on the Series A Preferred Stock occurring
over the term of such stock. The Company intends to treat the redemption price
as the amount that will be paid upon retirement of the Series A Preferred Stock
on September 1, 2009. As a result, the difference between the issue price of the
Series A Preferred Stock and its redemption price on September 1, 2009, will
constitute constructive distributions on the Series A Preferred Stock to U.S.
Holders over the period commencing on the issue date thereof and ending on
September 1, 2009. To the extent of the Company's current and accumulated
earnings and profits (as calculated for Federal income tax purposes), the amount
of each consecutive distribution will be includable in a holder's income as
16
22
ordinary dividend income at the time such distribution is deemed to occur,
notwithstanding that the cash attributable to such income will not be received
by the holder until a subsequent period.
RANKING OF THE SERIES A PREFERRED STOCK
The Company's obligations with respect to the Series A Preferred Stock are
subordinate and junior in right of payment to all present and future
indebtedness of the Company and its subsidiaries, but will rank senior to
existing equity securities of the Company. In the event of bankruptcy,
liquidation or reorganization of the Company, the assets of the Company will be
available to pay obligations on the Series A Preferred Stock only after all
holders of indebtedness, and all other creditors, of the Company have been paid,
and there may not be sufficient assets remaining to pay amounts due on any or
all of the Series A Preferred Stock then outstanding. See "Description of the
Series A Preferred Stock--Ranking".
While any shares of Series A Preferred Stock are outstanding, the Company
may not authorize, create or increase the authorized amount of any class or
series of stock that ranks senior to or pari passu with the Series A Preferred
Stock with respect to the payment of dividends or amounts upon liquidation,
dissolution or winding up without the consent of the holders of a majority of
the outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock. However, without the consent
of any holder of Series A Preferred Stock, the Company may create additional
classes of stock, increase the authorized number of shares of preferred stock or
issue a new series of stock that ranks junior to the Series A Preferred Stock
with respect to the payment of dividends and amounts upon liquidation,
dissolution or winding up.
CERTAIN FINANCIAL AND OPERATING RESTRICTIONS
The Certificate of Designation and the New Revolving Credit Facility impose
operating and financial restrictions on the Company and its subsidiaries. These
restrictions affect, and in certain cases significantly limit or prohibit, among
other things, the ability of the Company or any subsidiaries to incur additional
indebtedness, issue stock of any subsidiaries, create liens on its assets, pay
dividends or make other distributions, sell assets, engage in mergers or
acquisitions or make investments. Failure to comply with any of these
restrictions could limit the availability of borrowings or result in a default
thereunder. In addition, the terms of any debt or equity financings undertaken
by the Company to meet its future cash requirements could restrict the Company's
operational flexibility and thereby adversely affect the Company. See
"Description of Certain Indebtedness" and "Description of the Series A Preferred
Stock".
MANAGEMENT OF RAPID GROWTH
Subject to the sufficiency of its cash resources, the Company intends to
continue to rapidly expand its business. The Company's future performance will
depend, in large part, upon its ability to implement and manage its growth
effectively. The Company's rapid growth has placed, and in the future will
continue to place, a significant strain on its administrative, operational and
financial resources. The Company anticipates that, if successful in expanding
its business, the Company will be required to recruit and hire a substantial
number of new sales and other personnel. Pursuant to the Company's growth
strategy, the Company currently intends to increase the size of its sales force
from 152 as of July 15, 1998 to approximately 400 by the end of 1999. Failure to
retain and attract additional qualified sales and other personnel, including
management personnel who can manage the Company's growth effectively, and
failure to successfully integrate such personnel, could have a material adverse
effect on the Company. To manage its growth successfully, the Company will also
have to continue to improve and upgrade operational, financial, accounting and
information systems, controls and infrastructure as well as expand, train and
manage its employee base. In the event the Company is unable to upgrade its
financial controls and systems adequately to support its anticipated growth, the
Company could be materially adversely affected. See
17
23
"Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations" and "Business -- Business Strategy".
LACK OF EXPERIENCE OFFERING LOCAL AND OTHER TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
The Company's strategy includes offering additional telecommunications
services, including local service and Internet access. The Company has no
experience providing local service and Internet access. To be successful, the
Company must compete successfully with companies that have greater financial
resources and experience than the Company. To provide these additional services,
the Company expects that it will be necessary to make upgrades to its network in
advance of the receipt of any revenue. In addition, the provision of certain of
these services may involve technical requirements with respect to which the
Company has little experience. The provision of these services must also be
successfully integrated into the Company's business. There can be no assurance
that the Company's future services will receive market acceptance in a timely
manner, if at all, or that prices and demand for these services will be
sufficient to provide profitable operations. See "Business -- Business
Strategy", "Business -- Service Offerings -- Planned Services" and "Business --
Network -- Anticipated Network Expansion".
ABILITY TO SECURE AND MAINTAIN INTERCONNECTION AND PEERING ARRANGEMENTS
The Company's success will depend upon its ability to develop and expand
its network infrastructure and support services in order to offer local
telecommunication services, Internet access and other services. Executing the
Company's business strategy will require that the Company enter into agreements,
on acceptable terms and conditions, with various providers of infrastructure
capacity, in particular, interconnection agreements with ILECs and peering
agreements with internet service providers ("ISPs"). No assurance can be given
that all of the requisite agreements can be obtained on satisfactory terms and
conditions.
The Company must enter into agreements for the interconnection of the
Company's network with the networks of the ILECs covering each market in which
the Company intends to offer local service. As of October 1, 1998, the Company
had entered into interconnection agreements with Bell Atlantic with respect to
Massachusetts, New Hampshire and Rhode Island, and the Company expects to
execute additional interconnection agreements in 1998 and early 1999. There can
be no assurance that the Company will successfully negotiate such additional
agreements; the failure to secure and maintain such agreements could have a
material adverse effect on the Company's ability to become a single source
provider of telecommunications services.
Peering agreements between the Company and ISPs will be necessary in order
for the Company to exchange traffic with ISPs without having to pay transit
costs. The basis on which the large national ISPs make peering available or
impose settlement charges is evolving as the provisioning of Internet access and
related services has expanded. Recently, companies that have previously offered
peering have reduced or eliminated peering relationships and are establishing
new, more restrictive criteria for peering. Furthermore, if increasing costs and
other requirements associated with maintaining peering with the major national
ISPs develop, the Company may have to comply with those additional requirements
in order to continue to maintain any peering relationships it negotiates.
Failure to establish and maintain peering relationships would cause the Company
to incur additional operating expenses or abandon certain elements of its
strategy, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See
"Government Regulation".
DEPENDENCE UPON SUPPLIERS AND OTHER SERVICE PROVIDERS
The Company relies on other companies to supply certain key components of
its network infrastructure, including telecommunications services, network
capacity and switching and networking equipment, which, in the quantities and
quality demanded by the Company, are available only from sole or limited
sources. The Company is also dependent upon ILECs and other carriers to
18
24
provide telecommunications services and facilities to the Company and its
customers. The Company has from time to time experienced delays or other
problems in receiving telecommunications services and facilities which it
requests, and there can be no assurance that the Company will be able to obtain
such services or facilities on the scale and within the time frames required by
the Company at an affordable cost, or at all. As the Company expands its service
offerings to include local services, it will compete increasingly with ILECs,
which will serve as a disincentive for such entities to cooperate with the
Company. Any failure to obtain such components, services or additional capacity
on a timely basis at an affordable cost, or at all, would have a material
adverse effect on the Company. See "Business -- Competition" and "Government
Regulation".
In May 1998, approximately 40% of the Company's revenue was attributable to
the resale of long distance service provided by Sprint Communications Company
L.P. ("Sprint"). The current agreement with Sprint, which became effective as of
February 1998, terminates in February 2000, and there can be no assurance that
this agreement will be extended on terms acceptable to the Company, if at all.
Early termination of the Company's relationship with Sprint could have a
material adverse effect on the Company. See "Business -- Network -- Sprint
Agreement".
The accurate and prompt billing of the Company's customers is dependent
upon the timeliness and accuracy of call detail records ("CDRs") provided by any
carrier whose service the Company resells. There can be no assurance that the
current carriers will continue to provide, or that new carriers, including
ILECs, will provide, accurate information on a timely basis, and any such
carrier's failure to do so could have a material adverse effect on the Company.
RELIANCE ON LEASED TRANSPORT FACILITIES AND IRUs
Because the Company leases a portion of its transport capacity, it is
dependent upon the availability of fiber optic transmission facilities owned by
ILECs, competitive local exchange carriers ("CLECs") and other fiber optic
transport providers who lease their fiber optic networks to service providers
such as the Company. Many of these entities are, or may become, competitors of
the Company. See "-- Competition". The Company recently entered into two 20-year
IRU agreements pursuant to which it acquired dark fiber mileage, and may enter
into additional IRU agreements in the future. Integration of fiber mileage
acquired pursuant to IRU agreements into the Company's network will subject the
Company to the risk that the owners of the underlying facilities, who may be
competitors of the Company, will not maintain, or will deny the Company access
to, such facilities. The risks inherent in this approach include, but are not
limited to, the possible inability to negotiate and renew favorable supply
agreements, and dependence on the timeliness of the ILECs, CLECs or other fiber
optic transport providers in processing the Company's orders for customers who
seek to utilize the Company's services. See "Business -- Network".
DEPENDENCE ON RIGHTS-OF-WAY AND OTHER THIRD PARTY AGREEMENTS
To further develop its network, the Company may need to obtain local
franchises and other permits, as well as rights to utilize underground conduit
and aerial pole space and other rights-of-way and fiber capacity from entities
such as ILECs and other utilities, railroads, long distance companies, state
highway authorities, local governments and transit authorities. There can be no
assurance that the Company will be able to obtain and maintain such franchises,
permits and rights needed to implement its business strategy on acceptable
terms. Although the Company does not believe that any such arrangements would be
canceled or would not be renewed as needed, cancellation or non-renewal of such
arrangements could materially adversely affect the Company's business in the
affected area. See "Business -- Network -- Anticipated Network Expansion" and
"Government Regulation".
19
25
COMPETITION
The Company operates in a highly competitive environment and currently does
not have a significant market share in any of its markets. Most of its actual
and potential competitors have substantially greater financial, technical,
marketing and other resources (including brand or corporate name recognition)
than the Company. Also, the continuing trend toward business alliances in the
telecommunications industry and the absence of substantial barriers to entry in
the data and Internet services markets could give rise to significant new
competition.
The long distance telecommunications industry is highly competitive and
affected by the introduction of new services by, and the market activities of,
major industry participants. The Company competes against various national and
regional long distance carriers, including both facilities-based providers and
switchless resellers offering essentially the same services as the Company. In
addition, significant competition is expected to be provided by ILECs. The
Company's success will depend upon its ability to provide high-quality services
at prices competitive with those charged by its competitors. In addition, the
long distance industry is characterized by a high level of customer attrition or
"churn". Such attrition is attributable to a variety of factors, including
initiatives of competitors as they engage in advertising campaigns, marketing
programs and cash payments and other incentives. End users often are not
obligated to purchase any minimum usage amount and can discontinue service
without penalty at any time. The Company's revenue has been, and is expected to
continue to be, affected by churn.
AT&T Corp. ("AT&T"), MCI WorldCom, Inc. ("MCI"), Sprint and other carriers
have implemented new price plans aimed at residential customers with
significantly simplified rate structures, which may have the impact of lowering
overall long distance prices. There can be no assurance that long distance
carriers will not make similar offerings available to the small to medium-sized
businesses that the Company primarily serves. While the Company believes small
and medium-sized business customers are not aggressively targeted by large long
distance providers such as AT&T, MCI and Sprint, there can be no assurance the
Company's customers and potential customers will not be targeted by these or
other providers in the future. Additional pricing pressure may come from
Internet telephony, which is a developing technology that can transmit voice
communications at a cost that may be below that of traditional circuit-switched
long distance service. While Internet telephony is not yet available in all
areas, currently requires the dialing of additional digits and currently
produces sound quality inferior to that of traditional long distance service, it
could eventually become a substitute for traditional long distance service and
put pricing pressure on long distance rates. Any reduction in long distance
prices may have a material adverse effect on the Company's results of
operations.
In the local telecommunications market, the Company's primary competitor
initially is expected to be the ILEC serving each geographic area. ILECs are
established providers of dedicated and local telephone services to all or
virtually all telephone subscribers within their respective service areas. ILECs
also have long-standing relationships with regulatory authorities at the federal
and state levels. While recent Federal Communications Commission ("FCC")
administrative decisions and initiatives provide increased business
opportunities to voice, data and ISPs, they also provide the ILECs with
increased pricing flexibility for their private line, special access and
switched access services. In addition, with respect to competitive access
services, the FCC recently proposed a rule that would provide for increased ILEC
pricing flexibility and deregulation for such access services either
automatically or after certain competitive levels are reached. If the ILECs are
allowed additional flexibility by regulators to offer discounts to large
customers through contract tariffs, decide to engage in aggressive volume and
term discount pricing practices for their customers, or seek to charge
competitors excessive fees for interconnection to their networks, the revenue of
competitors to the ILECs, including the Company, could be materially adversely
affected. If future regulatory decisions afford the ILECs increased access
services pricing flexibility or other regulatory relief, such decisions could
also have a material adverse effect on competitors to the ILECs.
20
26
The Company will also face competition or prospective competition in local
markets from other carriers, many of which have significantly greater financial
resources than the Company. For example, AT&T, MCI and Sprint have each begun to
offer local telecommunications services in major U.S. markets using their own
facilities or by resale of the ILECs' or other providers' services. In addition
to these long distance service providers, entities that currently offer or are
potentially capable of offering local switched services include companies that
have previously operated as competitive access providers, cable television
companies, electric utilities, microwave carriers, wireless telephone system
operators and large customers who build private networks. These entities, upon
entering into appropriate interconnection agreements or resale agreements with
ILECs, including RBOCs, could offer single-source local and long distance
services, similar to those offered or proposed to be offered by the Company.
In addition, a continuing trend towards business combinations and alliances
in the telecommunications industry may create significant new competitors to the
Company. The proposed acquisition of GTE Corp. by Bell Atlantic Corp., the
proposed merger of SBC Communications, Inc. ("SBC") and Ameritech Corp.
("Ameritech"), the merger of MCI and WorldCom, Inc., AT&T's proposed acquisition
of Telecommunications Inc. and its acquisition of Teleport Communications Group,
Inc., TeleGlobe Inc.'s proposed acquisition of Excel Communications, and SBC's
proposed acquisition of Southern New England Telephone, Inc. ("SNET"), are
examples of some of the alliances that are being formed. Many of these combined
entities will have resources far greater than those of the Company. These
combined entities may provide a bundled package of telecommunications products,
including local and long distance telephony, that is in direct competition with
the products offered or proposed to be offered by the Company, and may be
capable of offering these products sooner and at more competitive rates than the
Company.
The Company will also face competition from fixed wireless services,
including Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service ("MMDS"), Local
Multipoint Distribution Service ("LMDS"), 24 GHz and 38 GHz wireless
communications systems, FCC Part 15 unlicensed wireless radio devices, and other
services that use existing point-to-point wireless channels on other
frequencies. In addition, the FCC has allocated a number of spectrum blocks for
use by wireless devices that do not require site or network licensing. A number
of vendors have developed such devices that may provide competition to the
Company, particularly for certain low data-rate transmission services.
The FCC has authorized cellular, personal communications service ("PCS"),
and other commercial mobile radio service ("CMRS") providers to offer wireless
services to fixed locations, rather than just to mobile customers, without
limitation. Previously, cellular, PCS and CMRS providers could provide service
to fixed locations only on an ancillary or incidental basis. The authority to
provide fixed as well as mobile services will enable CMRS providers to offer
wireless local loop service and other services to fixed locations (e.g., office
and apartment buildings) in direct competition with the Company and existing
providers of traditional wireless telephone service.
Section 271 of the Telecommunications Act prohibits any RBOC from providing
long distance service that originates (or, in certain cases, terminates) in one
of its in-region states until the RBOC has satisfied certain statutory
conditions in that state and has received the approval of the FCC. The FCC has
denied the following applications for such approval: SBC's Texas application in
June 1998; SBC's Oklahoma application in June 1997; Ameritech's Michigan
application in August 1997; and BellSouth Corporation's applications for South
Carolina in December 1997 and Louisiana in February 1998 and October 1998. The
Company anticipates that a number of RBOCs will file additional applications for
in-region long distance authority in 1998. Bell Atlantic recently received
conditional approval from the New York Public Service Commission of its Section
271 application for New York State. Thus, it is expected that Bell Atlantic will
file its Section 271 application with the FCC in the near future. The FCC has 90
days from the date an application for in-region long distance authority is filed
to decide whether to grant or deny the application.
21
27
Once the RBOCs are allowed to offer widespread in-region long distance
services, both they and the largest IXCs will be in a position to offer
single-source local and long distance. On December 31, 1997, a United States
District Court judge in Texas held unconstitutional certain sections of the
Telecommunications Act, including Section 271. Section 271 sets forth a
"competitive checklist" that an RBOC must satisfy prior to obtaining authority
to provide in-region interLATA services. This decision would permit the three
RBOCs involved in the suit immediately to begin offering widespread in-region
long distance services. The decision, however, was stayed on February 11, 1998
by the District Court pending the outcome of an appeal on the merits to the U.S.
Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit. On September 4, 1998, the Fifth Circuit
reversed the District Court's ruling. Among other things, the Fifth Circuit
found sec.sec.271-75 of the Telecommunication Act to be non-punitive in
character and, therefore, not a bill of attainder as that term has been defined
by the Supreme Court.
In addition, new FCC rules went into effect in February 1998 that make it
substantially easier for many non-U.S. telecommunications companies to enter the
U.S. market, thus potentially further increasing the number of competitors.
The market for data communications and Internet access services is also
extremely competitive. There are no substantial barriers to entry, and the
Company expects that competition will intensify in the future. See
"Business -- Competition", "Business -- Industry Overview" and "Government
Regulation".
THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACT AND OTHER REGULATION
Telecommunications services are subject to significant regulations at the
federal, state, local and international levels, affecting the Company and its
existing and potential competitors. Delays in receiving required regulatory
approvals or the enactment of new and adverse legislation, regulations or
regulatory requirements may have a material adverse effect on the Company's
financial condition, results of operations and cash flow. In addition, future
legislative, judicial and regulatory agency actions could alter competitive
conditions in the markets in which the Company is operating or intends to
operate, in ways that are materially adverse to the Company.
The Company is currently subject to federal and state government regulation
of its telecommunications services. The Company is regulated at the federal
level by the FCC. It is required to obtain and maintain an FCC 214 license in
connection with its international services, and to file and maintain both
domestic and international tariffs containing the currently effective rates,
terms and conditions of service for its long distance services. The FCC has
issued regulations eliminating the domestic tariffing requirement for all
interstate nondominant carriers, except for, under certain circumstances, RBOCs.
Those regulations have been stayed on appeal by third parties, and the Company
is currently required to file tariffs with the FCC. The FCC generally retains
the right to sanction a carrier or revoke its authorization if a carrier
violates applicable laws or regulations.
The Company's long distance telecommunications operations and proposed
local service operations are also subject to various state laws and regulations.
The Company must obtain and maintain certificates of public convenience and
necessity from regulatory authorities in most states in which it offers
intrastate service. In most states, the Company must also file and obtain prior
regulatory approval of tariffs for intrastate services. The Company must update
or amend its tariffs when rates are adjusted or new products are added to
services offered by the Company. Challenges by third parties to the Company's
federal or state tariffs and complaints about the Company's practices could
cause the Company to incur substantial legal and administrative expenses.
The FCC and numerous state agencies also impose prior approval requirements
on transfers of control, including pro forma transfers of control and corporate
reorganizations, and assignments of regulatory authorizations. The Company did
not obtain prior approval for its July 1998 corporate reorganization to create a
holding company structure whereby Network Plus Corp. became the holding company
of Network Plus, Inc. The Company is in the process of filing the necessary
papers
22
28
at the FCC and relevant state commissions seeking nunc pro tunc (retroactive)
approval of the transaction on the grounds that the transaction serves certain
important business needs of the Company and enhances the Company's ability to
market and provide services more efficiently. Although the Company believes that
its applications will be approved in due course, there can be no assurance that
the FCC or state commissions will grant the Company's requests for retroactive
approval and/or will not impose fines or license conditions, commence revocation
proceedings or otherwise exercise their authority to address violations of
applicable statutes and regulations.
The Telecommunications Act has already resulted in comprehensive changes in
the regulatory environment for the telecommunications industry as a whole, and
will have a material impact on the local exchange industry and the competitive
environment in which the Company operates. The concept of competitive
provisioning of local exchange services is a relatively new development in the
telecommunications industry, and the Company cannot predict how the relevant
provisions of the Telecommunications Act will be interpreted and implemented by
the FCC, state regulators, courts and the ILECs. See "Business -- Competition",
"Business-- Industry Overview" and "Government Regulation".
The Company's cost of providing long distance service, and its revenue from
providing local services, will both be affected by changes in "access charges"
and universal service. In 1997, the FCC released an order establishing a
significantly expanded federal universal service subsidy regime to be funded by
interstate carriers and certain other entities. The FCC established new
universal service funds to support telecommunications and information services
provided to qualifying schools, libraries and rural health care providers, and
expanded the federal subsidies for local telephone services provided to low
income consumers. If the federal and state regulations requiring the local
exchange carriers to provide equal access for the origination and termination of
calls by long distance subscribers change or if the regulations governing access
charge rates or universal service contribution change, such changes could have a
material adverse effect on the Company's financial condition, results of
operations and cash flow. On July 18, 1997, the United States Court of Appeals
for the Eighth Circuit overturned many of the rules the FCC had established
pursuant to the Telecommunications Act. The Eighth Circuit decision
substantially limits the FCC's jurisdiction and expands state regulators'
jurisdiction to set and enforce rules governing the development of local
competition. As a result, it is more likely that the rules governing local
competition will vary substantially from state to state. If a patchwork of state
regulations were to develop, it could increase the Company's cost of regulatory
compliance and could make entry into and conduct of business in some markets
more expensive than in others. The U.S. Supreme Court heard oral arguments to
review the Eighth Circuit's decision in October 1998. There can be no assurance
as to how the U.S. Supreme Court will act on the appeal or that the outcome of
the appeal will not have a material adverse effect on the Company's financial
condition, results of operation and cash flow.
DEPENDENCE ON BILLING, CUSTOMER SERVICE AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Integrated management information and processing systems are vital to the
Company's growth and its ability to monitor costs, bill customers, provision
customer orders and achieve operating efficiencies. As the Company continues its
transition to the provisioning of integrated communications services, the need
for sophisticated billing and information systems will increase significantly.
The cost of implementing such systems has been, and is expected to continue to
be, substantial. Also, the Company's plans for the development and
implementation of its internal systems rely on the delivery of products and
services by third party vendors. Failure of these vendors to deliver the
required information in a timely and effective manner and at acceptable costs,
failure of the Company to adequately identify and integrate all of its
information and processing needs, failure of the Company's related processing or
information systems, or the failure of the Company to upgrade systems as
necessary could have a material adverse effect on the Company.
The Company is dependent upon the prompt collection of payment of its
customers' bills and, in turn, upon the creditworthiness of its customers and
the continued implementation of adequate
23
29
revenue assurance programs. The failure of its customers to pay their bills in a
timely manner or the Company's failure to accurately assess the creditworthiness
of its customers and implement adequate revenue assurance programs could have a
material adverse effect on the Company. In 1997, the Company's provision for
doubtful accounts increased by $3.0 million, principally relating to two
customers and an increase in the estimate of bad debt reserve consistent with
the growth in revenue. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations" and "Business -- Management Information
Systems, Provisioning, Billing and Collections".
DEPENDENCE ON KEY PERSONNEL
The Company believes that its success will depend to a significant extent
upon the abilities and continued efforts of its management, particularly Robert
T. Hale, Jr., the Company's Chief Executive Officer and President, Robert T.
Hale, the Company's Chairman of the Board, and other members of its senior
management team. None of the Company's executive officers is subject to an
employment agreement with the Company providing for the officer's continuing
employment. The loss of the services of any of such individuals could have a
material adverse effect on the Company. The success of the Company will also
depend, in part, upon the Company's ability to hire and retain additional key
personnel, including senior management, technical and sales personnel, who are
also being sought by other businesses. Competition for qualified personnel in
the telecommunications industry is intense. Difficulty in hiring and retaining
such personnel could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See
"-- Management of Rapid Growth", "Business -- Employees" and "Management".
IMPACT OF TECHNOLOGICAL CHANGE
The telecommunications industry has been, and is likely to continue to be,
characterized by rapid technological change, frequent new service introductions
and evolving industry standards. Increases or changes in technological
capabilities or efficiencies could create an incentive for more competitors to
enter the facilities-based local exchange business in which the Company intends
to compete. Similarly, such changes could result in lower retail rates for
telecommunications services, which could have a material adverse effect on the
Company's ability to price its services competitively or profitably. Future
technological changes, including changes related to emerging wireline and
wireless transmission and switching technologies and Internet-related services
and technologies, also could have a material adverse effect on the Company.
The Company relies and will continue to rely in part on third parties
(including certain of its competitors and potential competitors) for the
development of and access to communications and networking technology. The
effect of technological changes on the business of the Company cannot be
predicted with any degree of certainty. The Company believes its future success
will depend, in part, on its ability to anticipate or adapt to such changes and
to offer, on a timely basis, services that meet customer demands and evolving
industry standards. There can be no assurance that the Company will obtain
access to new technology on a timely basis or on satisfactory terms, or that the
Company will be able to adapt to such technological changes, offer such services
on a timely basis or establish or maintain a competitive position. Any
technological change, obsolescence or failure to obtain access to important
technologies could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See
"Business -- Industry Overview".
YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE
Many computer systems experience problems handling dates beyond the year
1999. Therefore, some computer hardware and software will need to be modified
prior to the year 2000 in order to remain functional. While the Company believes
that the majority of its software applications will be year 2000 compliant by
the end of 1998, there can be no assurance that all systems will function
adequately beginning in the year 2000. There can also be no assurance the
Company will not incur
24
30
significant unanticipated costs in achieving year 2000 compliance. Furthermore,
if the hardware or software comprising the Company's network elements acquired
from third party vendors, the software applications of the long distance
carriers, LECs, or others on whose services the Company depends or with whom the
Company's systems interface, or the software applications of other suppliers,
are not year 2000 compliant, it could affect the Company's systems, which could
have a material adverse effect on the Company. See "Management's Discussion and
Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations -- Impact of Year
2000".
STRATEGIC INVESTMENTS; BUSINESS COMBINATIONS
In furtherance of its growth strategy, the Company may pursue acquisitions
of, or joint ventures or strategic alliances with, companies engaged in
businesses similar or related to the business of the Company. As consideration
for such acquisitions, the Company may be required to assume liabilities, incur
additional indebtedness or issue equity securities. There can be no assurance
that the Company will be able to obtain such financing. Such acquisitions,
combinations or alliances, if consummated, could increase the Company's
indebtedness and could divert the resources and management of the Company and
would require integration with the Company's existing networks and services.
There can be no assurance that any acquisitions, combinations or alliances will
occur or, if consummated, would be on terms favorable to the Company or would be
successfully integrated into the Company's operations. See "Business -- Business
Strategy -- Expand Through Strategic Acquisitions and Alliances".
DEPENDENCE UPON NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE; RISK OF SYSTEM FAILURE; SECURITY RISKS
The Company's success in attracting and retaining customers requires that
the Company provide adequate reliability, capacity and security in its network
infrastructure. The Company's networks and the networks upon which it depends
are subject to physical damage, power loss, capacity limitations, software
defects, breaches of security (by computer virus, break-ins or otherwise) and
other factors, certain of which may cause interruptions in service or reduced
capacity for the Company's customers. Interruptions in service, capacity
limitations or security breaches could have a material adverse effect on the
Company. See "Business -- Network".
CONTROL BY EXISTING STOCKHOLDERS; DEADLOCK; ANTITAKEOVER PROVISIONS
All of the outstanding Common Stock is owned or voted by Robert T. Hale and
Robert T. Hale, Jr., each an Officer and Director of the Company. Consequently,
management will have complete control over all of the Company's affairs and will
have the ability to control the election of all members of the Company's Board
of Directors and the outcome of all corporate actions requiring stockholder
approval.
Because the outstanding Common Stock is owned equally by the Company's two
stockholders, the failure of such stockholders to agree on a matter that
requires the approval of the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of
Common Stock would result in a deadlock, which could have the effect of
preventing or delaying the Company from taking any action on the matter. Such a
deadlock could have a material adverse effect on the Company. See "Management"
and "Stock Ownership".
Robert T. Hale and Robert T. Hale, Jr. will have the authority to amend the
Company's Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws to include certain provisions
that may have the effect of discouraging, delaying or making more difficult a
change in control of the Company or preventing the removal of incumbent
directors even if holders of the Warrants or other securities of the Company
were to deem such action to be in the best interests of the Company. Among other
things, the Certificate of Incorporation may be amended to provide for a
classified Board of Directors. In addition, the Certificate of Incorporation
allows the Board of Directors to issue shares of preferred stock and fix the
rights, privileges and preferences of those shares without any further vote or
action
25
31
by the stockholders. The rights of the holders of Common Stock will be subject
to, and may be adversely affected by, the rights of the holders of any preferred
stock that may be issued in the future. Any such issuance of shares of preferred
stock could have the effect of making it more difficult for a third party to
acquire a majority of the outstanding voting stock of the Company. In addition,
the Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws could be amended to, among other
things, limit the manner in which directors may be nominated by the stockholders
and limit the manner in which proposals may be made at stockholder meetings. The
Company may also elect to be subject to Section 203 of the Delaware General
Corporation Law, which could have the effect of delaying or preventing a change
of control of the Company. To the extent that these provisions discourage
takeover attempts, they could deprive stockholders of opportunities to realize
takeover premiums for their shares or could depress the market price of the
Company's securities.
FUNDING OF REPURCHASE OBLIGATIONS; ABSENCE OF SINKING FUND; REDEMPTION OF SERIES
A PREFERRED STOCK UPON MATURITY
There is no sinking fund with respect to the Series A Preferred Stock, and
in September 2009 all outstanding shares thereof will become subject to
mandatory redemption by the Company. Also, upon the occurrence of certain
earlier events, including a change in control of the Company, the Company will
be required to offer to repurchase all or a portion of the outstanding Series A
Preferred Stock. The source of funds for any such payment at maturity or earlier
repurchase is expected to be the Company's available cash or cash generated from
operating or other sources, including, without limitation, borrowings or sales
of assets or equity securities of the Company. There can be no assurance that
sufficient funds will be available at the time of any such event to make such
purchase or to make any other required payment. See "Description of the Series A
Preferred Stock". In addition, limitations imposed by other debt obligations of
the Company may limit the Company's ability to repurchase the Series A Preferred
Stock.
ABSENCE OF PUBLIC MARKET
The New Preferred Shares are a new issue of securities for which there is
currently no established market. There can be no assurance as to (i) the
liquidity of any market that may develop, (ii) the ability of the holders of New
Preferred Shares to sell any of their New Preferred Shares, or (iii) the price
at which the holders of New Preferred Shares would be able to sell such shares.
The Company does not presently intend to apply for listing of the New Preferred
Shares on any national securities exchange or on The Nasdaq Stock Market. The
Purchasers have advised the Company that they presently intend to make a market
in the New Preferred Shares. The Purchasers are not obligated, however, to make
a market in such shares, and any such market-making may be discontinued at any
time at the sole discretion of the Purchasers and without notice. Accordingly,
no assurance can be given as to the development or liquidity of any market for
the New Preferred Shares. If a market for the New Preferred Shares were to
develop, such shares could trade at prices that may be higher or lower than
their initial offering price depending on many factors, including prevailing
interest rates, the Company's operating results and prospects for its
performance, the market for similar securities and general economic conditions.
Historically, the market for securities such as the New Preferred Shares has
been subject to disruptions that have caused substantial volatility in the
prices of similar securities. There can be no assurance that, if a market for
any of the New Preferred Shares were to develop, such a market would not be
subject to similar disruptions.
FAILURE TO EXCHANGE
Holders of Original Preferred Shares who do not exchange their Original
Preferred Shares for New Preferred Shares pursuant to the Exchange Offer will
continue to be subject to the restrictions on transfer of such Original
Preferred Shares set forth in the legend thereon as a consequence of the
issuance of the Original Preferred Shares pursuant to exemptions from, or in
transactions not subject to, the registration requirements of the Securities Act
and applicable state securities laws. In general, the Original Preferred Shares
may not be offered or sold, unless registered under the
26
32
Securities Act and applicable state securities laws, or pursuant to an exemption
therefrom. Except under certain limited circumstances, the Company does not
intend to register the Original Preferred Shares under the Securities Act. In
addition, any holder of Original Preferred Shares who tenders in the Exchange
Offer for the purpose of participating in a distribution of the New Preferred
Shares may be deemed to have received restricted securities and, if so, will be
required to comply with the registration and prospectus delivery requirements of
the Securities Act in connection with any resale transaction. To the extent
Original Preferred Shares are tendered and accepted in the Exchange Offer, the
trading market, if any, for the Original Preferred Shares not tendered could be
adversely affected. See "The Exchange Offer".
27
33
USE OF PROCEEDS
The Company will not receive any proceeds from the issuance of New
Preferred Shares in the Exchange Offer. The net proceeds to the Company of the
Initial Offering were approximately $37.5 million. The Company used $9.8 million
of the net proceeds of the Initial Offering to pay down borrowings outstanding
under the Former Bank Credit Facility; the Company intends to use the remainder
of the net proceeds to finance its anticipated expansion, including the
expansion of its local telecommunications infrastructure, information technology
systems and sales force.
Pending application of the net proceeds of the Initial Offering as
described herein, the Company intends to use a portion of such proceeds to
temporarily repay revolving indebtedness and to invest the remainder of such
proceeds in short-term, interest-bearing, U.S. government securities and other
short-term, investment grade securities.
Because of the number and variability of factors that may determine the
Company's use of the net proceeds of the Initial Offering, management will
retain a significant amount of discretion over the application of the net
proceeds. There can be no assurance that such applications will not vary
substantially from the Company's current plans. See "Risk Factors -- Control by
Existing Stockholders; Deadlock; Antitakeover Provisions", "Risk
Factors -- Negative Cash Flow and Operating Losses" and "Risk
Factors -- Substantial Future Capital Requirements; Need for Additional
Financing; Substantial Leverage".
DIVIDEND POLICY
On September 2, 1998, the Company paid a dividend to Robert T. Hale and
Robert T. Hale, Jr. in the aggregate amount of $5.0 million, of which $1.9
million was reinvested by one of the stockholders in the form of a long-term
loan to the Company. For the foreseeable future the Company intends to retain
its earnings for its operations and expansion of its business and it does not
expect to pay dividends on its Common Stock (other than in amounts necessary to
enable the Company's stockholders to pay taxes and related tax preparation
expenses in respect of income allocated to such stockholders through the date
the Company's status as an S corporation ceased). The payment of any future
dividends will be at the discretion of the Board of Directors, except as
required by the terms of the Series A Preferred Stock, and will depend upon,
among other factors, the Company's earnings, financial condition, capital
requirements and general business outlook at the time payment is considered. In
addition, the Company's ability to pay dividends will depend upon the amount of
distributions, if any, received from NPI or any future operating subsidiaries of
the Company. The Company intends to exercise its option to make dividend
payments on the Series A Preferred Stock prior to September 1, 2003 by allowing
such dividends to be added to the Specified Amount of the Series A Preferred
Stock. The New Revolving Credit Facility will, and any future indebtedness
incurred by the Company may, restrict the ability of the Company to pay
dividends. See "Description of Certain Indebtedness", "Description of the Series
A Preferred Stock" and "Description of Capital Stock".
28
34
CAPITALIZATION
The following table sets forth the total cash and cash equivalents,
marketable securities and investments and capitalization of the Company as of
June 30, 1998, and June 30, 1998, as adjusted to give effect to (i) the Initial
Offering (after deducting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by
the Company, estimated to total $2.5 million) and the application of the
estimated net cash proceeds therefrom, including the repayment of $9.0 million
of borrowings under the Former Bank Credit Facility, (ii) this Exchange Offer,
and (iii) the payment of a $5.0 million dividend to the Company's stockholders
and the reinvestment of $1.9 million by one of the Company's stockholders
(representing such stockholder's approximate net after-tax proceeds of the
dividend) in the form of a long-term loan to the Company. This table should be
read in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations" and the historical financial statements,
including the notes thereto, of the Company appearing elsewhere in this
Prospectus. See "Use of Proceeds", "Description of Capital Stock" and
"Description of Certain Indebtedness -- Stockholder Loan".
JUNE 30, 1998
----------------------
ACTUAL AS ADJUSTED
------ -----------
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT
SHARE DATA)
Cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities and
investments............................................... $ 8,260 $33,660
======= =======
Debt:
Current Portion of Long-Term Debt and Capital Lease
Obligations and Existing Bank Credit Facility(1).......... $10,132 $ 1,132
======= =======
Long-Term Debt and Capital Lease Obligations, Net of Current
Portion................................................... $ 3,167 $ 5,067
Redeemable Preferred Stock
13.5% Series A1 Cumulative Redeemable Preferred Stock due
2009, $0.01 par value, 50,000 shares authorized, 40,000
shares issued and outstanding, as adjusted(2).......... -- 33,141
Stockholders' Equity:
Common Stock, $.01 par value, 20,000,000 shares
authorized; 10,000,000 shares outstanding.............. 100 100
Warrants(3)............................................... -- 4,359
Additional Paid-In Capital................................ 183 183
Accumulated Deficit....................................... (50) (5,050)
------- -------
Total Stockholders' Equity (Deficit)................... 233 (408)
------- -------
Total Capitalization.............................. $ 3,400 $37,800
======= =======
- ---------------
(1) If the New Revolving Credit Facility had been in place on June 30, 1998,
approximately $45 million of the $60 million in total borrowings
contemplated by such facility would have been available.
(2) Series A Preferred Stock with an initial liquidation preference of $40
million was issued by the Company as part of the Units sold in the Initial
Offering. Each Unit consisted of one share of Series A Preferred Stock, 7.75
Initial Warrants and 15 Contingent Warrants, each Warrant to purchase one
share of Common Stock. An assumed initial value of $4.65 million was
allocated to additional paid-in capital, representing the portion of the
purchase price of the Units allocated to the Initial Warrants, less $0.3
million of the costs associated with the Initial Offering, allocable to the
Initial Warrants. No assurance can be given that the value allocated to the
Initial Warrants will be indicative of the price at which the Initial
Warrants may actually trade. Costs of $2.2 million associated with the
Initial Offering have been allocated to the Series A Preferred Stock.
(3) Represents the portion of the purchase price of the Units allocated to the
Initial Warrants (as described in note 2 above), less $0.3 million of the
cost associated with the Initial Offering allocable to the Initial Warrants.
29
35
THE EXCHANGE OFFER
PURPOSE OF THE EXCHANGE OFFER
The Original Preferred Shares were issued and sold on September 3, 1998 in
a transaction exempt from registration under the Securities Act. Accordingly,
the Original Preferred Shares may not be reoffered, resold or otherwise pledged,
hypothecated or transferred in the United States unless so registered or unless
an applicable exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act
is available. The Company has agreed pursuant to the Registration Agreement to
(i) file, within 90 days after the closing of the Initial Offering (the
"Original Preferred Shares Closing Date"), a registration statement with the
Commission with respect to the Exchange Offer, (ii) use its best efforts to
cause such registration statement to be declared effective under the Securities
Act not later than 150 days after the Original Preferred Shares Closing Date and
(iii) upon effectiveness of such registration statement, offer New Preferred
Shares in exchange for surrender of Original Preferred Shares. The New Preferred
Shares are being offered hereunder to satisfy these obligations of the Company
under the Registration Agreement.
TERMS OF THE EXCHANGE
The Company is offering, upon the terms and subject to the conditions of
the Exchange Offer, to exchange one New Preferred Share for each outstanding
Original Preferred Share. The terms of the New Preferred Shares are
substantially identical in all respects to the terms of the Original Preferred
Shares for which they may be exchanged pursuant to the Exchange Offer, except
that (i) the offer of the New Preferred Shares will have been registered under
the Securities Act and, therefore, the New Preferred Shares will be freely
transferable by holders thereof (except as otherwise described herein) and not
bear a legend regarding restrictions on transfer, (ii) holders of the New
Preferred Shares will not be entitled to certain rights of the holders of the
Original Preferred Shares under the Registration Agreement, which rights with
respect to the Original Preferred Shares will terminate on consummation of the
Exchange Offer, and (iii) the New Preferred Shares will not contain any
provisions regarding the payment of Special Dividends. See "Description of the
Series A Preferred Stock".
The Exchange Offer is not conditioned upon any minimum number of Original
Preferred Shares being tendered for exchange.
Based on interpretations by the Staff set forth in no-action letters issued
to third parties, the Company believes that New Preferred Shares issued pursuant
to the Exchange Offer in exchange for the Original Preferred Shares may be
offered for resale, resold and otherwise transferred by holders thereof (other
than any holder which is (i) an "affiliate" of the Company within the meaning of
Rule 405 under the Securities Act, (ii) a broker-dealer who acquired Original
Preferred Shares directly from the Issuer or (iii) broker-dealers who acquired
Original Preferred Shares as a result of market making or other trading
activities) without compliance with the registration and prospectus delivery
provisions of the Securities Act; provided that such New Preferred Shares are
acquired in the ordinary course of such holders' business, and such holders are
not engaged in, and do not intend to engage in, and have no arrangement or
understanding with any person to participate in, a distribution of such New
Preferred Shares. Each broker-dealer that receives New Preferred Shares for its
own account pursuant to the Exchange Offer must acknowledge that it will deliver
a prospectus in connection with any resale of such New Preferred Shares. The
Letter of Transmittal states that by so acknowledging and by delivering a
prospectus, a broker-dealer will not be deemed to admit that it is an
"underwriter" within the meaning of the Securities Act. This Prospectus, as it
may be amended or supplemented from time to time, may be used by a broker-dealer
in connection with resales of New Preferred Shares received in exchange for
Original Preferred Shares where such New Preferred Shares were acquired by such
broker-dealer as a result of market-making activities or other trading
activities. The Company has agreed that it will make this Prospectus
30
36
available to any broker-dealer for use in connection with any such resale for 90
days after the completion of this Exchange Offer. See "Plan of Distribution".
Tendering holders of Original Preferred Shares will not be required to pay
brokerage commissions or fees or, subject to the instructions in the Letter of
Transmittal, transfer taxes with respect to the exchange of the Original
Preferred Shares pursuant to the Exchange Offer.
Dividends on each New Preferred Share will accrue from the last date on
which dividends were paid on the Original Preferred Share surrendered in
exchange therefor or, if no dividend has been paid on such Original Preferred
Share, from the date of original issuance of such Original Preferred Share.
EXPIRATION DATE; EXTENSIONS; TERMINATION; AMENDMENTS
The Exchange Offer expires on the Expiration Date. The term "Expiration
Date" means 5:00 p.m., New York City time, on , 1998, unless
the Company in its sole discretion extends the period during which the Exchange
Offer is open, in which event the term "Expiration Date" means the latest time
and date on which the Exchange Offer, as so extended by the Company, expires.
The Company reserves the right to extend the Exchange Offer at any time and from
time to time prior to the Expiration Date by giving written notice to the
Exchange Agent and by timely public announcement communicated, unless otherwise
required by applicable law or regulation, by making a release to the Dow Jones
News Service. During any extension of the Exchange Offer, all Original Preferred
Shares previously tendered pursuant to the Exchange Offer will remain subject to
the Exchange Offer.
The initial Exchange Date will be the first business day following the
Expiration Date. The Company expressly reserves the right to (i) terminate the
Exchange Offer and not accept for exchange any Original Preferred Shares for any
reason, including if any of the events set forth below under " --Conditions to
the Exchange Offer" shall have occurred and shall not have been waived by the
Company and (ii) amend the terms of the Exchange Offer in any manner, whether
before or after any tender of the Original Preferred Shares. If any such
termination or amendment occurs, the Company will notify the Exchange Agent in
writing and will either issue a press release or give written notice to the
holders of the Original Preferred Shares as promptly as practicable. Unless the
Company terminates the Exchange Offer prior to 5:00 p.m., New York City time, on
the Expiration Date, the Company will exchange the New Preferred Shares for the
Original Preferred Shares on the Exchange Date.
If the Company waives any material condition to the Exchange Offer, or
amends the Exchange Offer in any other material respect, and if at the time that
notice of such waiver or amendment is first published, sent or given to holders
of Original Preferred Shares in the manner specified above, the Exchange Offer
is scheduled to expire at any time earlier than the expiration of a period
ending on the fifth business day from, and including, the date that such notice
is first so published, sent or given, then the Exchange Offer will be extended
until the expiration of such period of five business days.
This Prospectus and the Letter of Transmittal and other relevant materials
will be mailed by the Company to record holders of Original Preferred Shares and
will be furnished to brokers, banks and similar persons whose names, or the
names of whose nominees, appear on the lists of holders for subsequent
transmittal to beneficial owners of Original Preferred Shares.
HOW TO TENDER
The tender to the Company of Original Preferred Shares by a holder thereof
pursuant to one of the procedures set forth below will constitute an agreement
between such holder and the Company in accordance with the terms and subject to
the conditions set forth herein and in the Letter of Transmittal.
31
37
General Procedures. A holder of one or more Original Preferred Shares may
tender the same by (i) properly completing and signing the Letter of Transmittal
or a facsimile thereof (all references in this Prospectus to the Letter of
Transmittal shall be deemed to include a facsimile thereof) and delivering the
same, together with the certificate or certificates representing the Original
Preferred Share(s) being tendered and any required signature guarantees (or a
timely confirmation of a book-entry transfer (a "Book-Entry Confirmation")
pursuant to the procedure described below), to the Exchange Agent at its address
set forth below under "--Exchange Agent" on or prior to the Expiration Date or
(ii) complying with the guaranteed delivery procedures described below.
If tendered Original Preferred Shares are registered in the name of the
signer of the Letter of Transmittal and the New Preferred Shares to be issued in
exchange therefor are to be issued (and any untendered Original Preferred Shares
are to be reissued) in the name of the registered holder, the signature of such
signer need not be guaranteed. In any other case, the tendered Original
Preferred Shares must be endorsed or accompanied by written instruments of
transfer in form satisfactory to the Company and duly executed by the registered
holder and the signature on the endorsement or instrument of transfer must be
guaranteed by a firm (an "Eligible Institution") that is a member of a
recognized signature guarantee medallion program (an "Eligible Program") within
the meaning of Rule 17Ad-15 under the Exchange Act. If the New Preferred Shares
and/or Original Preferred Shares not exchanged are to be delivered to an address
other than that of the registered holder appearing on the stock register for the
Original Preferred Shares, the signature on the Letter of Transmittal must be
guaranteed by an Eligible Institution.
Any beneficial owner whose Original Preferred Shares are registered in the
name of a broker, dealer, commercial bank, trust company or other nominee and
who wishes to tender Original Preferred Shares should contact such holder
promptly and instruct such holder to tender Original Preferred Shares on such
beneficial owner's behalf. If such beneficial owner wishes to tender such
Original Preferred Shares himself or herself, such beneficial owner must, prior
to completing and executing the Letter of Transmittal and delivering such
Original Preferred Shares, either make appropriate arrangements to register
ownership of the Original Preferred Shares in such beneficial owner's name or
follow the procedures described in the immediately preceding paragraph. The
transfer of record ownership may take considerable time.
Book-Entry Transfer. The Exchange Agent has established an account with
respect to the Original Preferred Shares at The Depository Trust Company (the
"Book-Entry Transfer Facility") for purposes of the Exchange Offer, and any
financial institution that is a participant in the Book-Entry Transfer
Facility's systems may make book-entry delivery of Original Preferred Shares by
causing the Book-Entry Transfer Facility to transfer such Original Preferred
Shares into the Exchange Agent's account at the Book-Entry Transfer Facility in
accordance with the Book-Entry Transfer Facility's procedures for transfer.
However, although delivery of Original Preferred Shares may be effected through
book-entry transfer at the Book-Entry Transfer Facility, the Letter of
Transmittal, with any required signature guarantees and any other required
documents, must, in any case, be transmitted to and received by the Exchange
Agent at the address set forth below under "--Exchange Agent" on or prior to the
Expiration Date or the guaranteed delivery procedures described below must be
complied with.
THE METHOD OF DELIVERY OF CERTIFICATES REPRESENTING ORIGINAL PREFERRED
SHARES AND ALL OTHER DOCUMENTS IS AT THE ELECTION AND RISK OF THE HOLDER. IF
SENT BY MAIL, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT REGISTERED MAIL, RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED,
BE USED, PROPER INSURANCE BE OBTAINED, AND THE MAILING BE MADE SUFFICIENTLY IN
ADVANCE OF THE EXPIRATION DATE TO PERMIT DELIVERY TO THE EXCHANGE AGENT ON OR
BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE.
Unless an exemption applies under the applicable law and regulations
concerning "backup withholding" of federal income tax, the Exchange Agent will
be required to withhold, and will withhold, 31% of the gross proceeds otherwise
payable to a holder pursuant to the Exchange Offer if
32
38
the holder does not provide the holder's taxpayer identification number (social
security number or employer identification number) and certify that such number
is correct and, if required, that such holder is not subject to backup
withholding as a result of failing to report interest or dividend income. Each
tendering holder should complete and sign the main signature form and the
Substitute Form W-9 included as part of the Letter of Transmittal, so as to
provide the information and certification necessary to avoid backup withholding,
unless an applicable exemption exists and is proved in a manner satisfactory to
the Company and the Exchange Agent.
Guaranteed Delivery Procedures. If a holder desires to accept the Exchange
Offer and time will not permit a Letter of Transmittal or certificates
representing Original Preferred Shares to reach the Exchange Agent before the
Expiration Date, a tender may be effected if the Exchange Agent has received at
its office listed under "--Exchange Agent" on or prior to the Expiration Date a
letter, telegram or facsimile transmission from an Eligible Institution setting
forth the name and address of the tendering holder, the names in which the
Original Preferred Shares are registered and, if possible, the certificate
numbers of the Original Preferred Shares to be tendered, and stating that the
tender is being made thereby and guaranteeing that within three New York Stock
Exchange trading days after the date of execution of such letter, telegram or
facsimile transmission by the Eligible Institution, the Original Preferred
Shares, in proper form for transfer, will be delivered by such Eligible
Institution together with a properly completed and duly executed Letter of
Transmittal (and any other required documents). Unless Original Preferred Shares
being tendered by the above-described method (or a timely Book-Entry
Confirmation) are deposited with the Exchange Agent within the time period set
forth above (accompanied or preceded by a properly completed Letter of
Transmittal and any other required documents), the Company may, at its option,
reject the tender. Copies of a Notice of Guaranteed Delivery which may be used
by Eligible Institutions for the purposes described in this paragraph are being
delivered with this Prospectus and the Letter of Transmittal.
A tender will be deemed to have been received as of the date when the
tendering holder's properly completed and duly signed Letter of Transmittal,
accompanied by the certificate representing the Original Preferred Shares (or a
timely Book-Entry Confirmation) is received by the Exchange Agent. Issuances of
New Preferred Shares in exchange for Original Preferred Shares tendered pursuant
to a Notice of Guaranteed Delivery or letter, telegram or facsimile transmission
to similar effect (as provided above) by an Eligible Institution will be made
only against deposit of the Letter of Transmittal (and any other required
documents) and the tendered Original Preferred Shares (or a timely Book-Entry
Confirmation).
All questions as to the validity, form, eligibility (including time of
receipt) and acceptance for exchange of any tender of Original Preferred Shares
will be determined by the Company, whose determination will be final and
binding. The Company reserves the absolute right to reject any or all tenders
not in proper form or the acceptances for exchange of which may, in the opinion
of counsel to the Company, be unlawful. The Company also reserves the absolute
right to waive any of the conditions of the Exchange Offer or any defects or
irregularities in tenders of any particular holder whether or not similar
defects or irregularities are waived in the case of other holders. None of the
Company, the Exchange Agent or any other person will be under any duty to give
notification of any defects or irregularities in tenders or shall incur any
liability for failure to give any such notification. The Company's
interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Exchange Offer (including the
Letter of Transmittal and the instructions thereto) will be final and binding.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
The Letter of Transmittal contains, among other things, the following terms
and conditions, which are part of the Exchange Offer:
The party tendering Original Preferred Shares for exchange (the
"Transferor") exchanges, assigns and transfers the Original Preferred Shares to
the Company and irrevocably constitutes and
33
39
appoints the Exchange Agent as the Transferor's agent and attorney-in-fact to
cause the Original Preferred Shares to be assigned, transferred and exchanged.
The Transferor represents and warrants that it has full power and authority to
tender, exchange, assign and transfer the Original Preferred Shares and to
acquire New Preferred Shares issuable upon the exchange of such tendered
Original Preferred Shares, and that, when the same are accepted for exchange,
the Company will acquire good and unencumbered title to the tendered Original
Preferred Shares, free and clear of all liens, restrictions, charges and
encumbrances and not subject to any adverse claim. The Transferor also warrants
that it will, upon request, execute and deliver any additional documents deemed
by the Company to be necessary or desirable to complete the exchange, assignment
and transfer of tendered Original Preferred Shares. The Transferor further
agrees that acceptance of any tendered Original Preferred Shares by the Company
and the issuance of New Preferred Shares in exchange therefor shall constitute
performance in full by the Company of its obligations under the Registration
Agreement and that the Company shall have no further obligations or liabilities
thereunder (except in certain limited circumstances). All authority conferred by
the Transferor will survive the death or incapacity of the Transferor and every
obligation of the Transferor shall be binding upon the heirs, legal
representatives, successors, assigns, executors and administrators of such
Transferor.
By tendering Original Preferred Shares, the Transferor certifies (a) that
it is not an "affiliate" of the Company within the meaning of Rule 405 under the
Securities Act, that it is not a broker-dealer that owns Original Preferred
Shares acquired directly from the Company or an affiliate of the Company, that
it is acquiring the New Preferred Shares offered hereby in the ordinary course
of such Transferor's business and that such Transferor has no arrangement with
any person to participate in the distribution of such New Preferred Shares; or
(b) that it is an "affiliate" (as so defined) of the Company or of the
Purchasers, and that it will comply with the registration and prospectus
delivery requirements of the Securities Act to the extent applicable to it. Each
broker-dealer that receives New Preferred Shares for its own account pursuant to
the Exchange Offer must acknowledge that it will deliver a prospectus in
connection with any resale of such New Preferred Shares. The Letter of
Transmittal states that by so acknowledging and by delivering a prospectus, a
broker-dealer will not be deemed to admit that it is an "underwriter" within the
meaning of the Securities Act.
WITHDRAWAL RIGHTS
Original Preferred Shares tendered pursuant to the Exchange Offer may be
withdrawn at any time prior to the Expiration Date.
For a withdrawal to be effective, a written or facsimile transmission
notice of withdrawal must be timely received by the Exchange Agent at its
address set forth below under "--Exchange Agent". Any such notice of withdrawal
must specify the person named in the Letter of Transmittal as having tendered
Original Preferred Shares to be withdrawn, the certificate numbers of Original
Preferred Shares to be withdrawn, the number of Original Preferred Shares to be
withdrawn, a statement that such holder is withdrawing his or her election to
have such Original Preferred Shares exchanged, and the name of the registered
holder of such Original Preferred Shares; and must be signed by the holder in
the same manner as the original signature on the Letter of Transmittal
(including any required signature guarantees) or be accompanied by evidence
satisfactory to the Company that the person withdrawing the tender has succeeded
to the beneficial ownership of the Original Preferred Shares being withdrawn.
The Exchange Agent will return the properly withdrawn Original Preferred Shares
promptly following receipt of notice of withdrawal. All questions as to the
validity of notices of withdrawals, including time of receipt, will be
determined by the Company, and such determination will be final and binding on
all parties.
34
40
ACCEPTANCE OF ORIGINAL PREFERRED SHARES FOR EXCHANGE; DELIVERY OF NEW PREFERRED
SHARES
Upon the terms and subject to the conditions of the Exchange Offer, the
acceptance for exchange of Original Preferred Shares validly tendered and not
withdrawn and the issuance of the New Preferred Shares will be made on the
Exchange Date. For the purposes of the Exchange Offer, the Company shall be
deemed to have accepted for exchange validly tendered Original Preferred Shares
when, as and if the Company has given written notice thereof to the Exchange
Agent.
The Exchange Agent will act as agent for the tendering holders of Original
Preferred Shares for the purposes of receiving New Preferred Shares from the
Company and causing the Original Preferred Shares to be assigned, transferred
and exchanged. Upon the terms and subject to the conditions of the Exchange
Offer, delivery of New Preferred Shares to be issued in exchange for accepted
Original Preferred Shares will be made by the Exchange Agent promptly after
acceptance of the tendered Original Preferred Shares. Original Preferred Shares
not accepted for exchange by the Company will be returned without expense to the
tendering holders (or in the case of Original Preferred Shares tendered by
book-entry transfer into the Exchange Agent's account at the Book-Entry Transfer
Facility pursuant to the procedures described above, such non-exchanged Original
Preferred Shares will be credited to an account maintained with such Book-Entry
Transfer Facility) promptly following the Expiration Date or, if the Company
terminates the Exchange Offer prior to the Expiration Date, promptly after the
Exchange Offer is so terminated.
CONDITIONS TO THE EXCHANGE OFFER
Notwithstanding any other provision of the Exchange Offer, or any extension
of the Exchange Offer, the Company will not be required to issue New Preferred
Shares in respect of any properly tendered Original Preferred Shares not
previously accepted and may terminate the Exchange Offer (by oral or written
notice to the Exchange Agent and by timely public announcement communicated,
unless otherwise required by applicable law or regulation, by making a release
to the Dow Jones News Service) or, at its option, modify or otherwise amend the
Exchange Offer, if (a) there shall be threatened, instituted or pending any
action or proceeding before, or any injunction, order or decree shall have been
issued by, any court or governmental agency or other governmental regulatory or
administrative agency or commission, (i) seeking to restrain or prohibit the
making or consummation of the Exchange Offer or any other transaction
contemplated by the Exchange Offer, (ii) assessing or seeking any damages as a
result thereof, or (iii) resulting in a material delay in the ability of the
Company to accept for exchange or to exchange some or all of the Original
Preferred Shares pursuant to the Exchange Offer; (b) any statute, rule,
regulation, order or injunction shall be sought, proposed, introduced, enacted,
promulgated or deemed applicable to the Exchange Offer or any of the
transactions contemplated by the Exchange Offer by any government or
governmental authority, domestic or foreign, or any action shall have been
taken, proposed or threatened, by any government, governmental authority, agency
or court, domestic or foreign, that in the sole judgment of the Company might
directly or indirectly result in any of the consequences referred to in clauses
(a)(i) or (ii) above or, in the sole judgment of the Company, might result in
the holders of New Preferred Shares having obligations with respect to resales
and transfers of New Preferred Shares which are greater than those described in
the interpretations of the Commission referred to on the cover page of this
Prospectus, or would otherwise make it inadvisable to proceed with the Exchange
Offer; or (c) a material adverse change shall have occurred in the business,
condition (financial or otherwise), operations, or prospects of the Company.
The foregoing conditions are for the sole benefit of the Company and may be
asserted by it with respect to all or any portion of the Exchange Offer
regardless of the circumstances (including any action or inaction by the
Company) giving rise to such condition or may be waived by the Company in whole
or in part at any time or from time to time in its sole discretion. The failure
by the Company at any time to exercise any of the foregoing rights will not be
deemed a waiver of any such right, and each right will be deemed an ongoing
right which may be asserted at any time or from time to time.
35
41
In addition, the Company has reserved the right, notwithstanding the
satisfaction of each of the foregoing conditions, to terminate or amend the
Exchange Offer.
Any determination by the Company concerning the fulfillment or
non-fulfillment of any conditions will be final and binding upon all parties.
In addition, the Company will not accept for exchange any Original
Preferred Shares tendered and no New Preferred Shares will be issued in exchange
for any such Original Preferred Shares, if at such time any stop order shall be
threatened or in effect with respect to the Registration Statement of which this
Prospectus constitutes a part.
EXCHANGE AGENT
American Stock Transfer & Trust Company has been appointed as the Exchange
Agent for the Exchange Offer. Letters of Transmittal must be addressed to the
Exchange Agent at its address set forth below.
Address:
40 Wall Street
46th Floor
New York, NY 10005
Attention: Exchange Department
By Facsimile:
718-234-5001
Confirm by Telephone:
800-937-5449
718-921-8200
Delivery to an address other than as set forth herein, or transmissions of
instructions via a facsimile or telex number other than the ones set forth
herein, will not constitute a valid delivery.
SOLICITATION OF TENDERS; EXPENSES
The Company has not retained any dealer-manager or similar agent in
connection with the Exchange Offer and will not make any payments to brokers,
dealers or others for soliciting acceptances of the Exchange Offer. The Company
will, however, pay the Exchange Agent reasonable and customary fees for its
services and will reimburse it for reasonable out-of-pocket expenses in
connection therewith. The Company will also pay brokerage houses and other
custodians, nominees and fiduciaries the reasonable out-of-pocket expenses
incurred by them in forwarding tenders for their customers. The expenses to be
incurred in connection with the Exchange Offer, including the fees and expenses
of the Exchange Agent and printing, accounting and legal fees, will be paid by
the Company and are estimated at approximately $300,000.
No person has been authorized to give any information or to make any
representations in connection with the Exchange Offer other than those contained
in this Prospectus. If given or made, such information or representations should
not be relied upon as having been authorized by the Company. Neither the
delivery of this Prospectus nor any exchange made hereunder shall, under any
circumstances, create any implication that there has been no change in the
affairs of the Company since the respective dates as of which information is
given herein. The Exchange Offer is not being made to (nor will tenders be
accepted from or on behalf of) holders of Original Preferred Shares in any
jurisdiction in which the making of the Exchange Offer or the acceptance thereof
would not be in compliance with the laws of such jurisdiction. However, the
Company may, at its discretion, take such action as it may deem necessary to
make the Exchange Offer in any such jurisdiction and extend the Exchange Offer
to holders of Original Preferred Shares in such jurisdiction. In any
jurisdiction the securities laws or blue sky laws of which require the Exchange
36
42
Offer to be made by a licensed broker or dealer, the Exchange Offer is being
made on behalf of the Company by one or more registered brokers or dealers which
are licensed under the laws of such jurisdiction.
APPRAISAL RIGHTS
HOLDERS OF ORIGINAL PREFERRED SHARES WILL NOT HAVE DISSENTERS' RIGHTS OR
APPRAISAL RIGHTS IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXCHANGE OFFER.
FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES
U.S. holders (as defined) should not recognize any taxable gain or loss for
federal income tax purposes as a result of the exchange of Original Preferred
Shares for New Preferred Shares.
OTHER
Participation in the Exchange Offer is voluntary and holders should
carefully consider whether to accept. Holders of the Original Preferred Shares
are urged to consult their financial and tax advisors in making their own
decisions on what action to take.
As a result of the making of, and upon acceptance for exchange of all
validly tendered Original Preferred Shares pursuant to the terms of this
Exchange Offer, the Company will have fulfilled a covenant contained in the
Certificate of Designation and the Registration Agreement. Holders of the
Original Preferred Shares who do not tender their certificates in the Exchange
Offer will continue to hold such certificates and will be entitled to all the
rights, and limitations applicable thereto, under the Certificate of
Designation, except for any such rights under the Registration Agreement which
by their terms terminate or cease to have further effect as a result of the
making of this Exchange Offer. See "Description of the Series A Preferred
Stock". All untendered Original Preferred Shares will continue to be subject to
the restrictions on transfer set forth in the Certificate of Designation. To the
extent that Original Preferred Shares are tendered and accepted in the Exchange
Offer, the trading market, if any, for the Original Preferred Shares could be
adversely affected. See "Risk Factors--Consequences of Failure to Exchange".
The Company may in the future seek to acquire untendered Original Preferred
Shares in open-market or privately negotiated transactions, through subsequent
exchange offers or otherwise. The Company has no present plan to acquire any
Original Preferred Shares which are not tendered in the Exchange Offer.
37
43
SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
The following table presents selected financial data for the years ended
December 31, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 and 1997 and the six month periods ended
June 30, 1997 and 1998. The financial and balance sheet data for the years
ending December 31, 1995, 1996 and 1997 have been derived from financial
statements (including those set forth elsewhere in this Prospectus) that have
been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, independent accountants. The
financial statements as of December 31, 1996 and 1997 and for each of the years
in the three year period ended December 31, 1997 and the report of
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP relating thereto are included elsewhere in this
Prospectus, and the selected financial data represented below are qualified in
their entirety by reference thereto. The financial data presented for the years
ended December 31, 1993 and 1994 and the six month periods ended June 30, 1997
and June 30, 1998 are derived from the unaudited financial statements of the
Company and in the opinion of management include all adjustments (consisting
only of normal recurring adjustments) necessary for a fair presentation of the
Company's results of operations and financial condition for those periods. The
data for the six month period ended June 30, 1998 are not necessarily indicative
of results for the year ending December 31, 1998 or indicative of future
periods. The selected financial data should be read in conjunction with
"Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations" and the financial statements, including the notes thereto, of the
Company appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus.
SIX MONTHS
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, ENDED JUNE 30,
----------------------------------------------- -----------------
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1997 1998
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenue......................................... $14,427 $30,754 $49,024 $75,135 $98,209 $49,381 $52,305
Direct cost of revenue.......................... 7,120 16,061 35,065 57,208 78,106 38,440 38,828
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Gross profit.................................... 7,307 14,693 13,959 17,927 20,103 10,941 13,477
Selling, general and administrative............. 7,233 11,631 17,698 19,224 25,704 10,567 11,935
Depreciation and amortization................... 67 180 276 539 994 324 951
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Operating income (loss)......................... 7 2,882 (4,014) (1,836) (6,595) 50 591
Interest income................................. 13 37 202 95 86 60 12
Interest expense................................ (5) (2) (40) (312) (557) (177) (578)
Other income (expense), net..................... 27 (65) 7,547 3,468 3,875 12 (97)
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
Net income (loss)............................... $ 42 $ 2,852 $ 3,695 $ 1,415 $(3,191) $ (55) $ (72)
======= ======= ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
Net income (loss) per share -- basic and
diluted....................................... $ -- $ .29 $ .37 $ .14 $ (.32) $ (.01) $ (.01)
======= ======= ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
Weighted average shares outstanding............. 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
======= ======= ======= ======= ======= ======= =======
OTHER FINANCIAL DATA:
Capital expenditures............................ $ 815 $ 813 $ 860 $ 2,135 $ 3,363 $ 1,605 $ 2,364
EBITDA(1)....................................... 74 3,084 (3,738) (1,303) (5,601) 374 1,542
Net cash provided by (used for) operating
activities.................................... 1,689 1,904 2,463 1,051 (3,386) (1,120) 11,327
Net cash provided by (used for) investing
activities.................................... (1,949) 368 (184) (2,014) (3,357) (1,606) (2,348)
Net cash provided by (used for) financing
activities.................................... 19 (1,255) (1,903) 1,596 6,004 2,602 (2,287)
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges(2)........... 9.4x 1,511.0x 101.2x 5.7x -- 0.8x 1.1x
38
44
JUNE 30, 1998
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, ---------------------
----------------------------------------------- AS
1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 ACTUAL ADJUSTED(3)
------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -----------
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Cash....................................... $ 215 $ 1,232 $ 1,608 $ 2,241 $ 1,502 $ 8,194 $ 33,594
Current assets............................. 2,545 9,264 16,441 19,771 28,521 25,090 52,990
Property and equipment, net................ 819 1,435 1,507 3,075 6,957 8,361 8,361
Working capital............................ 1,592 4,388 2,369 1,621 (3,128) (5,188) 13,712
Total assets............................... 4,647 11,264 18,005 22,915 35,581 33,678 61,578
Other long-term obligations................ 14 24 11 664 3,623 3,167 5,067
Redeemable Series A Preferred Stock(4)..... -- -- -- -- -- -- 33,141
Total stockholders' equity (deficit)....... 539 2,117 3,922 4,101 309 233 (408)
- ---------------
(1) EBITDA consists of net income (loss) before interest and other income,
income taxes, depreciation and amortization. It is a financial performance
measure commonly used in the telecommunications industry and is presented to
assist in an understanding of the Company's operating results. However, it
is not intended to represent cash flows or results of operations in
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles ("GAAP").
(2) For purposes of calculating the ratio of earnings to fixed charges,
"earnings" represent net income before income taxes plus fixed charges, and
"fixed charges" consist of interest expense. For the year ended 1997,
earnings were insufficient to cover fixed charges by $3.1 million.
(3) Gives effect to (i) the Initial Offering (after deducting discounts and
offering expenses payable by the Company, estimated to total $2.5 million)
and the receipt of the estimated net cash proceeds therefrom, including the
repayment of $9.0 million of borrowings under the Former Bank Credit
Facility and (ii) the payment of a $5.0 million dividend to the Company's
stockholders and the reinvestment of $1.9 million by one of the Company's
stockholders (representing such stockholder's approximate net after-tax
proceeds of the dividend) in the form of a long-term loan to the Company.
See "Use of Proceeds" and "Description of Certain
Indebtedness -- Stockholder Loan".
(4) Series A Preferred Stock with an initial liquidation preference of $40
million was issued by the Company as part of the Units offered in the
Initial Offering. Each Unit consisted of one share of Series A Preferred
Stock, 7.75 Initial Warrants and 15 Contingent Warrants, each Warrant to
purchase one share of Common Stock. An assumed initial value of $4.65
million was allocated to additional paid-in capital, representing the
portion of the purchase price of the Units allocated to the Initial
Warrants, less $0.3 million of the costs associated with the Initial
Offering, allocable to the Initial Warrants. No assurance can be given that
the value allocated to the Initial Warrants will be indicative of the price
at which the Initial Warrants may actually trade. Costs of $2.2 million
associated with the Initial Offering have been allocated to the Series A
Preferred Stock.
39
45
MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
The following discussion and analysis should be read in conjunction with
the financial statements and related notes and other detailed information
regarding the Company included elsewhere in this Prospectus. The discussion and
analysis contains statements of a forward-looking nature relating to future
events or the future financial performance of the Company. Actual events or
results may differ materially from such statements. In evaluating such
statements, prospective investors should specifically consider the various
factors identified in this Prospectus, including the matters set forth under the
caption "Risk Factors", which could cause actual results to differ materially
from those indicated in the forward-looking statements contained herein.
OVERVIEW
The Company was founded in 1990 as an aggregator of AT&T long distance
services, reselling AT&T branded products primarily to small and medium-sized
businesses. As an aggregator of AT&T services, customers were billed and
serviced by AT&T. The Company derived its profits through 1993 by obtaining
volume discounts on bulk purchases of long distance services from AT&T and
passing along a portion of these discounts to its customers.
In 1993, the Company entered into an agreement with Sprint and in 1994
began to resell Sprint telecommunications services. As a reseller of Sprint, the
Company began provisioning, servicing and billing customers under the Network
Plus name. Volume discounts offered by Sprint enabled the Company to offer
low-cost, high quality, long distance services at favorable rates to its
customers. In addition, by servicing its own customers, the Company was better
able to meet customer needs and control costs.
In mid-1996, in addition to provisioning customer traffic onto Sprint's
network ("off-net" traffic) as a switchless reseller of Sprint long distance
services, the Company initiated the deployment of its own long distance network
and began operating as a switch-based provider in certain states, switching
customer traffic on its own facilities ("on-net" traffic). The Company's
decision to deploy switches was based on economic efficiencies resulting from
customer concentrations and traffic patterns. Installation of telephony switches
was completed in Quincy, Massachusetts in June 1996, servicing the Northeastern
region of the United States, and Orlando, Florida in November 1997, servicing
the Southeastern region of the United States. As a switch-based provider, the
Company is able to lower its direct transmission costs. Expansion of the
Company's existing network is planned in those areas of the United States in
which the Company already has significant volumes of originating or terminating
traffic. Additional interexchange, international and local switches are planned
for installation throughout the second half of 1998 and continuing through 1999.
The Company has also sold international wholesale services since 1997. The
Company recently entered into two 20-year indefeasible right-of-use ("IRU")
agreements pursuant to which it acquired 625 route miles of dark fiber (1,830
digital fiber miles). When the fiber is fully deployed and activated, it will
form a redundant fiber ring connecting major markets throughout New England and
the New York metropolitan area, providing the Company with significant
transmission capacity. See "Business -- Network -- Current Network -- Fiber and
Transport".
The Company intends to continue to add services to maintain and enhance its
position as an integrated communications provider ("ICP"). The Company's
strategic initiatives in 1998 include expanding its service offerings to include
local exchange and Internet services. By providing local exchange and Internet
services, the Company will offer a single source solution for all of the
telecommunication needs of its customers. By expanding its service offerings,
the Company believes it can improve customer retention and market share, while
simultaneously reducing overall transmission costs.
The Company sells its services through a direct retail sales force, an
international wholesale sales force and a reseller and independent agent sales
force. In 1998 and 1999, as the Company
40
46
expands its network facilities, the Company intends to increase its sales force
to approximately 400 members. The investment in the sales force, expansion of
the existing network and addition of local exchange, Internet and other services
will require significant expenditures, a substantial portion of which will be
incurred before related revenue is realized. As these expansion plans are
undertaken and the revenue base grows, periods of operating losses and negative
cash flows from operations are anticipated through at least the first three
quarters of 1999. See "Risk Factors -- Negative Cash Flow and Operating Losses"
and "-- Substantial Future Capital Requirements; Need for Additional Financing;
Substantial Leverage".
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
The following table sets forth for the periods indicated certain financial
data as a percentage of revenues:
THREE MONTHS SIX MONTHS
ENDED ENDED YEAR ENDED
JUNE 30, JUNE 30, DECEMBER 31,
-------------- -------------- -----------------------
1998 1997 1998 1997 1997 1996 1995
----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
Revenues...................... 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
Direct cost of revenue........ 73.8 78.4 74.2 77.8 79.5 76.1 71.5
Gross margin.................. 26.2 21.6 25.8 22.2 20.5 23.9 28.5
Selling, general and
administrative.............. 23.6 22.1 22.8 21.4 26.2 25.7 36.1
Depreciation and
amortization................ 1.8 0.7 1.8 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.6
Operating income (loss)....... 0.9 (1.2) 1.1 0.1 (6.7) (2.5) (8.2)
Other income (expense)........ (1.0) (0.1) (1.0) (0.2) 3.5 4.4 16.4
Income (loss) before income
taxes....................... (0.1)% (1.3)% 0.1% (0.1)% (3.2)% 1.9% 8.2%
THREE MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1998 COMPARED TO THREE MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1997
Revenue. Revenue increased 10.1% to $27.1 million for the three months
ended June 30, 1998 from $24.6 million for the three months ended June 30, 1997.
Revenue for the three months ended June 30, 1997 included approximately $3.8
million from two customers with whom the Company did not do business in 1998.
One was a high volume, low margin customer until termination in December 1997,
and the other was a specialized international customer with whom the Company
terminated its service agreement in October 1997 due to collection problems.
Exclusive of the revenue from these two former customers, revenue increased by
30.3% from period to period. The Company's customers totaled approximately
34,000 at June 30, 1998 and 26,000 at June 30, 1997. The components of revenue
in each year reflect the Company's initiative to become a facilities-based
services provider. In the three months ended June 30, 1998, on-net revenue and
on-net billed customer minutes were 57.7% and 47.1%, respectively, of total
revenue and minutes. In the three months ended June 30, 1997, the corresponding
on-net revenue and minutes represented 17.4% and 17.5%, respectively, of total
revenue and minutes. It is expected that long distance minutes and revenue
attributable to on-net customer traffic will exceed 75% of the totals by the
first quarter of 1999. The Company also anticipates that revenue growth will
progressively increase in each remaining quarter of 1998 as a result of a
significant increase in the size of the Company's direct sales force.
Gross Profit. Gross profit for the three months ended June 30, 1998
totaled $7.1 million, an increase of 33.9% from the $5.3 million earned in the
corresponding period in 1997. Gross margin increased to 26.2% in 1998 from 21.6%
in 1997, reflecting the increase in on-net traffic, the reduced costs of
carrying off-net traffic and a reduction in costs of originating and terminating
traffic.
41
47
On-net revenue, as described above, increased significantly as a percentage
of total revenue. Gross margin earned on domestic on-net revenue greatly exceeds
that of off-net revenue. On-net gross margin, however, combines margins earned
on domestic traffic and lower-margin international wholesale traffic.
International wholesale traffic is expected to grow at rates in excess of
domestic traffic, which will lower the overall future gross margin on on-net
traffic. Costs of originating and terminating traffic have declined as a result
of provisions mandated by the Telecommunications Act of 1996.
Selling, General and Administrative. Selling, general and administrative
expenses increased by 17.5% to $6.4 million for the three months ended June 30,
1998 from $5.4 million for the three months ended June 30, 1997, and increased
as a percentage of revenue to 23.6% from 22.1% for the corresponding periods.
Within selling, general and administrative expenses, the largest component is
personnel and related expenses, which combines all wages and salaries, along
with commissions earned by the Company's sales force. These expenses increased
by 19.1% from 1997 to 1998, reflecting an increase in the number of employees.
Other expenses within selling, general and administrative expenses increased as
a result of the Company's ongoing growth.
In April 1998, the Company commenced its initiative to expand its 96-member
sales force and, as of June 30, 1998, the sales force had increased to 152
members. The Company expects to further expand its sales force to approximately
300 by year end 1998 and to approximately 400 by year end 1999. Variable
expenses, including commissions paid to independent marketing representatives
and the provision for doubtful accounts, are expected to increase with future
sales growth. In addition, the Company expects to expend a significant amount of
funds in 1998 towards the recruitment of personnel, marketing, advertising and
promotion, and professional services in conjunction with its growth plans and
initiatives to expand its service offerings. It is expected that there will be a
time lag between the incurring of these expenses and any resulting increase in
revenue. See "Risk Factors -- Management of Growth".
Depreciation and Amortization. Depreciation and amortization increased to
$483,000 for the three months ended June 30, 1998 from $168,000 for the three
months ended June 30, 1997, reflecting the Company's network build out and
capital additions to the Company's internal computer systems. Future
depreciation expense will increase as assets related to the Company's network
expansion plans are placed into service.
Interest. Interest expense, net of interest income, increased to $284,000
for the three months ended June 30, 1998 from $55,000 for the three months ended
June 30, 1997. This increase resulted from interest on capital leases entered
into in the latter half of 1997 to finance network additions and internal
computer systems, interest incurred related to notes payable entered into in
December 1997, and additional interest related to higher levels of revolving
credit borrowings in 1998.
Income Taxes. In the three months ended June 30, 1998, income taxes of
$125,000 were provided, principally for state franchise tax assessments. No
provision was required in the corresponding 1997 period.
Net Loss. As a result of the aforementioned increases in revenue,
operating expenses, depreciation and amortization, interest income and expense,
the Company incurred a net loss of $156,000 for the three months ended June 30,
1998, compared to net loss of $332,000 for the three months ended June 30, 1997.
EBITDA. Earnings before other income and expense, interest, taxes,
depreciation and amortization ("EBITDA") increased $849,000 to $720,000 for the
three months ended June 30, 1998 from negative EBITDA of $129,000 for the three
months ended June 30, 1997. This increase was due to the changes in revenues,
network development, operations and selling, general and administrative expenses
discussed above.
42
48
SIX MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1998 COMPARED TO SIX MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1997
Revenue. Revenue increased 5.9% to $52.3 million for the six months ended
June 30, 1997 from $49.4 million for the six months ended June 30, 1997. Revenue
for the six months ended June 30, 1997 included approximately $6.7 million from
two customers, described above, with whom the Company did not do business in
1998. Exclusive of the revenue from these two former customers, revenue
increased by 22.5% from period to period. The components of revenue in each year
reflect the Company's initiative to become a facilities-based services provider.
In the six months ended June 30, 1998, on-net revenue and on-net billed customer
minutes were 54.0% and 43.8%, respectively, of total revenue and minutes. In the
six months ended June 30, 1997, the corresponding on-net revenue and minutes
represented 13.5% and 14.7%, respectively, of total revenue and minutes.
Gross Profit. Gross profit for the six months ended June 30, 1998 totaled
$13.5 million, an increase of 23.2% from the $10.9 million earned in the
corresponding period in 1997. Gross margin improved to 25.8% in 1998 from 22.2%
in 1997, reflecting the increase in on-net traffic, the reduced costs of
carrying off-net traffic and a reduction in costs of originating and terminating
traffic. Costs of originating and terminating traffic have declined as a result
of provisions mandated by the Telecommunications Act of 1996.
Selling, General and Administrative. Selling, general and administrative
expenses increased by 12.9% to $11.9 million for the six months ended June 30,
1998 from $10.6 million for the six months ended June 30, 1997, and increased as
a percentage of revenue to 22.8% from 21.4% for the corresponding periods.
Within selling, general and administrative expenses, the largest component is
personnel and related expenses, which combines all wages and salaries, along
with commissions earned by the Company's sales force. These expenses increased
by 11.4% from 1997 to 1998, reflecting an increase in the number of employees.
In April 1998, the Company commenced its initiative to expand its 96 member
sales force, and as of June 30, 1998, the sales force had increased to 152
members. Other expenses within selling, general and administrative expenses
increased as a result of the Company's ongoing growth.
Depreciation and Amortization. Depreciation and amortization increased to
$951,000 for the six months ended June 30, 1998 from $324,000 for the six months
ended June 30, 1997, reflecting the Company's network build out and capital
additions to the Company's internal computer systems.
Interest. Interest expense, net of interest income, increased to $566,000
for the six months ended June 30, 1998 from $116,000 for the six months ended
June 30, 1997. This increase resulted from interest on capital leases entered
into in the latter half of 1997 to finance network additions and internal
computer systems, interest incurred related to notes payable entered into in
December 1997, and additional interest related to higher levels of revolving
credit borrowings in 1998.
Income Taxes. In the six months ended June 30, 1998, income taxes of
$134,000 were provided, principally for state franchise tax assessments. Income
taxes in the comparable period of 1997 totaled $25,000.
Net Loss. As a result of the aforementioned increases in revenue,
operating expenses, depreciation and amortization, interest income and expense,
the Company incurred a net loss of $72,000 for the six months ended June 30,
1998, compared to net loss of $55,000 for the six months ended June 30, 1997.
EBITDA. EBITDA increased $1,168,000 to $1,542,000 for the six months ended
June 30, 1998 from $374,000 for the six months ended June 30, 1997. This
increase was due to the changes in revenues, network development, operations and
selling, general and administrative expenses discussed above.
43
49
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1997 COMPARED TO YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996
Revenue. Revenue increased by 30.7% to $98.2 million in 1997 from $75.1
million in 1996, primarily related to an increase in the Company's customer
base. The Company's customers totaled approximately 30,000 at the end of 1997
and 19,000 at the end of 1996. Revenue in 1996 also included approximately $1.8
million related to the amortization of credits received through AT&T sales
promotions on three-year contracts that were fully amortized by year end 1996.
Gross Profit. Gross profit increased to $20.1 million in 1997 from $17.9
million in 1996, a 12.1% increase, but gross margin declined to 20.5% in 1997
from 23.9% in 1996. The decline in gross margin resulted from several factors.
Gross profit in 1996 included $1.8 million of nonrecurring revenue derived from
the amortization of the AT&T credits described above. In mid-1996, the Company
began to operate its own network, incurring start up costs related to investment
in these facilities. The first network switch, deployed in Quincy, Massachusetts
in June 1996, did not begin to carry any significant traffic until late 1996. A
second switch, deployed in Orlando, Florida in November 1997, did not carry any
significant traffic in 1997. In 1997, the Company began to transmit
international traffic through the Quincy switch, which generates margins
significantly below domestic on-net traffic. In addition, initiatives undertaken
to provision existing customer traffic from off-net to on-net generally did not
commence until the latter part of 1997 and, consequently, the improved margins
generated by on-net traffic did not significantly impact the results for the
year. Finally, increased competition in the long distance telecommunications
industry resulted in slightly lower pricing in 1997, as compared to 1996.
Selling, General and Administrative. Selling, general and administrative
expenses increased by 33.7% to $25.7 million in 1997 from $19.2 million in 1996,
and increased as a percentage of revenue to 26.2% in 1997 from 25.6% in 1996.
Personnel and related expenses, the largest component of selling, general and
administrative expenses, decreased by 1.5% from 1996 to 1997. A decrease in the
direct sales force was principally offset by an expansion of administrative
services, including customer service and provisioning personnel, to support the
revenue growth. Sales offices were added in 1997 in conjunction with the
November 1997 deployment of the Company's switch in Orlando, Florida. Other
selling, general and administrative expenses also increased as a result of the
revenue and personnel growth, including rent and utilities for additional
offices and commissions paid to independent marketing representatives. The
provision for doubtful accounts increased by $3.0 million in 1997 from 1996,
principally relating to two customers and an increase in the estimate of the bad
debt reserve proportionate to the increase in revenue.
Depreciation and Amortization. Depreciation and amortization expense
increased to $994,000 in 1997 from $533,000 in 1996 as a result of capital
additions for the Company's network build-out and internal computer systems. The
Company's internal computer hardware was significantly upgraded in November
1997. Future depreciation expense will increase as assets related to the
Company's network expansion plans are placed into service.
Interest. Interest expense, net of interest income, increased from
$217,000 in 1996 to $471,000 in 1997. This interest relates to a higher level of
revolving credit borrowings in 1997, interest on capital leases entered into in
the latter half of 1997 and interest incurred related to notes payable entered
into in December 1997.
Other Income (Expense). Other income totaled $3.9 million in 1997 and $3.5
million in 1996, both principally related to warrants, as follows. In 1995,
warrants to purchase shares of Tel-Save Holdings, Inc. ("Tel-Save") common stock
were received as partial consideration from a sale of customer billing bases.
During 1996, the Company met the sales volume obligations to exercise a portion
of the outstanding warrants. Certain of these warrants were exercised and common
stock related to those warrants was sold by the Company, resulting in net
proceeds and other income of $1.4 million. The remainder of the warrants that
became exercisable in 1996 were subsequently exercised in 1997. These warrants
were classified as investments and were valued at approximately $2.1 million at
December 31, 1996 using an established valuation model, for a total of $3.5
million recorded as other income in 1996.
44
50
The agreements between Tel-Save and the Company required the transfer of
ownership of the common stock certificates from Tel-Save to the Company upon the
Company meeting certain requirements, which the Company, based upon available
information, believed it had met in 1996 and 1997. Accordingly, in 1997, cash
payments totaling $3.6 million were made to exercise all outstanding warrants.
In total, payments for warrants in 1997 were believed to entitle the Company to
765,000 shares of Tel-Save common stock, subject to the registration of the
shares by Tel-Save. The shares were registered with the Securities and Exchange
Commission in November 1997, but common stock certificates were not physically
transferred to the Company.
In order to take physical possession of the Tel-Save common stock
certificates, the Company filed suit against Tel-Save in January 1998. On June
24, 1998 a settlement agreement was signed between the parties pursuant to which
Tel-Save returned $1.5 million paid by the Company during 1997 in its attempt to
exercise the final warrant for 315,000 shares, and canceled that warrant. In
addition, Tel-Save issued the remaining 450,000 shares to the Company and
simultaneously repurchased such shares for $8.0 million. There will be no
continuing obligations between the parties. Accordingly, the Company's
investment in Tel-Save at December 31, 1997 was valued at the $9.5 million
received pursuant to the settlement, and other income of $3.8 million was
recorded in 1997 to reflect this valuation.
Net Loss. As a result of the aforementioned increases in revenue,
operating expenses, depreciation and amortization, interest income and expense,
the Company incurred a net loss of $3.2 million for the year ended December 31,
1997, compared to net income of $1.4 million for the year ended December 31,
1996.
EBITDA. EBITDA was $(5.6) million for the year ended December 31, 1997
compared to $(1.3) million for the year ended December 31, 1996. This decline
was due to the changes in revenue, network development, operations and selling,
general and administrative expenses discussed above.
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996 COMPARED TO YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1995
Revenue. Revenue increased by 53.2% to $75.1 million in 1996 from $49.0
million in 1995, primarily related to an increase in the customer base. The
Company's customers totaled approximately 19,000 at the end of 1996 and 9,000 at
the end of 1995. In 1995, the Company's revenue was entirely generated from
off-net traffic. In 1996, the Company installed its first network switch, but
less than 1% of 1996 revenue was generated on-net. Revenue in 1996 and 1995 also
included approximately $1.8 million and $3.3 million, respectively, related to
the amortization of credits received through AT&T sales promotions.
Gross Profit. Gross profit increased to $17.9 million in 1996 from $14.0
million in 1995, a 28.4% increase, but gross margin declined to 23.9% in 1996
from 28.5% in 1995. The decline in gross margin resulted from the inclusion of
non-recurring AT&T credits of $3.3 million in 1995 as compared to $1.8 million
in 1996. Also contributing to the margin decline were start up costs in 1996
related to the installation of the Company's first network switch, which was
deployed in June 1996.
Selling, General and Administrative. Selling, general and administrative
expenses increased by 8.6% to $19.2 million in 1996 from $17.7 million in 1995,
but decreased as a percentage of revenue to 25.6% in 1996 from 36.1% in 1995.
Personnel and related expenses, the largest component of selling, general and
administrative expenses, decreased by 6.7% from 1995 to 1996, reflecting a
decrease in the direct retail sales force. Other selling, general and
administrative expenses increased as a result of revenue growth.
Depreciation and Amortization. Depreciation and amortization increased to
$539,000 in 1996 from $276,000 in 1995, related to $2.1 million of capital
expenditures in 1996, including $1.5 million for switching equipment.
Interest Expense. In 1996, when the Company entered into and first began
to borrow under its Former Bank Credit Facility, net interest expense resulted,
totaling $217,000. In 1995, the Company
45
51
did not have any revolving credit borrowings and generated interest income, net
of interest expense on long-term debt, of $162,000.
Other Income. Other income totaled $3.5 million in 1996 and $7.9 million
in 1995. In 1995, the Company sold three separate billing bases of customer
accounts to other telecommunications companies for cash totaling approximately
$8.4 million, recorded as other income, and warrants to purchase shares of
Tel-Save common stock. No value was ascribed to the warrants in 1995. In 1996,
$1.4 million of other income was related to the exercise of warrants and
subsequent sale of Tel-Save common stock. An additional $2.1 million was
recorded as other income primarily related to the value ascribed to additional
warrants that became exercisable in 1996.
Net Income. As a result of the aforementioned increases in revenue,
operating expenses, depreciation and amortization, and interest income and
expense, net income decreased $2.3 million, or 62%, to $1.4 million for the year
ended December 31, 1996, from $3.7 million for the year ended December 31, 1995.
EBITDA. EBITDA was $(1.3) million for the year ended December 31, 1996
compared to $(3.7) million for the year ended December 31, 1995. This decrease
was due to the changes in revenue, network development, operations and selling,
general and administrative expenses discussed above.
QUARTERLY RESULTS
The following table sets forth certain unaudited financial data of the
Company for each of the quarters in 1996 and 1997 and for the first two quarters
of 1998. This information has been derived from unaudited financial statements
that, in the opinion of management, reflect all adjustments (consisting only of
normal recurring adjustments) necessary for a fair presentation of such
quarterly information. The operating results for any quarter are not necessarily
indicative of results to be expected for any future period.
QUARTER ENDED
----------------------------------------------
MARCH 31, JUNE 30, SEPT. 30, DEC. 31,
1996 1996 1996 1996
--------- -------- --------- --------
(IN THOUSANDS)
Revenue......................................... $17,128 $17,782 $18,687 $21,538
Direct cost of revenue.......................... 13,865 12,901 13,909 16,533
Selling, general and administrative............. 5,137 4,468 4,346 5,273
Depreciation and amortization................... 105 130 136 168
------- ------- ------- -------
Operating income (loss)......................... (1,979) 283 296 (436)
Interest income................................. 21 16 20 37
Interest expense................................ (62) (83) (85) (84)
Other income, net............................... 7 23 1,400 2,100
------- ------- ------- -------
Net income (loss)............................... $(2,013) $ 239 $ 1,631 $ 1,617
======= ======= ======= =======
46
52
QUARTER ENDED
----------------------------------------------
MARCH 31, JUNE 30, SEPT. 30, DEC. 31,
1997 1997 1997 1997
--------- -------- --------- --------
(IN THOUSANDS)
Revenue......................................... $24,740 $24,641 $24,540 $24,288
Direct cost of revenue.......................... 19,110 19,330 19,753 19,913
Selling, general and administrative............. 5,127 5,440 5,803 9,334
Depreciation and amortization................... 156 168 257 413
------- ------- ------- -------
Operating income (loss)......................... 347 (297) (1,273) (5,372)
Interest income................................. 22 38 17 9
Interest expense................................ (83) (93) (154) (227)
Other income (expense), net..................... (9) 20 19 3,845
------- ------- ------- -------
Net income (loss)............................... $ 277 $ (332) $(1,391) $(1,745)
======= ======= ======= =======
QUARTER ENDED
---------------------
MARCH 31, JUNE 30,
1998 1998
--------- --------
(IN THOUSANDS)
Revenue..................................................... $25,202 $27,103
Direct cost of revenue...................................... 18,836 19,992
Selling, general and administrative......................... 5,544 6,391
Depreciation and amortization............................... 468 483
------- -------
Operating income............................................ 354 237
Interest income............................................. 3 9
Interest expense............................................ (285) (293)
Other income (expense), net................................. 12 (109)
------- -------
Net income (loss)........................................... $ 84 $ (156)
======= =======
The Company could experience quarterly variations in revenue and operating
income as a result of many factors, including the introduction of new services
by the Company, actions taken by competitors, the timing of the acquisition or
loss of customers, the timing of additional selling, general and administrative
expenses incurred to acquire and support new or additional business and changes
in the Company's revenue mix among its various service offerings. Many of the
factors that could cause such variations are outside of the Company's control.
The Company plans its operating expenditures based on revenue forecasts, and a
revenue shortfall below such forecasts in any quarter could adversely affect the
Company's operating results for that quarter.
LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
OVERVIEW OF HISTORICAL CASH REQUIREMENTS
Since commencing operations in 1990, the Company has experienced
significant growth. Prior to 1994, the Company operated solely as an aggregator
of AT&T services and funded its growth principally with cash provided from
operating activities. In 1994, the Company became a reseller of Sprint services,
requiring additional funding to support the development of an infrastructure to
support provisioning, billing and servicing of customers billed under the
Network Plus name. Cash requirements in 1994 and 1995 were financed primarily by
cash credits received in 1993 and 1994 under AT&T promotions and by the sales of
portions of the Company's customer accounts to other telecommunications
companies in 1995. These sales resulted in the receipt by the Company of a cash
payment of $8.4 million and warrants to purchase common stock of Tel-Save. In
1996, the Company further expanded its infrastructure and began to deploy its
own network. To support 1996 cash requirements, NPI entered into a $7.0 million
revolving credit agreement with Fleet National Bank ("Fleet") and a term loan
for $1.0 million with Fleet to allow for its initial purchase of network
47
53
facilities, and entered into a financing transaction involving the sale and
lease back of the Quincy switch. Cash flows in 1996 were supplemented by the
exercise of Tel-Save warrants and the subsequent sale of the underlying common
stock, resulting in total net proceeds of $1.4 million.
In 1997, the Company continued to expand its network and infrastructure. In
addition, $3.6 million was expended to exercise additional warrants for common
stock of Tel-Save. Cash needs in 1997 were met through the addition of capital
leases, including a financing transaction involving the sale and lease back of
the Orlando switch, utilization of the existing revolving credit facility,
refinancing of a portion of accounts payable to Sprint into a short-term
promissory note (the "Sprint Note") and receipt of loans totaling $1.8 million
from the Company's stockholders (the "Stockholder Loans").
On April 30, 1998, NPI entered into the Former Bank Credit Facility, a
$23.0 million revolving credit agreement with Fleet. Borrowings under this line
were used to repay the Sprint Note and the Stockholder Loans.
On October 7, 1998, the Company and NPI entered into a loan agreement with
Goldman Sachs Credit Partners L.P. and Fleet for the New Revolving Credit
Facility. The New Revolving Credit Facility is a $60 million facility,
concurrent with the closing of which the Company terminated the Former Bank
Credit Facility. The New Revolving Credit Facility has a term of 18 months;
under this facility, up to $60 million is available, $30 million of which is
available based upon a percentage of accounts receivable. Interest is payable at
one percent above the prime rate. If the New Revolving Credit Facility had been
in place on June 30, 1998, approximately $45 million out of the $60 million
would have been available. The New Revolving Credit Facility requires the
Company, among other things, to meet minimum levels of revenues and EBITDA, and
not to exceed certain customer turnover levels and debt to revenue ratios. See
"Description of Certain Indebtedness -- New Revolving Credit Facility".
The Company consummated the offering of Units including the Original
Preferred Shares (the "Initial Offering") on September 3, 1998. The net proceeds
to the Company of the Initial Offering, after deducting commissions and
estimated offering expenses, were approximately $37.5 million. The Company used
$9.8 million of the net proceeds of the Initial Offering to pay down borrowings
under the Former Bank Credit Facility. The Company expects to use the remainder
of the net proceeds to finance the Company's anticipated expansion, including
the expansion of its local telecommunications infrastructure, information
technology systems and sales force; and for working capital.
Prior to the Initial Offering, the Company was an S Corporation and, as a
result, did not pay corporate federal income taxes. Instead, the Company's
stockholders were liable for their share of taxes in respect of the Company's
taxable income. The Company had similar tax status in certain states that
recognize S corporation status. Accordingly, each year prior to 1998 the Company
distributed and for the period prior to August 1998, the Company will
distribute, to its stockholders cash in amounts sufficient to enable the
Company's stockholders to pay federal and state taxes on income of the Company
attributable to the stockholders and related tax preparation expenses. During
the years ended December 31, 1997, 1996 and 1995, the Company distributed an
aggregate of $601,000, $1.2 million and $1.9 million, respectively, to its
stockholders.
FINANCIAL CONDITION
Total assets were $33.7 million at June 30, 1998 compared to $35.6 million
at December 31, 1997 and $22.9 million at December 31, 1996. Accounts receivable
increased by $2.0 million from 1996 to 1997, related to revenue growth, and
declined by $1.5 million in the first six months of 1998 due to improved
collections. Prepaid expenses, other current assets, accounts payable and
accrued liabilities all increased in relation to revenue growth.
48
54
Investments represent the value ascribed to the exercised Tel-Save
warrants. The investment was liquidated for cash in the amount of $9.5 million
in June 1998 and was valued at December 31, 1997 at the amount of cash received.
At December 31, 1996, the investment was valued at $2.1 million using an
established valuation method.
Property and equipment totaled $8.4 million at June 30, 1998, $7.0 million
at December 31, 1997, and $3.1 million at December 31, 1996. Capital
expenditures in the first six months of 1998 totalled $2.4 million, principally
related to the initial payments on switches to be deployed in the future. The
increase in property and equipment in 1997 relates primarily to approximately
$2.5 million in network additions and $1.9 million in computer equipment
additions, net of depreciation, both of which were financed through capital
leases entered into in 1997. Upon entering into the capital lease for the
network equipment, the Company repaid a term loan entered into in 1996. Property
and equipment is expected to grow significantly in 1998 and beyond, as the
Company adds additional switches and other equipment to its existing network.
The Company owns its switches, located in Quincy, Massachusetts and Orlando
pursuant to a sale-leaseback arrangement with Chase Equipment Leasing, Inc. The
Company initially purchased the switches for an aggregate purchase price of $3.5
million and subsequently transferred title to the switches to its lender and
leased back the switches for five years. At the end of the lease term, the
Company has the option to purchase the switches for nominal consideration.
Payments under this lease arrangement totalled approximately $68,000 in 1997 and
require ongoing payments of approximately $68,000 per month.
During 1997, additional capital was required to continue to expand the
Company's business. Additional liquidity was achieved by the issuance of notes
payable. In December, the Company issued a promissory note to Sprint for the
repayment of $4.6 million previously classified as accounts payable. The note's
maturity was September 1998. The note's remaining balance of $3.7 million was
repaid on May 1, 1998 from borrowings under the Former Bank Credit Facility, as
described below. In December 1997, the Company borrowed $1.8 million pursuant to
the Stockholder Loans. Interest was paid monthly at the prevailing prime rate.
The Stockholder Loans, including accrued interest, were also repaid on May 1,
1998.
In January 1996, NPI entered into a revolving credit agreement with Fleet,
which provided for borrowings of up to $7.0 million, including letters of
credit. This agreement was due to expire on May 31, 1998 and was refinanced in
May 1998, as described below. Borrowings under this line in excess of $5.0
million were subject to a formula-based arrangement based upon a percentage of
accounts receivable. Interest was payable monthly at Fleet's prime rate or
available LIBOR options. The maximum borrowings under the agreement in 1997 and
1996 were $5.0 million and $3.0 million, respectively. At December 31, 1996 the
loan balance was $2.0 million, with no outstanding letters of credit. At
December 31, 1997, the loan balance was $4.5 million, with letters of credit of
$120,000 outstanding.
Cash provided by operating activities in the first six months of 1998
totaled $11.3 million, principally due to the $9.5 million received in late June
related to the Tel-Save warrant settlement. As a result, cash and cash
equivalents totaled $8.2 million at June 30, 1998. At June 30, 1998, the Company
had an outstanding LIBOR loan of $9.0 million in conjunction with the Former
Bank Credit Facility, which was repaid in early July. At June 30, 1998,
outstanding letters of credit totaled $1.0 million.
On April 30, 1998, NPI entered into the Former Bank Credit Facility with
Fleet and terminated the previously existing agreement. The Former Bank Credit
Facility provided for borrowings of up to $23.0 million, subject to a
formula-based arrangement based upon a percentage of accounts receivable, and
was terminated in connection with the closing of the New Revolving Credit
Facility. Proceeds from the Former Bank Credit Facility were used to repay the
Sprint Note and the Stockholder Loans. Availability under this line was
approximately $12.5 million on May 1, 1998.
49
55
Proceeds from borrowings under the New Revolving Credit Facility were used to
repay and retire the Former Bank Credit Facility. See "Description of Certain
Indebtedness".
On October 7, 1998, the Company and NPI entered into a loan agreement with
Goldman Sachs Credit Partners L.P. and Fleet for the New Revolving Credit
Facility. The New Revolving Credit Facility is a $60 million facility,
concurrent with the closing of which the Company terminated the Former Bank
Credit Facility. The New Revolving Credit Facility has a term of 18 months;
under this facility, up to $60 million is available, $30 million of which is
available based upon a percentage of accounts receivable. Interest is payable at
one percent above the prime rate. The New Revolving Credit Facility requires the
Company, among other things, to meet minimum levels of revenues and EBITDA, and
not to exceed certain customer turnover levels and debt to revenue ratios. See
"Description of Certain Indebtedness -- New Revolving Credit Facility".
On September 2, 1998, the Company paid a dividend in the aggregate amount
of $5.0 million. As a result, $2.5 million was distributed to each of Robert T.
Hale and Robert T. Hale, Jr. Following receipt of the dividend, Robert T. Hale,
Jr. reinvested $1.9 million in the Company (representing approximately the
distribution to Robert T. Hale, Jr., net of his estimated tax liability
resulting from such distribution), in the form of a long-term loan to the
Company; such loan, including interest, will be payable 10 days after the
redemption of the Series A Preferred Stock. The dividend distribution was funded
out of existing cash resources and the Former Bank Credit Facility. See
"Description of Certain Indebtedness" and "Certain Transactions".
EXPANSION OF SERVICES AND FUTURE CASH REQUIREMENTS
The Company's strategic initiatives in 1998 include expanding both its
service offerings to include local exchange and Internet services and its
facilities-based infrastructure. These initiatives will require a substantial
amount of capital for, but not limited to, the installation of network switches
and related equipment, fiber, personnel additions and funding of operating
losses and working capital. The Company's strategic initiatives include the
deployment of additional long distance and international switches, the
deployment of local switches, the offering of new services such as local
exchange and Internet access services, the expansion of its sales force and
other personnel and significant investment in its information technology
systems.
The Company believes that net proceeds from the Initial Offering, together
with cash flow generated from operations and borrowings available under the New
Revolving Credit Facility, will be sufficient to fund the Company's working
capital needs, planned capital expenditures and interest expense through at
least August 1999. The actual amount of capital expenditures and the timing of
such expenditures will depend on several factors, including equipment and fiber
availability, economic conditions, competition and regulatory developments. The
Company may also require additional financing, which may include public or
private debt and equity financings, to enter into strategic alliances, acquire
assets or businesses or make investments toward achieving its strategic
objectives. There can be no assurance, however, that the Company will be able to
raise sufficient funds or do so on acceptable terms. Failure to obtain such
financings could result in the delay or abandonment or the Company's development
and expansion plans. Furthermore, there can be no assurance that actual capital
needs and expenditures will not be significantly higher than the Company's
current estimates. See "Risk Factors -- Negative Cash Flow and Operating Losses"
and "-- Substantial Future Capital Requirements; Need for Additional Financing;
Substantial Leverage".
IMPACT OF YEAR 2000
Many computer systems experience problems handling dates beyond the year
1999. Therefore, some computer hardware and software will need to be modified
prior to the year 2000 in order to remain functional. The Company is completing
its preliminary assessment of both the internal readiness of its computer
systems and the compliance of its network and services sold to customers. The
Company expects to implement during 1998 the systems and programming changes
necessary to address year 2000 issues, and based on its evaluation, does not
believe that
50
56
the cost of such actions will have a material adverse effect on the Company's
results of operations or financial condition. There can be no assurance,
however, that there will not be a delay in, or increased costs associated with,
the implementation of such changes, and the Company's inability to implement
such changes could have a material adverse effect on future results of
operations. Furthermore, if the hardware or software comprising the Company's
network elements acquired from third party vendors or others on whose services
the Company depends or with whom the Company's systems interface, or the
software applications of other suppliers, are not year 2000 compliant, it could
affect the Company's systems, which could have a material adverse effect on the
Company's business, financial condition and results of operations. See "Risk
Factors -- Year 2000 Compliance".
51
57
BUSINESS
THE COMPANY
OVERVIEW
Network Plus, founded in 1990, is a leading facilities-based integrated
communications provider ("ICP") offering switched long distance, data and
enhanced telecommunications services. The Company's customers consist primarily
of small and medium-sized businesses located in major markets in the
Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States. The Company also
provides international wholesale transport and termination services to major
domestic and international telecommunication carriers. In addition, the Company
intends to offer local services on a commercial basis in certain states
beginning in late 1998. As of July 15, 1998, the Company served over 34,000
customers representing in excess of 150,000 access lines and 30,000 toll-free
numbers. All customers are directly invoiced by the Company on a Network Plus
bill. As of July 15, 1998, the Company had a 152-person sales force located in
eight regional offices, and in 1997 had total revenue of $98 million.
The Company owns network components where economically advantageous and
leases components where more capital-efficient. The Company has switches in
Quincy, Massachusetts and Orlando, and intends to add switches throughout the
second half of 1998 and continuing through 1999 in Atlanta, Chicago, Los Angeles
and New York City as well as multiple local traffic switches in the Northeastern
and Southeastern regions of United States. In May 1998, over 60% of the
Company's revenue was generated by customer traffic carried on its network, and
the Company expects this percentage to increase as the Company further expands
its facilities-based infrastructure. The Company recently entered into two
20-year indefeasible right-of-use ("IRU") agreements pursuant to which it
acquired 625 route miles of dark fiber (1,830 digital fiber miles), that, when
fully deployed and activated, will form a redundant fiber ring connecting major
markets throughout New England and the New York metropolitan area and provide
the Company with significant transmission capacity.
The Company believes that, because of its large and highly focused sales
force and superior customer support, the Company will be successful in rapidly
acquiring new customers, continuing to migrate "off-net" long distance customers
to its network, cross-selling local services to its existing long distance
customers and maintaining a high rate of customer retention. The compounded
annual growth rate for the number of customers from year end 1994 to year end
1997 was 68%.
The Company's business strategy is to leverage its eight-year operating
history, existing customer base and substantial in-region experience to (i) be a
one-stop ICP offering a comprehensive array of bundled voice and data solutions,
(ii) acquire and retain market share through its direct sales force and focused
customer service, (iii) enhance its facilities-based infrastructure where
economically advantageous and continue the migration of traffic to its network,
(iv) build and retain market share through advanced technologies and an advanced
operational support system, (v) target the underserved market of small and
medium-sized businesses, with a focus on the Northeastern and Southeastern
regions of the United States, (vi) increase international wholesale sales and
(vii) expand through strategic acquisitions and alliances.
NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE
The Company pursues a capital-efficient network deployment strategy that
involves owning switches and acquiring or leasing fiber optic transmission
facilities on an incremental basis to satisfy customer demand. The Company
believes that its switch-based, lease-or-acquire transport strategy provides
significant competitive advantages. By owning network components, the Company is
able to generate higher operating margins and maintain greater control over its
network operations. The Company structures its network expansion decisions in a
manner designed to (i) reduce up-front capital expenditures required to enter
new markets, (ii) avoid the risk of stranded investment in under-utilized fiber
networks and (iii) enter markets and generate revenue and positive cash flow
52
58
more rapidly than if the Company first constructed its own facilities. Where
market penetration does not economically justify the deployment of its own
network, the Company utilizes the networks of alternative carriers.
In addition to its 625 route miles of dark fiber, Network Plus currently
owns and maintains (i) a Northern Telecom, Inc. ("Nortel") international gateway
and interexchange switch in Quincy, Massachusetts, and (ii) a Nortel
interexchange switch in Orlando. The Company is currently deploying both a
Nortel international gateway and interchange switch in Los Angeles and a Nortel
interexchange switch in Chicago. The Company has a Network Operations Center in
Quincy, Massachusetts, which monitors the Company's entire network from a
central location, increasing the security, reliability and efficiency of the
Company's operations. The Company is also planning the deployment of local
switching facilities throughout the Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the
United States. The Company intends to further expand its network in geographic
areas where customer concentrations or traffic patterns make expansion
economically advantageous.
SERVICES
Network Plus offers retail telecommunications services primarily to small
and medium-sized businesses. Retail offerings currently include long distance
and toll-free services (both with and without Advanced Intelligent Network
("AIN") features), multiple access options, calling and debit card, paging,
data, and custom management control features. The Company plans to add local
exchange services, Internet services and additional AIN features in the latter
part of 1998 and into 1999. The Company also offers international wholesale
services primarily to interexchange carriers ("IXCs") and international
telecommunications carriers. In May 1998, retail and wholesale offerings
accounted for approximately 78% and 22%, respectively, of the Company's total
revenue.
LARGE AND GROWING SALES FORCE
As of July 15, 1998, Network Plus had a 152-member, highly focused sales
force consisting of a 140-person direct retail sales force, a six-person
international wholesale sales force and a six-person agent and reseller sales
force. The Company's sales approach is to build long-term relationships with its
customers, with the intent of becoming the single-source provider of their
telecommunications services. The Company trains its sales force in-house with a
customer-focused program that promotes increased sales through both customer
attraction and customer retention. All members of the sales force are given
incentives through a commission structure under which commissions are paid on an
ongoing basis for as long as the customer continues to purchase services from
the Company. This "lifetime residual" is intended to motivate the sales force to
remain actively involved with customers and participate in the customer
retention and support process. The Company believes that this customer
support-focused commission structure and in-house training are unique in the
industry and provide the Company with a competitive advantage in attracting and
retaining customers. The sales force currently is located in eight offices and,
by year end 1999, the Company intends to open additional sales offices and
expand its sales force to approximately 400 members. The Company expects that it
will continue to utilize a modular sales force structure and that existing
employees with substantial sales experience will manage new sales offices,
ensuring a continuation of the Company's customer-focused culture. The Company's
sales force director, regional sales directors, branch managers and team leaders
have an average employment tenure of over five years with the Company.
MANAGEMENT
Robert T. Hale, Jr., the Company's President, Chief Executive Officer,
Director and co-founder, has more than 10 years of experience in the
telecommunications industry. Robert T. Hale, the Company's Chairman and
co-founder, has more than eight years of experience in the telecommunications
industry, is a Director and former Chairman of the 600-member Telecommunications
Reseller Association ("TRA") and has been Chairman of the TRA's Underlying
Carrier Committee since 1992. Network Plus's eight-member Executive Officer
group has an average employment
53
59
tenure of more than three years with the Company and an average of over 11 years
of experience in the telecommunications industry. The Company believes that the
quality, tenure and teamwork of its management team will be critical factors in
the implementation of its expansion strategy.
MARKET OPPORTUNITY
As a result of the Telecommunications Act of 1996 (the "Telecommunications
Act") and other federal, state and international initiatives, numerous
telecommunications markets have been opened to competition. In addition, the
increasing globalization of the world economy, along with an increased reliance
on data transmission and Internet access, has expanded the traditional
telecommunications markets. After completing its planned expansion, the Company
expects to have 18 sales offices in 12 states in the Northeastern and
Southeastern regions of the United States. According to industry data, in 1997
there were approximately 8.7 million business lines in the Company's markets in
the Northeastern region (the New England states, New York and New Jersey) and
4.8 million business lines in the Company's markets in the Southeastern region
(Florida, Georgia, North Carolina, South Carolina and Tennessee). The Company
anticipates significant demand for its services, based on its belief that small
and medium-sized businesses are not aggressively targeted by large providers and
are underserved with respect to customer service and support.
BUSINESS STRATEGY
Network Plus intends to undertake an aggressive growth strategy to meet its
goal of becoming the ICP of choice providing one-stop telecommunications
solutions to customers in its markets. The Company's future success will depend
upon its ability to implement this strategy. Unlike many emerging
telecommunications companies, the Company has a proven eight-year operating
history. The Company believes that the collective talent and telephony
experience of its management and employee base provide a competitive advantage
and position the Company to effectively implement its growth strategy, which
includes the following:
PROVIDE INTEGRATED TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A key element in the Company's growth will be the implementation of a
marketing and operating plan that emphasizes an integrated voice and data
telecommunications solution. To a large extent, customers the Company expects to
target have not previously had the opportunity to purchase bundled services from
a single provider. The Company believes that these customers will prefer one
source for all of their telecommunications requirements, including products,
billing and service. The Company intends to be the single source of, and provide
a consolidated bill for, integrated local, long distance and other
telecommunications services, in addition to providing a single point of contact
for customer service, product inquiries, repairs and billing questions. The
Company believes that one-stop integrated communications services will enable it
to further penetrate its existing markets, expand its customer base, capture a
larger portion of its customers' total expenditures on telecommunication
services and increase customer retention.
EXPAND SALES FORCE AND FOCUS ON CUSTOMER SERVICE
The Company intends to significantly expand its sales force to both acquire
and support a growing customer base. The Company's sales force consisted, as of
July 15, 1998, of 152 members and is expected to grow to approximately 400 by
year end 1999. To support its customer base, the Company provides customer
service 24 hours per day, 365 days per year, and estimates that its customer
service representatives currently have an average response time for answering
incoming calls of under 15 seconds. In addition, the commission structure of the
Company's direct retail sales force is designed to promote a high level of
ongoing customer care and to assure that the sales staff remains actively
involved in the customer service process. Similarly, the compensation of
customer support personnel is designed to promote a high level of ongoing
customer care and retention. The
54
60
Company believes that its sales and customer service processes have resulted in
a customer retention rate that is higher than that of many competitors and
differentiate the Company as a customer-focused ICP, giving it a competitive
advantage.
ENHANCE FACILITIES-BASED INFRASTRUCTURE
The Company intends to continue migration of customer traffic to its own
network and to cross-sell new services, such as local service, to its customers.
Expansion of the Company's facilities-based infrastructure with fiber and
switches will increase the proportion of telecommunications traffic that is
originated or terminated on its network, which the Company believes will result
in higher long-term operating margins and greater control over its network
operations. The Company's approach to network design is structured to minimize
the capital investment necessary to provide service, avoid spending capital
where not economically justifiable, better match the commitment of capital to
the onset of revenue-generating activities and generate cash flow more quickly.
Throughout the second half of 1998 and continuing through 1999, the Company
intends to enhance its facilities by purchasing and installing (i) Nortel
interexchange switches in Chicago and New York, (ii) a Nortel interexchange and
local switch in Atlanta, (iii) a Nortel interexchange and international gateway
switch in Los Angeles and (iv) multiple local traffic switches throughout the
Northeastern and Southeastern regions of United States. In addition, the Company
intends to begin offering high-quality dedicated and dial-up Internet services.
CONTINUE INVESTING IN ADVANCED TECHNOLOGIES AND AN ADVANCED OPERATIONAL
SUPPORT SYSTEM
Network Plus expects to continue to invest in advanced technologies that
provide strategic advantages by integrating the Company's network facilities
with its operational support system ("OSS") to enhance service response time.
The Company intends to deploy Nortel's Service Builder throughout its network
infrastructure, which will elevate the Company's network from a state-of-the-art
SS7 network to a next-generation intelligent network. Service Builder will also
permit the rapid deployment of "designer" intelligent network products and
services such as nationwide "follow me" numbers and Time-of-Day Routing, as well
as accelerate the Company's compliance with legally mandated services such as
local number portability ("LNP"). To support integrated provisioning and
customer care for all products and services, the Company is developing an open
scalable client/server Oracle-based platform that is expected to better
integrate its operations, both geographically and among departments. The Company
believes that these technologies will provide a long-term competitive advantage
by allowing a more rapid implementation of switched local services in its
markets, shortening the time between the receipt of a customer order and the
generation of revenue and enabling a higher level of focused customer care.
TARGET UNDERSERVED MARKETS WITH A SUPER-REGIONAL FOCUS
Network Plus intends to continue targeting small and medium-sized
businesses in the Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States,
its primary service areas, while expanding into other markets in the
Mid-Atlantic region, Illinois and California. The Company will seek to be among
the first to market integrated communications services in many of its markets.
The Company believes that the Northeastern and Southeastern regions are
particularly attractive due to a number of factors, including (i) the population
density in the Northeast; (ii) a large number of rapidly growing metropolitan
clusters in the Southeast, such as Atlanta, Miami/Fort Lauderdale and Orlando;
and (iii) the relatively small number of significant competitors to the
incumbent local exchange carriers ("ILECs"). In addition, the Company believes
that small and medium-sized businesses have been underserved by large
competitors with respect to customer service and support, and that its emphasis
on customer service, support and satisfaction provides it with a distinct
competitive advantage. The Company also believes that ILECs, such as regional
Bell operating companies ("RBOCs"), and the largest national carriers primarily
concentrate their sales
55
61
and marketing efforts on residential and large business customers and that the
market for small and medium-sized businesses is generally less competitive.
INCREASE INTERNATIONAL WHOLESALE SALES
The Company intends to continue targeting the sale of both international
and domestic termination and transport services to wholesale customers such as
large IXCs and international telecommunications carriers. The Company believes
that the international market represents a growing opportunity as a result of
the rapidly increasing globalization of the world economy. The Company's
international department is focused on the development of offshore
telecommunications relationships that provide the Company with lower
international termination costs as well as greater price stability than can be
obtained from U.S.-based carriers. These relationships are being leveraged by
the Company to obtain revenue through the domestic termination of offshore-
originated traffic, in addition to their primary role of enabling the Company to
offer international termination to its customers. The Company has already made
significant investments in its international network capabilities, including a
Nortel international gateway switch in Quincy, Massachusetts and lease and
indefeasible right of use ("IRU") arrangements for international submarine cable
capacity in TAT 12/13 and Americas I in the Atlantic Ocean and TPC-5 in the
Pacific Ocean, as well as various subsidiary feeder cable systems. In addition
to increasing revenue, the Company expects that its strategy of selling
international wholesale services will lower the cost of carrying all its
international traffic and result in more attractive service offerings in its
core retail markets. As of June 1, 1998, the Company provided its international
wholesale services to 13 domestic and foreign telecommunications carriers, and
in May 1998 such services accounted for 22% of the Company's revenue.
EXPAND THROUGH STRATEGIC ACQUISITIONS AND ALLIANCES
As part of its expansion strategy, the Company plans to consider
acquisitions, joint ventures and strategic alliances in telecommunications,
Internet access and other related service areas. The Company believes that
acquisitions of, and joint ventures and other strategic alliances with, related
or complementary businesses may enable it to more rapidly expand by adding new
customers, new services, additional customer service and technical support
capabilities, and additional cash flow. The acquisitions could be funded by
cash, bank financing or the issuance of debt or equity securities. The Company
is evaluating and often engages in discussions regarding various acquisition
opportunities but is not currently a party to any agreement for a material
acquisition.
SERVICE OFFERINGS
The Company offers retail telecommunications services primarily to small
and medium-sized businesses. The Company's retail service offerings currently
include long distance and toll-free services (both with and without AIN),
multiple access options, calling and debit card, paging, data, and custom
management control features. The Company plans to add local exchange service,
Internet services and additional AIN features in the latter part of 1998 and
into 1999. The Company also offers wholesale international and domestic
termination and transport services primarily to major domestic and international
telecommunications carriers.
CURRENT SERVICES
Retail Services. As of July 15, 1998, the Company provided retail
telecommunications services to over 34,000 customers, primarily small and
medium-sized businesses located in the Northeastern and Southeastern regions of
the United States. Retail services are sold through the Company's direct retail
sales force and, to a lesser extent, through resellers and independent marketing
56
62
representatives. In May 1998, retail telecommunications services accounted for
78% of the Company's revenue. The Company's retail services include the
following:
- LONG DISTANCE: The Company offers a full range of switched and dedicated
domestic (interstate) and international long distance services, including
"1+" outbound origination and termination in all 50 states along with
global termination to over 225 countries. Long distance services include
interLATA services, and, where authorized, intraLATA toll services.
Additional long distance features include both verified and non-verified
accounting codes, collect calling, station-to-station calling,
third-party calling and operator-assisted calling.
- TOLL-FREE SERVICES: The Company offers a full range of switched and
dedicated domestic (interstate) toll-free services, including toll-free
origination and termination in all 50 states, international toll-free
origination from 61 countries including Canada, and toll-free directory
assistance. AIN enhanced toll-free services include the following
features: Command Routing, Dialed Number Identification Service
("DNIS"), Area Code/Exchange Routing, Real Time Automatic Number
Identification Delivery, Day-of-Year Routing, Day-of-Week Routing,
Time-of-Day Routing and Percentage Allocation Routing.
- ACCESS OPTIONS: The Company offers its long distance and toll-free
customers multiple access options including dedicated access at DS0, DS1,
DS3 and E1 speed(s) and switched access. Dedicated access service
customers have the option of incorporating ISDN Primary Rate Interface
Protocol and switched access service customers have the option of
incorporating the ISDN Basic Rate Interface Protocol.
- CALLING CARD AND DEBIT CARD SERVICES: The Company offers nationwide
switched access customized calling card services and debit card services.
Customers have the option of calling cards that are personalized, branded
or generic.
- PAGING SERVICES: The Company offers advanced wireless paging services,
including digital and alphanumeric paging, personal identification number
("PIN") services, voice mail, news and sports feeds, and local geographic
coverage through and including national geographic coverage. Paging
services offered by the Company are provided through PageMart, Inc.
- DATA SERVICES: The Company offers advanced data transmission services,
including private line, point-to-point and Frame Relay Services. Data
services have multiple access options including dedicated access at DS0,
DS1, DS3 and E1 speed(s) and switched access. Frame relay services are
designed for bandwidth needs that vary over time and for inter-networking
geographically dispersed networks and equipment. Frame relay services
offered by the Company are provided through Sprint.
- CUSTOM MANAGEMENT CONTROL FEATURES: All of the Company's customers have
the option of customized management reporting features including
interstate/intrastate area code summaries, international destination
matrix, daily usage summaries, state summaries, time of day summaries,
duration distribution matrix, exception reporting of long duration calls,
and incomplete and blocked call reporting.
- LOCAL SERVICES: The Company is currently providing local services on a
test basis in Massachusetts, and the Company intends to begin offering
such services in certain of its service areas on a commercial basis by
the end of 1998. See "Planned Services" below.
International Wholesale Services. The Company offers international
wholesale termination and transport services primarily to major domestic and
international telecommunications carriers. The Company believes its
international wholesale service offering is a strategic element in its overall
plan to expand its network and to generate and retain customer traffic. The
Company intends to build on its relationships with large domestic and
international carriers to purchase increased capacity and to otherwise support
its international service offerings. In addition, the Company expects that its
57
63
provision of comprehensive international services will lower the cost of
carrying international traffic and result in more attractive service offerings
in its core markets.
PLANNED SERVICES
Local Services. The Company intends to begin offering local service on a
commercial basis by the end of 1998 in Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode
Island and Vermont and in 1999 in Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Georgia,
Tennessee and Florida. The Company intends to deploy local switches and enter
into interconnection agreements in target market areas as market conditions
warrant. As part of its plan to offer local exchange services, the Company (i)
has obtained authority to provide local service in Massachusetts, New Hampshire,
Rhode Island, Connecticut and Florida and is currently in the process of
obtaining CLEC status in additional New England States, New York, New Jersey,
Georgia, Pennsylvania and Tennessee, and (ii) has entered into interconnection
agreements with Bell Atlantic for Massachusetts, New Hampshire and Rhode Island
and has commenced the negotiation of interconnection agreements with Bell
Atlantic, Bell South, GTE, Sprint and SNET for the purpose of gaining access to
the unbundled network elements necessary to offer facilities-based local
exchange services in other states. See "Risk Factors -- Lack of Experience
Offering Local and Other Telecommunications Services", "Risk Factors -- Reliance
on Leased Transport Facilities and IRUs", "Risk Factors -- Lack of
Interconnection and Peering Agreements", "Risk Factors -- The Telecommunications
Act and Other Regulation" and "Government Regulation".
Internet Services. In 1999, the Company intends to begin offering
customers Internet access, including high quality dedicated and dial-up Internet
connection and IP transport.
Advanced Local Services. In connection with its local exchange service
offering, the Company intends to offer value added local exchange services on
both a resale basis (where such services are made available for resale) and on a
switched-facilities basis, including the following: ISDN, Centrex, Trunk Line
Service, Voice Mail (unbundled network element only), Hunt Sequencing, Three Way
Calling, Call Forwarding, Call Waiting, Speed Dial, Voice Dialing, All Call
Blocking, Selective Blocking, Foreign Exchange, Call Trace and Caller ID.
SALES AND MARKETING
OVERVIEW
The Company's sales force seeks to provide its existing and potential
customers with a comprehensive array of telecommunications services customized
for the increasingly convergent voice and data marketplace. The Company's
customers consist primarily of small and medium-sized businesses that have
telecommunications expenditures of less than $10,000 per month. The Company
believes that RBOCs and large long distance carriers historically have not
concentrated their sales and marketing efforts on this business segment, which
the Company believes represents a significant portion of the telecommunications
market. Through its sales force and its eight-year operating history, the
Company believes it has established itself as a recognized provider of high-
quality, competitively priced long distance services, with a reputation for
responsive customer care.
The Company's sales and marketing approach is to build long-term business
relationships with its customers, with the intent of becoming the single source
provider of all their telecommunications services. The Company trains its sales
force in house with a customer-focused program that promotes increased sales
through both customer attraction and customer retention. In addition, all
members of the sales force are given incentives through a commission structure
under which commissions are paid on an ongoing basis for as long as a customer
continues to purchase services from the Company. This "lifetime residual" is
intended to motivate the sales force to remain actively involved with customers
and participate in the customer retention and support process. The Company
believes that its customer support-focused commission structure and in-house
training
58
64
are unique in the industry and provide the Company with a competitive advantage
in attracting and retaining customers.
Members of the Company's sales force are assigned to one of the following
sales groups: (i) the direct retail sales force, which markets the Company's
retail telecommunications services directly to end users; (ii) the reseller and
independent agent sales force, which markets the Company's telecommunications
services to resellers, independent marketing representatives, associations and
affinity groups; and (iii) the international wholesale sales force, which sells
the Company's international telecommunications services on a wholesale basis to
major domestic and international telecommunications carriers.
SALES CHANNELS
DIRECT RETAIL SALES. The Company's direct retail sales force markets the
Company's retail telecommunications services directly to end users. As of July
15, 1998 the Company employed 140 direct sales representatives working in eight
regional offices. By year end 1999, the Company intends to open additional sales
offices. This anticipated expansion will result in a sales force with
approximately 400 direct retail sales personnel located in offices throughout
the Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States. See "Risk
Factors -- Management of Rapid Growth".
The sales force is led by Robert T. Hale, Jr., who has over 10 years of
telecommunications sales experience. The direct sales force is divided into two
regions: (i) a Northeastern region, headed by a regional sales director with
seven years of telecommunications sales experience with the Company; and (ii) a
Southeastern region, headed by a regional sales director with seven years of
telecommunications sales experience with the Company. Each of the Company's
existing eight sales offices is headed by a branch manager with from four to
seven years of direct telecommunications sales experience with the Company. Each
sales office is further sub-divided into smaller sales teams, each of which is
headed by a team leader who directly oversees the day-to-day sales activities of
his or her team and acts as a mentor to its members. Teams generally consist of
eight to 10 sales representatives.
The Company's direct retail sales force has a proven management structure
based on a "growth from within" philosophy. As the Company opens a sales office
in a new geographic area, it identifies a branch manager and team leader to head
the new office. New branch managers are typically chosen from among the
Company's experienced team leaders, and team leaders are typically chosen from
among the Company's experienced sales representatives. Because these new
positions represent promotion opportunities, the Company has been successful in
opening new offices with management teams having significant Network Plus work
experience. As branch managers and team leaders relocate to offices in new
geographic areas, they immediately hire new sales representatives from the area.
All new sales representatives are required to receive formal in-house training,
where they are expected to gain a thorough knowledge of the Company's services
and the telecommunications industry. After formal training, sales
representatives are permitted to pursue customers but are required to
participate in a continuing mentoring program. The Company believes this
philosophy is a competitive advantage in the attraction and long-term retention
of sales personnel.
The Company also telemarkets its long distance services, primarily to small
businesses and residential users. Telemarketing activities are conducted by 16
employees located at the Company's telemarketing center in Largo, Florida, which
was established in the fourth quarter of 1997.
59
65
The following chart sets forth each existing and targeted new Company
office location, the planned opening date for each targeted new office, the
number of direct sales representatives currently located in each office and the
number of direct retail sales representatives intended to be located in each
office at year end 1998 and 1999.
DIRECT RETAIL SALES STAFF
------------------------------------------
TOTAL AT PLANNED PLANNED
TARGET OFFICE JULY 15, TOTAL AT YEAR TOTAL AT YEAR
OFFICE LOCATION OPENING DATE 1998 END 1998 END 1999
- ---------------------------------------- ------------- -------- ------------- -------------
Atlanta, GA............................. Existing 18 32 40
Fort Lauderdale, FL..................... Existing 16 30 35
Nashua, NH.............................. Existing 9 14 15
Norwalk, CT............................. Existing 11 20 25
Orlando, FL............................. Existing 17 20 30
Providence, RI.......................... Existing 13 20 22
Quincy, MA.............................. Existing 40 70 80
Largo, FL............................... Existing 16 18 20
Worcester, MA........................... Existing 0 20 20
Jacksonville, FL........................ Existing 0 20 20
New York, NY............................ Existing 0 20 48
Springfield, MA......................... Existing 0 12 15
Undetermined............................ Q2 1999 0 0 15
Undetermined............................ Q2 1999 0 0 15
------- ------- -------
Totals.................................. 140 296 400
======= ======= =======
RESELLER AND INDEPENDENT AGENT SALES. The Company's reseller and
independent agent sales force markets the Company's telecommunications services
to various resellers, independent marketing representatives, associations and
affinity groups. The focus of the reseller and independent agent sales force is
to locate established, high-quality organizations with extensive distribution
channels in order to market the Company's telecommunications services to both a
broader geographic range of potential customers and a greater number of
potential customers than could be reached by the direct retail sales force.
The Company sells its services on a wholesale basis to resellers, which in
turn sell such services at retail to their customers. The Company generally
sells its services to independent marketing representatives, associations and
affinity groups on a retail basis. Use of independent marketing representatives
allows the Company to reduce its marketing and other overhead costs. As
compensation for their services, independent marketing representatives generally
receive a commission on their sales. The Company employs stringent selection
criteria and attempts to carefully monitor and control the activities of its
resellers and independent marketing representatives to ensure compliance with
laws, industry standards, and corporate policies. The Company believes that the
number of complaints it has received regarding the methods and practices of its
agents is negligible in comparison with that of many other telecommunications
companies.
The Company's reseller and independent agent sales force is split into
three regions: (i) a Northeastern region, headed by a regional sales director
with seven years of telecommunications sales experience with the Company; (ii) a
Southeastern region, headed by a regional sales director with three years of
telecommunications sales experience with the Company; and (iii) a West Coast
region, headed by a regional sales director with eight years of
telecommunications sales experience with the Company. The Company commenced
sales through resellers and independent marketing representatives in 1996, and
the Company currently has six salespeople dedicated to this market segment. In
May 1998, sales through the Company's reseller and independent agent sales force
accounted for 13% of the Company's revenue.
60
66
INTERNATIONAL WHOLESALE SALES. The Company's international wholesale sales
force markets the Company's international telecommunications services to both
international and domestic telecommunications providers. The international
wholesale sales force is focused on developing customer and vendor relationships
with the top tier IXCs as well as RBOCs and selected financially stable second
tier IXCs. In May 1998, international wholesale sales accounted for
approximately 22% of the Company's revenue.
The Company's international wholesale sales force is headed by the Vice
President and General Manager of International Services, who has over 16 years
of experience in international telecommunications sales, service and networks.
In addition, this sales group includes three specialized international wholesale
sales representatives, each of whom has over four years of telecommunications
sales experience with the Company. As of July 15, 1998, the Company had six
sales people in its international wholesale sales force, and expects that number
to increase to 15 by year end 1998 and to 21 by year end 1999.
SALES FORCE COMPENSATION
All sales persons, regardless of sales group, are compensated with both a
salary and a residual commission structure based on each customer's continued
use of the Company's services. The compensation of members of the Company's
sales force is therefore increasingly reliant over time on the retention of
existing customers. It is the Company's belief that this "lifetime residual"
motivates each sales person to remain actively involved with customers and
participate in the customer support process. The Company believes this approach
to commissions is unique in the industry and provides the Company with
competitive advantages including (i) enhanced relationships, which increase
cross-selling opportunities; (ii) reduced customer service and support costs;
and (iii) increased customer retention.
SIMPLICITY PRICING
The Company utilizes a flat-rate per-minute pricing structure for long
distance and certain other services, which the Company refers to as Simplicity
Pricing. The Company believes this simplified pricing structure assists in the
sales process and gives the Company a competitive advantage over larger long
distance competitors which historically have used complex pricing structures
featuring either distance-sensitive calling charges or myriad base rates and
discounting schemes. The Company strives to deliver this Simplicity Pricing on a
timely invoice in a format that is user-friendly.
MARKETING AND ADVERTISING
Historically, because the Company has been successful in relying upon its
sales force to obtain additional customers and increased name recognition, the
Company has refrained from undertaking significant advertising efforts. The
Company is actively involved in numerous charitable and community events, which
the Company believes increase recognition of the Company in particular
geographic regions. The Company has no immediate plans to allocate significant
resources to direct advertising efforts.
CUSTOMER BASE
RETAIL CUSTOMERS
As of July 15, 1998, the Company had over 34,000 retail customers, which
the Company internally segments by monthly revenue into (i) a National Account
segment (over $1,000 of usage per month), (ii) a Major Account segment (between
$250 and $1,000 of usage per month) and
61
67
(iii) a Small Business/Residential Customer Account segment (under $250 of usage
per month). This segmentation is designed to ensure that those customers
generating higher monthly revenues experience a higher level of proactive
customer care. As of July 15, 1998 the National Segment included over 1,900
customers generating approximately 56% of the Company's revenue for June 1998,
the Major Account Segment included over 4,600 customers generating approximately
25% of the Company's revenue, and the Small Business/Residential Account Segment
included over 26,000 customers generating approximately 19% of the Company's
revenue.
INTERNATIONAL WHOLESALE CUSTOMERS
As of June 1, 1998, the Company provided wholesale international
telecommunications services to 13 national and international telecommunications
carriers. International wholesale telecommunications services include
international transport and termination services for domestic carriers and
domestic transport and termination services for international carriers. During
May 1998, wholesale telecommunications services accounted for 22% of the
Company's revenue.
The Company strives to establish close working relationships with its
wholesale international customers. Once the Company interconnects with a carrier
customer, the carrier may utilize the Company on an as-needed basis, depending
upon the pricing offered by the Company and its competitors, as well as
capacity. The Company has been tested and approved as an authorized carrier for,
and included in the routing tables of, all of its long distance and
international carrier customers.
During the years ended December 31, 1997, 1996 and 1995, the Company had
one retail customer that accounted for approximately 10% of the Company's
revenue. In the first six months of 1998, the Company had one wholesale customer
that accounted for approximately 11% of the Company's revenue. The Company does
not expect that any one customer will account for more than 10% of its revenue
during the full year 1998.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
The Company maintains an emphasis on customer care to differentiate itself
from its competitors, especially larger providers, and to increase customer
retention. The Company provides 24-hours-per-day, 365-days-per-year customer
support primarily through its customer service department in Quincy,
Massachusetts. At the Company's customer support center, customers' calls are
answered by experienced customer care representatives, many of whom are
cross-trained in the provisioning process. Support staff are trained to work
with the Company's sales force and be proactive in the customer support process.
In addition to calls made by the Company's sales department, members of the
customer support staff proactively seek to contact national customers monthly
and major customers quarterly to help ensure a high level of satisfaction with
the Company. The Company's customer support team is organized to help ensure
that the most knowledgeable personnel handle support requests from the largest
customers.
The customer support staff utilizes a sophisticated management information
system to access all customer information including contact information,
customer rates, trouble ticket systems, accounts receivable and billing history.
In addition, the Company utilizes a provisioning system that maintains a
complete history of a customer's provisioning and allows real-time access to
information concerning each transaction with the LEC or underlying carrier. The
Company believes that its customer support and provisioning systems enhance the
Company's customer retention rate.
The Company monitors and measures the quality and timeliness of customer
interaction through quality assurance procedures. Pick-up times for incoming
calls, lengths of calls and other support information is automatically monitored
by the Company's automated call distribution system ("ACD"). The Company's ACD
also prioritizes incoming support requests, assuring that the Company's largest
customers receive support in the most expedient manner.
62
68
The Company's customer support department consists of five discrete areas:
National Accounts Management, Major Accounts Management, Small Business and
Residential Accounts Management, Repair Desk, and Save and Win-Back Team. The
Company's Customer Service Department is managed by the Director of Customer
Service, who has six years of sales and customer service experience with the
Company. Additional members of the Customer Service Management team include (i)
the National Accounts Manager, who has five years of sales and customer service
experience with the Company; (ii) the Major Accounts Manager, who has four years
of sales and customer service experience with the Company; (iii) the Small
Business and Residential Accounts Manager, who has two years of sales and
customer service experience with the Company; (iv) the Repair Desk team members,
each of whom has a minimum of two years of customer service experience with the
Company; and (v) the Save and Win-Back team members, each of whom has a minimum
of four years of sales and customer service experience with the Company.
Customer support agents are required to complete an intensive formal
in-house training program before interacting with customers and are required to
participate in a continuing mentor program. Customer support personnel are
expected to have a thorough knowledge of the Company's services and to emphasize
customer satisfaction. The compensation of support personnel is in part
dependent upon the retention rate of their respective accounts. The Company has
an established career path for its agents, who over time gain responsibility for
larger customers, as well as management responsibilities.
The Company's customer support department currently receives approximately
800 support calls per day. The Company estimates that the average incoming call
is answered by a support specialist in under 15 seconds, which the Company
believes compares favorably to many competitors. The Company also utilizes four
billing cycles per month, which helps ensure that customer service calls will be
staggered throughout each month. If the Company is successful in entering the
local service market, the Company believes that its level of customer service
will provide it with a competitive advantage over existing local service
providers. As of July 15, 1998, the Company employed 32 people in customer
support. The Company anticipates that it will continue to hire additional
customer support personnel as the size of its customer base increases. See "Risk
Factors -- Dependence on Billing, Customer Service and Information Systems".
NETWORK
The Company pursues a capital-efficient network deployment strategy that
involves owning switches while acquiring or leasing fiber optic transmission
facilities on an incremental basis to satisfy customer demand. The Company's
strategy has been to build a geographic concentration of revenue-producing
customers through the resale of telecommunications services before building,
acquiring or extending its own network to serve that concentration of customers.
As network economics justify the deployment of switching or transport capacity,
the Company expands its network and migrates customers to its network. The
Company believes that this strategy allows the Company to penetrate new markets
through its resale solution without incurring the risks associated with
speculative deployment of network elements and to focus its capital expenditures
in those geographic areas and markets where network expansion will result in
higher long-term operating margins.
CURRENT NETWORK
SWITCHES. Currently, the Company operates an advanced telecommunications
network that includes two Nortel switches. The switch located in Quincy,
Massachusetts is a DMS 250/300 digital switch that combines on a single platform
the DMS 250's interexchange switching capabilities and the DMS 300's
international gateway capabilities. The switch located in Orlando, Florida is a
Nortel DMS 250. The Company's switches are owned pursuant to capital lease
arrangements.
63
69
During May 1998, the Company carried approximately 24.9 million minutes, or
approximately 47% of its total minutes, on its own network. The Company
anticipates that this percentage will increase as it further expands its
facilities-based infrastructure. The Company believes that increasing the
traffic carried on its own network will increase long-term operating margins and
give the Company greater control over its network operations.
FIBER AND TRANSPORT. The Company recently entered into two 20-year
indefeasible right-of-use ("IRU") agreements with two separate carriers pursuant
to which it acquired 625 route miles of dark fiber (1,830 digital fiber miles).
When the fiber is fully deployed and activated, it will form a redundant fiber
ring connecting major markets throughout New England and the New York
metropolitan area, providing the Company with significant transmission capacity.
The first IRU agreement is for 293 fiber route miles containing four dark Lucent
TrueWave optical fibers. Markets connected by this segment include New York
City, White Plains, Stamford, New Haven, New London, Providence and Boston. The
second IRU agreement is for 332 fiber route miles containing two dark Lucent
TrueWave optical fibers. Markets connected by this segment include Boston,
Nashua, Springfield, Hartford, White Plains and New York City. The Company will
install and control all electronics and optronics, including wave division
multiplexing technologies.
Where the Company has not acquired fiber, it leases long-haul network
transport capacity from major facilities-based carriers and local access from
the ILECs in their respective territories. The Company also uses competitive
access provider ("CAP") or CLEC facilities where available and economically
justified. To ensure seamless off-net termination and origination, the Company
also utilizes interconnection agreements with major carriers. See "Risk
Factors -- Reliance on Leased Transport Facilities and IRUs".
INTERNATIONAL. The Company is interconnected with a number of U.S. and
foreign wholesale international carriers through the Quincy, Massachusetts DMS
250/300 switch. The purpose of connecting to a variety of carriers is to provide
state-of-the-art least-cost routing and network reliability. These
interconnected international carriers are also a source of wholesale
international traffic and revenue. To further support its international
interconnections the Company has entered into leases for international submarine
cable facilities in TAT-12/13 RIOJA in the Atlantic Ocean and TPC-5 in the
Pacific Ocean. In addition, in December 1997 the Company purchased indefeasible
rights of use capacity in the Americas I cable system. These arrangements
support existing and planned interconnections with telephone operating companies
in foreign countries.
OTHER FEATURES. The Company is also interconnected with two Signaling
Transfer Points in Waterbury, Connecticut and New Haven, Connecticut to provide
SS7 common-channel signaling throughout its network. The SS7 signaling system
reduces connect time delays, thereby enhancing overall network efficiencies.
Additionally, SS7 will permit the anticipated expansion of AIN capabilities
throughout the Company's network. The Company's uniform and advanced switching
platform will enable it to (i) deploy features and functions quickly throughout
its entire network, (ii) expand switch capacity in a cost-effective manner,
(iii) lower maintenance costs through reduced training and spare parts
requirements and (iv) achieve direct connectivity to cellular and personal
communication system applications in the future.
SECURITY AND RELIABILITY. The Company has a Network Operations Center in
Quincy, Massachusetts, which monitors the Company's entire network from a
central location, increasing the security, reliability and efficiency of the
Company's operations. Centralized electronic monitoring and control of the
Company's network allows the Company to avoid duplication of this function in
each region. This consolidated operations center also helps reduce the Company's
per-customer monitoring and customer service costs. In addition, the Company's
network employs an "authorized access" architecture. Unlike many
telecommunications companies, which allow universal access to their network, the
Company utilizes an automatic number identification ("ANI") security screening
architecture that ensures only the ANIs of those users who have subscribed to
the Company's services and have satisfied the Company's credit and provisioning
criteria are allowed access to the
64
70
network. The Company believes that this architecture provides the Company a
competitive advantage through its ability to better control bad debt and fraud
in a manner that is invisible and nonintrusive to the customer. Additionally,
this architecture allows the Company to better manage network capacity, as
unauthorized and unplanned users cannot access the network. See "Risk
Factors -- Dependence Upon Network Infrastructure; Risk of System Failure;
Security Risks".
ANTICIPATED NETWORK EXPANSION
As part of its growth strategy, the Company plans to undertake a
significant network expansion through the deployment of additional switching and
transport infrastructure to support its goal of continuing migration of its
customers' traffic to its own network. Expansion of the Company's
facilities-based infrastructure with international gateway, long distance and
local switches will increase the proportion of communications traffic that is
originated or terminated on its network, which the Company believes will result
in higher long-term operating margins and greater control over its network
operations. The Company structures its network expansion decisions in a manner
designed to (i) reduce up-front capital expenditures required to enter new
markets, (ii) avoid the risk of "stranded" investment in under-utilized fiber
networks and (iii) enter markets and generate revenue and positive cash flow
more rapidly than if the Company first constructed its own facilities. The
Company intends to further expand its network in geographic areas where customer
concentrations and traffic patterns make expansion economically justifiable. See
"Risk Factors -- Substantial Future Capital Requirements; Need for Additional
Financing; Substantial Leverage".
The Company also plans to expand its business by offering a full range of
local services in the geographic regions where the Company already has an
established customer base. The Company intends to offer local services by (i)
entering into interconnection agreements with ILECs; (ii) deploying its
facilities-based infrastructure in conjunction with ILEC unbundled network
elements ("UNE"); (iii) in those areas where the Company has not yet deployed
local facilities infrastructure, or in those areas where the Company has not yet
achieved significant market penetration, reselling the ILECs' local services
pursuant to state commission-mandated wholesale discounts; and (iv) entering
into agreements with various ILECs and IXCs for termination and origination of
traffic for the Company's on-net local customers. The Company believes this
network deployment strategy, along with its ability to leverage its existing
customer base and demonstrated sales and provisioning expertise, will help to
produce rapid penetration into local markets. Additionally, the Company believes
that the bundling of local service with its long distance or data services will
enhance customer retention and further enhance operating margins.
Four phases of the Company's network expansion are anticipated to take
place by the end of 1999. These phases are as follows:
IXC PLATFORM. The Company intends to deploy and have operational the
following switching platforms by mid-1999: (i) in Los Angeles, a DMS 250/300
digital switch, which combines on a single platform the DMS 250's interexchange
switching capabilities and the DMS 300's international gateway capabilities;
(ii) in Chicago, a DMS 250 interexchange switch; (iii) in New York City, a
Lucent 5ESS equipped with interexchange capabilities; and (iv) in Atlanta, a
Lucent 5ESS switch, which combines the interexchange switching platform with a
local switching platform. Based upon current traffic patterns and volumes the
Company believes that the deployment of this interexchange switching capacity
will enable the Company to increase the on-net traffic generated by its current
customer base.
LOCAL NORTHEAST PLATFORM. The Company intends to deploy local switching
infrastructure in the Northeastern United States as the necessary
interconnection agreements with Bell Atlantic and SNET are completed, which will
allow the Company to take advantage of its customer concentration in this
region. As of October 1, 1998, the Company had entered into interconnection
agreements with Bell Atlantic for Massachusetts, New Hampshire and Rhode Island.
While the Company is still evaluating various network configurations, it is the
Company's current intention to deploy a Lucent
65
71
5ESS switch in both Boston and New York, along with numerous circuit and fast
packet access nodes located in central offices and targeted buildings throughout
its Northeastern region.
LOCAL SOUTHEAST PLATFORM. The Company intends to deploy local switching
infrastructure in the Southeastern United States as the necessary
interconnection agreements with Bell South and GTE are completed, which will
allow the Company to take advantage of its customer concentration in this
region. While the Company is still evaluating various network configurations, it
is the Company's current intention by mid-1999 to install a Lucent 5ESS switch
in both Orlando and Atlanta, along with numerous circuit and fast packet access
nodes located in central offices and targeted buildings throughout its
Southeastern region.
SERVICE BUILDER. Concurrently with the build-out of its IXC and local
network infrastructure, it is the Company's intention to deploy Service Builder,
Nortel's next generation AIN platform as an extension of the SS7 technology
embedded in the Company's network protocol. Specific value-added features
currently supported by Service Builder include: (i) "500 number" technology;
(ii) "follow me" services; (iii) local number portability (mandated by the
Telecommunications Act); (iv) mass customization of number translation services;
and (v) deployment of virtual private networks. The Company expects to begin
offering some of these services by the first quarter of 1999.
INTERNATIONAL PLATFORM
The Company's switch in Quincy, Massachusetts has international gateway
capabilities. To increase its opportunities in the Pacific Rim, the Company also
plans to deploy a Nortel international gateway switch in its Los Angeles
switching facility by year end 1998.
SPRINT AGREEMENT
In those geographic areas in which the Company has not deployed network
elements, it contracts for and resells long distance domestic and International
services from Sprint. See "Risk Factors -- Dependence Upon Suppliers and Other
Service Providers".
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS, PROVISIONING, BILLING AND COLLECTIONS
OVERVIEW
The Company is committed to the continued development and successful
implementation of an integrated provisioning, billing, collection and customer
service system that provides accurate and timely information to both the Company
and its customers. The Company's billing system is designed to provide access to
a broad range of information on individual customers, including their call
volume, patterns of usage and billing history. This same information is used by
the Company to identify customer trends and to proactively support the Company's
sales and marketing efforts.
In connection with its anticipated growth, the Company has incurred and
expects to incur significant costs to upgrade its information technology
systems. The new system being developed by the Company is built on an open
scalable client/server Oracle platform and is expected to better integrate the
Company's operations, both geographically and among departments. There can be no
assurance that the Company will realize the intended benefits from this new
system or that the Company will not incur significant unanticipated costs in
deploying this system. See "Risk Factors -- Dependence on Billing, Customer
Service and Information Systems".
PROVISIONING
The Company believes that a significant ongoing challenge for ICPs will be
to continuously improve provisioning systems, which includes the complex process
of transitioning customers to their proprietary networks. Accordingly, the
Company will continue to identify and focus on implementing the best
provisioning practices in each of its markets to provide for rapid, seamless
66
72
transition of customers from the ILEC to the Company. To support the
provisioning of its services, the information platform being developed by the
Company is designed to deliver information and automated ordering and
provisioning capability directly to the end user as well as to the Company's
internal staff. The Company believes that these practices and its comprehensive
information technology platform, as developed, will provide the Company with a
long-term competitive advantage and allow it to more rapidly implement switched
local services in its markets and to shorten the time between the receipt of a
customer order and the generation of revenue.
The Company's Provisioning Department consists of four discrete areas:
General Provisioning, Dedicated Access Services, Toll-Free Services and Reseller
and Agent Provisioning and Support. The Director of Provisioning has over six
years of telecommunications provisioning experience with the Company. Additional
members of the Provisioning Department management team include (i) the Dedicated
Access Services Manager with over seven years of telecommunications provisioning
experience with the Company; (ii) the Toll-Free Services Manager with four years
of telecommunications provisioning experience with the Company; and (iii) two
Assistant Managers of Provisioning, each with over four years of
telecommunications provisioning experience with the Company.
BILLING
The Company maintains within its internal OSS all customer information,
operational data, accounts receivable information, rating rules and tables, and
tax tables necessary for billing its customers. The Company collects and
processes on a daily basis all usage information from its own network and from
the networks of third-party providers. The actual process of applying rating and
taxing information to the millions of individual message units generated each
month, and of generating invoice print files, is out-sourced to a third party
utilizing both a redundant high-speed IBM MVS mainframe and the proven PL/1
language. Printing of invoices is outsourced to a high-speed print shop, and the
mailing of all invoices is currently handled directly by the Company. To
optimize both cash flow and internal work flow metrics, the Company currently
utilizes four billing cycles per month. Additional billing cycles will be added
as dictated by customer growth. To ensure the quality of the billing process,
the Company utilizes strict quality control checks including boundary and
statistical variation testing, sample pricing matrices and direct sampling.
EMPLOYEES
The Company's departments have a proven structure including a "growth from
within" philosophy providing opportunities first, to the extent possible, to
existing employees. The Company believes that this philosophy has increased
employee retention and resulted in the Company's operations being managed by
individuals with significant telecommunications experience with the Company. In
addition, the Company believes that the long tenure, extensive experience and
proven teamwork of its Sales, Customer Service, Provisioning, Billing and
Collections management teams is a competitive advantage when compared to
emerging ICPs lacking the extensive cooperative management experience enjoyed by
the Company.
As of July 15, 1998, the Company employed 276 people, consisting of 152 in
sales and marketing, 32 in customer service, 22 in provisioning, 18 in
production/billing, 13 in finance, 10 in networks, eight in information
technology/MIS, nine in collections and 12 in other departments. The Company has
also recently hired a Director of Human Resources to help manage the Company's
growing employee base. In connection with its growth strategy, the Company
currently anticipates hiring a significant number of additional personnel in
sales and other areas of the Company's operations by year end 1999. As a result
of the intense competition for qualified information technology personnel, the
Company also uses third-party information technology consultants. The Company's
employees are not unionized, and the Company believes its relations with its
employees are good. The Company's success will continue to depend in part on its
ability to attract and retain
67
73
highly qualified employees. See "Risk Factors -- Management of Rapid Growth" and
"-- Dependence on Key Personnel".
PROPERTIES
The Company's corporate headquarters are located in a 39,500-square foot
facility in Quincy, Massachusetts. The Quincy facility also serves as a sales
office and includes the Company's customer service operations, certain network
facilities and its Network Operations Center. The Quincy facility is leased from
an affiliate of the Company. See "Certain Transactions". The Company currently
leases 10 additional facilities for current or planned sales offices. The
Company also leases real estate to house its telemarketing center in Largo,
Florida and switching facilities in Los Angeles, Chicago and Orlando. The
aggregate amount paid by the Company under its leases in 1997 was approximately
$733,000. Although the Company's facilities are adequate at this time, the
Company believes that it will be required to lease additional facilities,
including additional sales offices and switching facilities, as a result of its
anticipated growth.
LEGAL MATTERS
From time to time the Company is party to routine litigation and
proceedings in the ordinary course of its business. The Company is not aware of
any current or pending litigation to which the Company is or may be a party that
the Company believes could have a material adverse effect on the Company's
results of operations or financial condition.
INDUSTRY OVERVIEW
HISTORY AND INDUSTRY DEVELOPMENT
Prior to 1984, AT&T dominated both the local exchange and long distance
marketplaces by owning the operating entities that provided both local exchange
and long distance services to most of the U.S. population. Although long
distance competition began to emerge in the late 1970s, the critical event
triggering the growth of long distance competition was the breakup of AT&T and
the separation of its local and long distance businesses as mandated by the
Modified Final Judgment relating to the breakup of AT&T (the "MFJ"). To foster
competition in the long distance market, the MFJ prohibited AT&T's divested
local exchange businesses, the RBOCs, from acting as single-source providers of
telecommunications services.
Although the MFJ established the preconditions for competition in the
market for long distance services in 1984, the market for local exchange
services has until recently been virtually closed to competition and has largely
been dominated by regulated monopolies. Efforts to open the local exchange
market began in the late 1980s on a state-by-state basis when CLECs began
offering dedicated private line transmission and access services. These types of
services together currently account for approximately 12% of total local
exchange revenue. CLECs were restricted, often by state laws, from providing
other, more frequently used services such as basic and switched services, which
today account for approximately 88% of local exchange revenue.
The Telecommunications Act, which was enacted in February 1996, is
considered to be the most comprehensive reform of the nation's
telecommunications laws and affects the development of competition for local
telecommunications services. Specifically, certain provisions of the
Telecommunications Act provide for (i) the removal of legal barriers to entry to
the local telecommunications services market; (ii) the interconnection of ILEC
networks with competitors' networks; (iii) the establishment of procedures and
requirements to be followed by the RBOCs, including the requirement that RBOCs
offer local services for resale as a precondition to entering into the long
distance and telecommunications equipment manufacturing markets; and (iv) the
relaxation of the regulation of certain telecommunications services provided by
LECs and others. The Company believes the Telecommunications Act will promote
significant growth in the local telecommunications market as new market entrants
provide expanded service offerings.
68
74
The Telecommunications Act further increases the opportunities available to
CLECs by requiring the RBOCs and other ILECs to offer various network elements
such as switching, transport and loops (i.e., the facilities connecting a
customer's premises to a LEC central office) on an unbundled and
non-discriminatory basis. RBOCs also are required to offer their retail services
at wholesale rates for resale by other companies. By offering such services,
RBOCs also meet certain of the requirements contained in the Telecommunications
Act in order to gain FCC approval to provide in-region long distance services.
Although certain provisions of the Telecommunications Act restricting the RBOCs'
ability to provide in-region long distance services have been held
unconstitutional by a Federal district court, the Company believes that
significant parts of such decision may be reversed and vacated on appeal, but no
assurance can be made as to the outcome.
The continuing deregulation of the telecommunications industry and
technological change have resulted in an increasingly information-intensive
business environment. Regulatory, technological, marketing and competitive
trends have expanded substantially the Company's opportunities in the converging
voice and data communications services markets. For example, technological
advances, including rapid growth of the Internet, the increased use of packet
switching technology for voice communications and the growth of multimedia
applications, are expected to result in substantial growth in the high-speed
data services market.
This new market opportunity will permit competitive providers who can
manage the operational and marketing implementation to offer a full range of
telecommunications services, including local and long distance calling,
toll-free calling, custom calling features, data services, Internet access and
cellular services. The Company believes that customers will prefer a single
source for all of their voice and data telecommunications requirements,
including products, billing and service. Telecommunications companies with an
established base of long distance customers will have the opportunity to sell
additional services to such customers. The Company believes that a one-stop
provider of integrated communications services will have the opportunity to
penetrate its existing markets, expand its customer base, capture a larger
portion of its customers' total expenditures on communication services and
reduce customer turnover. Furthermore, companies that develop their own networks
will have the opportunity to migrate customers from off-net to on-net, thereby
increasing long-term operating margins and giving such companies greater control
over their network operations. See "Risk Factors -- Competition", "-- The
Telecommunications Act and Other Regulation" and "-- Impact of Technological
Change".
The Company also believes that small and medium-sized businesses have
historically been underserved with respect to customer service and support.
Because, the Company believes, RBOCs and the largest national carriers primarily
concentrate their sales and marketing efforts on residential and large business
customers, there is a significant market opportunity with respect to small and
medium-sized businesses. Geographically, the Company believes that the
Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States are attractive
markets due to a number of factors, including (i) the population density in the
Northeast; (ii) a large number of rapidly growing metropolitan clusters in the
Southeast, such as Atlanta, Miami/Fort Lauderdale and Orlando; and (iii) the
relatively small number of significant competitors to the ILECs.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES MARKET
Overview of U.S. Market. The U.S. market for telecommunications services
can be divided into three basic sectors: long distance services, local exchange
services and Internet access services. In 1997, it is estimated that, in the
United States, long distance services generated revenue of $104.6 billion, local
exchange services accounted for revenue of $92.4 billion, and Internet services
revenue totaled $6.3 billion. Revenue for both local exchange and long distance
services include amounts charged by long distance carriers and subsequently paid
to ILECs (or, where applicable, CLECs) for long distance access.
69
75
Long Distance Services. A long distance telephone call can be envisioned
as consisting of three segments. Starting with the originating customer, the
call travels along a local exchange network to a long distance carrier's point
of presence ("POP"). At the POP, the call is combined with other calls and sent
along a long distance network to a POP on the long distance carrier's network
near where the call will terminate. The call is then sent from this POP along a
local network to the terminating customer. Long distance carriers provide only
the connection between the two local networks, and, unless the long distance
carrier is a local service provider, pay access charges to LECs for originating
and terminating calls.
The following diagram is a simplified illustration of a typical long
distance network call carried by the Company:
[DIAGRAM 1]
Local Exchange Services. A local call is one that does not require the
services of a long distance carrier. In general, the local exchange carrier
connects end user customers within a LATA and also provides the local portion of
most long distance calls.
The following diagram is a simplified illustration of a typical local
network call:
[DIAGRAM 2]
Internet Service. Internet services are generally provided in at least two
distinct segments. A local network connection is required from the ISP customer
to the ISP's local facilities. For large, communication-intensive users and for
content providers, the connections are typically unswitched, dedicated
connections provided by ILECs, CLECs or ICPs, either as independent service
providers or, in some cases, by a company that is both a CLEC and an ISP. For
residential and small and medium-sized business users, these connections are
generally public switched telephone network ("PSTN") connections obtained on a
dial-up access basis as a local exchange telephone call. Once a local connection
is made to the ISP's local facilities, information can be transmitted and
obtained over a packet-switched IP data network, which may consist of segments
provided by many interconnected networks operated by a number of ISPs. The
collection of interconnected networks
70
76
makes up the Internet. A key feature of Internet architecture and
packet-switching is that a single dedicated channel between communication points
is never established, which distinguishes Internet-based services from the PSTN.
COMPETITION
OVERVIEW
The Company operates in a highly competitive industry and believes that it
does not have significant market share in any market in which it operates. The
Company expects that competition will continue to intensify in the future due to
regulatory changes, including the continued implementation of the
Telecommunications Act, and the increase in the size, resources and number of
market participants. In each of its markets, the Company will face competition
for local service from larger, better capitalized ILECs and CLECs. Additionally,
the long distance market is already significantly more competitive than the
local exchange market because the ILECs, prior to enactment of the
Telecommunications Act, generally had a monopoly position within the local
exchange market. While new business opportunities will be made available to the
Company through the Telecommunications Act and other federal and state
regulatory initiatives, regulators are likely to provide the ILECs with an
increased degree of flexibility with regard to pricing of their services as
competition increases.
Competition for the Company's products and services is based on price,
quality, reputation, name recognition, network reliability, service features,
billing services, perceived quality and responsiveness to customers' needs.
While the Company believes that it currently has certain advantages relating to
price, quality, customer service, and responsiveness to customer needs, there is
no assurance that the Company will be able to maintain these advantages or
obtain additional advantages. A continuing trend toward business combinations
and alliances in the telecommunications industry may create significant new
competitors to the Company. Many of the Company's existing and potential
competitors have financial, technical and other resources significantly greater
than those of the Company. In addition, in December 1997 the FCC issued rules to
implement the provisions of the World Trade Organization Agreement on Basic
Telecommunications, which was drafted to liberalize restrictions on foreign
ownership of domestic telecommunications companies and to allow foreign
telecommunications companies to enter domestic markets. The new FCC rules went
into effect in February 1998 and are expected to make it substantially easier
for many non-U.S. telecommunications companies to enter the U.S. market, thus
further increasing the number of competitors. The new rules will also give
non-U.S. individuals and corporations greater ability to invest in U.S.
telecommunications companies, thus increasing the financial and technical
resources potentially available to the Company and its existing and potential
competitors. See "Risk Factors -- Competition", "-- The Telecommunications Act
and Other Regulation" and "Government Regulation".
LONG DISTANCE MARKET
The long distance telecommunications industry is highly competitive and
affected by the introduction of new services by, and the market activities of,
major industry participants. The Company competes against various national and
regional long distance carriers, including both facilities-based providers and
switchless resellers offering essentially the same services as the Company. In
addition, significant competition is expected to be provided by ILECs including,
when authorized, RBOCs. The Company's success will depend upon its ability to
provide high-quality services at prices generally competitive with, or lower
than, those charged by its competitors. In addition, the long distance industry
is characterized by a high level of customer attrition or "churn". Such
attrition is attributable to a variety of factors, including initiatives of
competitors as they engage in advertising campaigns, marketing programs and cash
payments and other incentives. End users are often not obligated to purchase any
minimum usage amount and can discontinue service without penalty at any time.
While the Company believes its customer turnover rate is lower than that of
71
77
many of its competitors, the Company's revenue has been, and is expected to
continue to be, affected by churn.
AT&T, MCI, Sprint and other carriers have implemented new price plans aimed
at residential customers with significantly simplified rate structures, which
may have the impact of lowering overall long distance prices. There can also be
no assurance that long distance carriers will not make similar offerings
available to the small to medium-sized businesses that the Company primarily
serves. While the Company believes small and medium-sized business customers are
not aggressively targeted by large long distance providers such as AT&T, MCI and
Sprint, there can be no assurance the Company's customers and potential
customers will not be targeted by these or other providers in the future.
Additional pricing pressure may come from IP transport, which is a developing
use of packet-switched technology that can transmit voice communications at a
cost that may be below that of traditional circuit-switched long distance
service. While IP transport is not yet available in all areas, requires the
dialing of additional digits, and generally produces sound quality inferior to
traditional long distance service, it could eventually be perceived as a
substitute for traditional long distance service and put pricing pressure on
long distance rates. Any reduction in long distance prices may have a material
adverse effect on the Company's results of operations.
One of the Company's principal competitors, Sprint, is also a major
supplier of services to the Company. The Company both links its switching
equipment with transmission facilities and services purchased or leased from
Sprint, and resells services obtained from Sprint. See "Business --
Network -- Sprint Agreement". There can be no assurance that Sprint will
continue to offer services to the Company at competitive rates or on attractive
terms, if at all, and any failure to do so could have a material adverse effect
on the Company. See "Risk Factors -- Dependence Upon Suppliers and Other Service
Providers".
LOCAL EXCHANGE MARKET
Under the Telecommunications Act and related federal and state regulatory
initiatives, barriers to local exchange competition are being removed. In local
telecommunication markets, the Company's primary competitor will be the ILEC
serving each geographic area. ILECs are established providers of dedicated and
local telephone services to all or virtually all telephone subscribers within
their respective service areas. ILECs also have long-standing relationships with
regulatory authorities at the federal and state levels. While recent FCC
administrative decisions and initiatives provide increased business
opportunities to voice, data and Internet-service providers, they also provide
the ILECs with increased pricing flexibility for their private line, special
access and switched access services. In addition, with respect to competitive
access services, the FCC recently proposed a rule that would provide for
increased ILEC pricing flexibility and deregulation for such access services
either automatically or after certain competitive levels are reached. If the
ILECs are allowed additional flexibility by regulators to offer discounts to
large customers through contract tariffs, decide to engage in aggressive volume
and term discount pricing practices for their customers, or seek to charge
competitors excessive fees for interconnection to their networks, the revenue of
competitors to the ILECs could be materially adversely affected. If future
regulatory decisions afford the ILECs increased access services, pricing
flexibility or other regulatory relief, such decisions could also have a
material adverse effect on competitors to the ILECs.
The Company also will face competition or prospective competition in local
markets from other carriers, many of which have significantly greater financial
resources than the Company. For example, AT&T, MCI and Sprint have each begun to
offer local telecommunications services in major U.S. markets using their own
facilities or by resale of the ILECs' or other providers' services. In addition
to these long distance service providers, entities that currently offer or are
potentially capable of offering local switched services include companies that
have previously operated as competitive access providers, cable television
companies, electric utilities, microwave carriers, wireless telephone system
operators and large customers who build private networks. These entities, upon
entering into appropriate interconnection agreements or resale agreements with
72
78
ILECs, including RBOCs, could offer single-source local and long distance
services, similar to those offered or proposed to be offered by the Company.
In addition, a continuing trend towards business combinations and alliances
in the telecommunications industry may create significant new competitors to the
Company. The proposed acquisition of GTE Corp. by Bell Atlantic Corp., the
proposed merger of SBC and Ameritech, the merger of WorldCom and MCI, AT&T's
proposed acquisition of Telecommunications Inc. and its acquisition of Teleport
Communications Group, Inc., Teleglobe Inc.'s proposed acquisition of Excel
Communications, and SBC's proposed acquisition of SNET are examples of some of
the alliances that are being formed. Many of these combined entities will have
resources far greater than those of the Company. These combined entities may
provide a bundled package of telecommunications products, including local and
long distance telephony, that is in direct competition with the products offered
or proposed to be offered by the Company, and may be capable of offering these
products sooner and at more competitive rates than the Company.
WIRELESS MARKET
The Company will also face competition from fixed wireless services,
including MMDS, LMDS, 24 GHz and 38 GHz wireless communications systems, FCC
Part 15 unlicensed wireless radio devices, and other services that use existing
point-to-point wireless channels on other frequencies. In addition, the FCC has
allocated a number of spectrum blocks for use by wireless devices that do not
require site or network licensing. A number of vendors have developed such
devices that may provide competition to the Company, in particular for certain
low data-rate transmission services.
With respect to mobile wireless telephone system operators, the FCC has
authorized cellular, PCS, and other CMRS providers to offer wireless services to
fixed locations, rather than just to mobile customers, in whatever capacity such
CMRS providers choose. Previously, cellular providers could provide service to
fixed locations only on an ancillary or incidental basis. The authority to
provide fixed as well as mobile services will enable CMRS providers to offer
wireless local loop service and other services to fixed locations (e.g., office
and apartment buildings) in direct competition with the Company and existing
providers of traditional wireless telephone service.
OTHER
Section 271 of the Telecommunications Act prohibits an RBOC from providing
long distance service that originates (or in certain cases terminates) in one of
its in-region states, with several limited exceptions, until the RBOC has
satisfied certain statutory conditions in that state and has received the
approval of the FCC. The FCC has denied the following applications for such
approval: SBC's Texas application in June 1998; SBC's Oklahoma application in
June 1997; Ameritech's Michigan application in August 1997; and BellSouth
Corporation's applications for South Carolina in December 1997 and Louisiana in
February 1998 and October 1998. The Company anticipates that a number of RBOCs
will file additional applications for in-region long distance authority in 1998.
Bell Atlantic recently received conditional approval from the New York Public
Service Commission of its Section 271 application for New York State. Thus, it
is expected that Bell Atlantic will file its Section 271 application with the
FCC in the near future. The FCC has 90 days from the date an application for
in-region long distance authority is filed to decide whether to grant or deny
the application.
Once the RBOCs are allowed to offer widespread in-region long distance
services, both they and the largest IXCs will be in a position to offer
single-source local and long distance service. On December 31, 1997, a United
States District Court judge in Texas held unconstitutional certain sections of
the Telecommunications Act, including Section 271. Section 271 includes a
"competitive checklist" that RBOCs must satisfy prior to obtaining authority to
provide in-region, interLATA long-distance service. This decision would permit
the three RBOCs involved in the suit immediately to begin offering widespread
in-region long distance services. The decision, however, was stayed on
73
79
February 11, 1998 by the District Court pending the outcome of an appeal on the
merits to the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit. On September 4, 1998,
the Fifth Circuit reversed the District Court's ruling. Among other things, the
Fifth Circuit found ss.271-275 of the Telecommunications Act to be non-punitive
in character and, therefore, not a bill of attainder as that term has been
defined by the Superior Court.
In addition, new FCC rules went into effect in February 1998 that will make
it substantially easier for many non-U.S. telecommunications companies to enter
the U.S. market, thus potentially further increasing the number of competitors.
The market for data communications and Internet access services is also
extremely competitive. There are no substantial barriers to entry, and the
Company expects that competition will intensify in the future. The Company's
success selling these services will depend heavily upon its ability to provide
high quality Internet connections at competitive prices. See "Risk Factors --
Competition".
74
80
GOVERNMENT REGULATION
The following summary of regulatory developments and legislation does not
purport to describe all present and proposed federal, state and local
regulations and legislation affecting the telecommunications industry. Other
existing federal, state and local legislation and regulations are currently the
subject of judicial proceedings, legislative hearings, and administrative
proposals that could change, in varying degrees, the manner in which the
telecommunications industry operates. Neither the outcome of these proceedings,
nor their impact upon the telecommunications industry or the Company, can be
predicted at this time. This section also summarizes regulatory and tariff
issues pertaining to the operation of the Company.
OVERVIEW
The Company's services are subject to regulation by federal, state and
local government agencies. The FCC exercises jurisdiction over all facilities
and services of telecommunications common carriers to the extent those
facilities are used to provide, originate or terminate domestic (interstate) or
international communications. State regulatory commissions retain jurisdiction
over carriers' facilities and services to the extent they are used to originate
or terminate intrastate communications. Municipalities and other local
government agencies may require carriers to obtain licenses or franchises
regulating use of public rights-of-way necessary to install and operate their
networks. The networks are also subject to numerous local regulations such as
building codes, franchises, and rights of way licensing requirements. Many of
the regulations issued by these regulatory bodies may change, the results of
which the Company is unable to predict. See "Risk Factors -- The
Telecommunications Act and Other Regulation".
THE FEDERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACT OF 1996
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS. On February 1, 1996, the U.S. Congress enacted
comprehensive telecommunications legislation, which the President signed into
law on February 8, 1996. The Company believes that this legislation is likely to
enhance competition in the local telecommunications marketplace because it (i)
gives the FCC authority to preempt state and local entry barriers, (ii) requires
ILECs to provide interconnection to their facilities, (iii) facilitates
end-users' choice to switch service providers from ILECs to CLECs and (iv)
proscribes the imposition of discriminatory or anticompetitive requirements by
state or local governments for use of public rights of way.
The Telecommunications Act requires all LECs (including ILECs and CLECs)
(i) not to prohibit or unduly restrict resale of their services; (ii) to provide
local number portability; (iii) to provide dialing parity and nondiscriminatory
access to telephone numbers, operator services, directory assistance and
directory listings; (iv) to afford access to poles, ducts, conduits and
rights-of-way; and (v) to establish reciprocal compensation arrangements for the
transport and termination of local telecommunications traffic. It also requires
ILECs to negotiate local interconnection agreements in good faith and to provide
interconnection (a) for the transmission and routing of telephone exchange
service and exchange access, (b) at any technically feasible point within the
ILEC's network, (c) that is at least equal in quality to that provided by the
ILEC to itself, its affiliates or any other party to which the ILEC provides
interconnection, and (d) at rates, terms and conditions that are just,
reasonable and nondiscriminatory. ILECs also are required under the
Telecommunications Act to provide nondiscriminatory access to network elements
on an unbundled basis at any technically feasible point, to offer their local
retail telephone services for resale at wholesale rates, and to facilitate
collocation of equipment necessary for competitors to interconnect with or
access unbundled network elements ("UNEs").
In addition, the Telecommunications Act requires RBOCs to comply with
certain safeguards and offer interconnection that satisfies a prescribed
14-point competitive checklist before the RBOCs are permitted to provide
in-region interLATA (i.e., interexchange long distance) services. These
safeguards are designed to ensure that the RBOCs' competitors have access to
local exchange and
75
81
exchange access services on nondiscriminatory terms and that subscribers of
regulated non-competitive RBOC services do not subsidize their provision of
competitive services. The safeguards also are intended to promote competition by
preventing RBOCs from using their market power in local exchange services to
obtain an anti-competitive advantage in the provision of other services.
Three RBOCs, Ameritech Corp., SBC Communications Inc. (formerly
Southwestern Bell Corp.) and BellSouth Corp., have filed applications with the
FCC for authority to provide in-region interLATA service in selected states. The
FCC has denied all such RBOC applications for in-region long distance authority
filed to date. The denials of certain of these RBOC applications by the FCC are
the subjects of judicial appeals and petitions for rehearing at the FCC. Other
RBOCs have begun the process of applying to provide in-region interLATA service
by filing with state commissions notice of their intent to file at the FCC.
In addition, several RBOCs have challenged the constitutionality of certain
provisions of the Telecommunications Act that bar the RBOCs from providing
in-region interexchange and other services by filing a lawsuit in the U.S.
District Court for the Northern District of Texas (captioned SBC Communications,
Inc. v. FCC, Civil Action No. 7:97-CV-163-X (Kendall, J.)). Judge Kendall issued
an order in that case that invalidated Sections 271-273 of the
Telecommunications Act as they pertain to SBC, US West and Bell Atlantic, after
finding that these provisions violated the constitutional prohibition against
"bills of attainder". Judge Kendall's decision was appealed to the U.S. Court of
Appeals for the Fifth Circuit; on September 4, 1998, the Fifth Circuit reversed
the District Court's ruling.
The Telecommunications Act also granted important regulatory relief to
industry segments that compete with CLECs. ILECs were given substantial new
pricing flexibility. RBOCs have the ability to provide out-of-region
long-distance services and, if they obtain authorization and under prescribed
circumstances, may provide additional in-region long-distance services. RBOCs
also were granted new rights to provide certain cable TV services. IXCs were
permitted to construct their own local facilities and/or resell local services.
State laws no longer may require cable television service providers ("CATVs") to
obtain a franchise before offering telecommunications services nor permit CATVs'
franchise fees to be based on their telecommunications revenue. In addition,
under the Telecommunications Act all utility holding companies are permitted to
diversify into telecommunications services through separate subsidiaries. See
"Risk Factors -- Competition".
FCC RULES IMPLEMENTING THE LOCAL COMPETITION PROVISIONS OF THE
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACT. On August 8, 1996, the FCC released a First Report and
Order, a Second Report and Order and a Memorandum Opinion and Order in its CC
Docket 96-98 (combined, the "Interconnection Orders") that established a
framework of minimum, national rules enabling state Public Service Commissions
("PSCs") and the FCC to begin implementing many of the local competition
provisions of the Telecommunications Act. In its Interconnection Orders, the FCC
prescribed certain minimum points of interconnection necessary to permit
competing carriers to choose the most efficient points at which to interconnect
with the ILECs' networks. The FCC also adopted a minimum list of unbundled
network elements that ILECs must make available to competitors upon request and
a methodology for states to use in establishing rates for interconnection and
the purchase of unbundled network elements. The FCC also adopted a methodology
for states to use when applying the Telecommunications Act's "avoided cost
standard" for setting wholesale prices with respect to retail services.
The following summarizes the key issues addressed in the Interconnection
Orders:
- INTERCONNECTION. ILECs are required to provide interconnection for
telephone exchange or exchange access service, or both, to any requesting
telecommunications carrier at any technically feasible point. The
interconnection must be at least equal in quality to that provided by the
ILEC to itself or its affiliates and must be provided on rates, terms and
conditions that are just, reasonable and nondiscriminatory.
76
82
- ACCESS TO UNBUNDLED ELEMENTS. ILECs are required to provide requesting
telecommunications carriers with nondiscriminatory access to network
elements on an unbundled basis at any technically feasible point on
rates, terms, and conditions that are just, reasonable and
nondiscriminatory. At a minimum, ILECs must unbundle and provide access
to network interface devices, local loops, local and tandem switches
(including all software features provided by such switches), interoffice
transmission facilities, signaling and call-related database facilities,
operations support systems, and information and operator and directory
assistance facilities. Further, ILECs may not impose restrictions,
limitations or requirements upon the use of any unbundled network
elements by other carriers.
- METHODS OF OBTAINING INTERCONNECTION AND ACCESS TO UNBUNDLED
ELEMENTS. ILECs are required to provide physical collocation of
equipment necessary for interconnection or access to unbundled network
elements at the ILEC's premises, except that the ILEC may provide virtual
collocation if it demonstrates to the PSC that physical collocation is
not practical for technical reasons or because of space limitations.
- TRANSPORT AND TERMINATION CHARGES. The FCC rules require that LEC
charges for transport and termination of local traffic delivered to them
by competing LECs must be cost-based and should be based on the LECs'
Total Element Long-Run Incremental Cost ("TELRIC") of providing that
service. However, as discussed below, the FCC's pricing and costing rules
have been vacated by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Eighth Circuit.
- PRICING METHODOLOGIES. New entrants were required to pay for
interconnection and unbundled elements at rates based on the ILEC's
TELRIC of providing a particular network element plus a reasonable share
of forward-looking joint and common costs, and may include a reasonable
profit. However, as discussed below, these rules have been vacated by the
Eighth Circuit.
- RESALE. ILECs were required to offer for resale any telecommunications
service that they provide at retail to subscribers who are not
telecommunications carriers. PSCs were required to identify which
marketing, billing, collection and other costs will be avoided or that
are avoidable by ILECs when they provide services on a wholesale basis
and to calculate the portion of the retail rates for those services that
is attributable to the avoided and avoidable costs. However, as discussed
below, the specific federal pricing requirements have been vacated by the
Eighth Circuit.
- ACCESS TO RIGHTS-OF-WAY. The FCC established procedures and guidelines
designed to facilitate the negotiation and mutual provision of
nondiscriminatory access by telecommunications carriers and utilities to
their poles, ducts, conduits, and rights-of-way.
- UNIVERSAL SERVICE REFORM. All telecommunications carriers, including the
Company, are required to contribute funding for universal service
support, on an equitable and nondiscriminatory basis, in an amount
sufficient to preserve and advance universal service pursuant to a
specific or predictable universal service funding mechanism. On May 8,
1997, the FCC released an order implementing these requirements by
reforming its existing access charge and universal service rules. See
"-- Universal Service Reform" below.
Most provisions of the Interconnection Orders were appealed. Numerous
appeals were consolidated for consideration by the Eighth Circuit Court of
Appeals (captioned Iowa Utilities Board v. FCC). On July 18, 1997, the Court of
Appeals released its decision regarding issues raised in the consolidated
appeals. The Interconnection Orders were upheld in part and reversed in part. A
non-exclusive list of decisions rendered include:
- The FCC exceeded its jurisdiction in establishing rules governing the
prices that ILECs may charge competitors for interconnection, unbundled
access and resale. The Court ruled that the authority to establish prices
for local communications facilities and services is reserved to
77
83
the states and, thus, vacated the FCC's pricing rules (except as they apply to
CMRS providers).
- The FCC's "pick and choose" rule, which allows competitors to select
individual terms of previously approved interconnection agreements for
their own use, conflicts with the purposes of the Telecommunications Act,
and also was vacated.
- The FCC lacks authority to hear formal complaints that involve the review
and/or enforcement of certain terms of local interconnection agreements
approved by state commissions.
- The FCC lacks authority to require interconnection agreements that were
negotiated before the enactment of the Telecommunications Act to be
submitted for state commission approval.
- The FCC may not adopt a blanket requirement that state interconnection
rules must be consistent with the FCC's regulations.
- The FCC correctly concluded that ILEC operations support systems,
operator services and vertical switching features qualify as network
elements that are subject to the unbundling requirements of the
Telecommunications Act.
- The FCC's definition of "technically feasible" was upheld for purposes of
deciding where ILECs must permit interconnection by competitors, but the
FCC's use of this term to determine the elements that must be unbundled
was rejected.
- The FCC erred in deciding that ILECs could be required by competitors to
provide interconnection and unbundled network elements at levels of
quality that exceed those levels at which ILECs provide such services to
themselves.
- The FCC cannot require ILECs to recombine network elements for
competitors, but competitors may recombine such network elements
themselves as necessary to provide telecommunications services.
- Claims that the unbundling rules constitute an unconstitutional taking
were not decided because they were either raised by parties that lacked
standing or were not ripe for review.
- The FCC rules and policies regarding the ILECs' duty to provide for
physical collocation of equipment were upheld.
- The FCC rules requiring ILECs to allow the resale of promotional prices
lasting more than 90 days were upheld.
The Interconnection Orders, and resulting local interconnection rules, were
vacated in part consistent with these decisions. The U.S. Supreme Court granted
certiorari to review most aspects of the Eighth Circuit decision regarding the
Interconnection Orders, and heard oral agreements in October 1998. The Company
cannot predict the outcome of this litigation or the requests for
reconsideration that remain pending at the FCC. Notably, the FCC recently made
the use of forward looking, economic costs for the pricing of local
interconnection, transport and termination and unbundled network elements a
temporary condition of its approval of the merger of Bell Atlantic and NYNEX.
However, after the FCC indicated in its denial of Ameritech's application for
in-region long distance authority that an RBOC's use of such forward looking,
economic costs is relevant to the issue of whether it has satisfied the
conditions necessary for approval of such an application, the Eighth Circuit
issued a mandamus order instructing the FCC not to enforce such a requirement.
SECTION 706 FORBEARANCE. Section 706 of the Telecommunications Act gives
the FCC the right to forebear from regulating a market if the FCC concludes that
such forbearance is necessary to encourage the rapid deployment of advanced
telecommunications capability. Section 706 has not been used to date, but in
January 1998 Bell Atlantic filed a petition under Section 706 seeking to have
the FCC deregulate entirely the provision of packet-switched telecommunications
services.
78
84
Similar petitions were later filed by the Alliance for Public Technology and US
West Inc. (currently Media One Group Inc.), and other ILECs are expected to file
similar petitions in the near future.
On August 7, 1998, the FCC released an Order denying requests by the
Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) that it use Section 706 of the
Telecommunications Act to forbear from regulating advanced telecommunications
services. Instead, the FCC determined that advanced services are
telecommunications services and that ILECs providing advanced services are still
subject to the unbundling and resale obligations of Section 251(c) and the
in-region interLATA restrictions of Section 271.
On the same day, the FCC released a Notice of Proposed Rulemaking ("NPRM")
proposing that ILECs be permitted to offer advanced services through separate
affiliates. Subject to certain restrictions on transfers from the ILEC to the
affiliate, structural separation rules and nondiscrimination safeguards, these
separate affiliates would not be subject to the obligations imposed on ILECs
under Section 251(c), but would remain subject to the in-region interLATA
restrictions imposed on RBOCs and RBOC affiliates by Section 271. In the Order,
the FCC did not specifically authorize ILECs to provide advanced services
through a separate affiliate immediately. ILECs may, of course, immediately
provide advanced services, but until the separate affiliate is properly
established pursuant to rules to be promulgated following comment on the NPRM,
such provision of advanced services will be subject to Section 251. The outcome
of this proceeding could have a material adverse effect on the Company.
In order to assist competing carriers to gain access to ILEC facilities
necessary to provide advanced services, the FCC also proposes to strengthen
collocation and loop unbundling requirements. Finally, the FCC issued a Notice
of Inquiry (NOI) to explore the availability of advanced, high speed
telecommunications services.
OTHER FEDERAL REGULATION. In general, the FCC has a policy of encouraging
the entry of new competitors in the telecommunications industry and preventing
anti-competitive practices. Therefore, the FCC has established different levels
of regulation for dominant carriers and nondominant carriers. For purposes of
domestic common carrier telecommunications regulation, large ILECs such as GTE
and the RBOCs are currently considered dominant carriers, while CLECs are
considered nondominant carriers.
- TARIFFS. As a nondominant carrier, the Company may install and operate
facilities for the transmission of domestic interstate communications
without prior FCC authorization. Services of nondominant carriers have
been subject to relatively limited regulation by the FCC, primarily
consisting of the filing of tariffs and periodic reports. However,
nondominant carriers like the Company must offer interstate services on a
nondiscriminatory basis, at just and reasonable rates, and remain subject
to FCC complaint procedures. With the exception of informational tariffs
for operator-assisted services and tariffs for interexchange casual
calling services, the FCC has ruled that IXCs must cancel their tariffs
for domestic, interstate interexchange services. Tariffs remain required
for international services. The effectiveness of those orders currently
is subject to a stay issued by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the District
of Columbia Circuit. On June 19, 1997, the FCC issued an order granting
petitions filed by Hyperion Telecommunications Inc. and Time Warner Inc.
to provide CLECs the option to cease filing tariffs for interstate
interexchange access services and has proposed to make the withdrawal of
CLEC access service tariffs mandatory. Pursuant to these FCC
requirements, the Company has filed and maintains tariffs for its
interstate services with the FCC. All of the interstate access and retail
"basic" services (as defined by the FCC) provided by the Company are
described therein. "Enhanced" services (as defined by the FCC) need not
be tariffed. The Company believes that its proposed enhanced voice and
Internet services are "enhanced" services that need not be tariffed.
However, the FCC is reexamining the "enhanced" definition as it relates
to IP transport and the Company cannot predict whether the FCC will
change the classification of such services.
79
85
- INTERNATIONAL SERVICES. Nondominant carriers such as the Company also
are required to obtain FCC authorization pursuant to Section 214 of the
Communications Act and file tariffs before providing international
communications services. The Company has obtained authority from the FCC
to provide voice and data communications services between the United
States and all foreign authorized points.
- ILEC PRICE CAP REGULATION REFORM. In 1991, the FCC replaced traditional
rate of return regulation for large ILECs with price cap regulation.
Under price caps, ILECs can raise prices for certain services by only a
small percentage each year. In addition, there are constraints on the
pricing of ILEC services that are competitive with those of CLECs. On
September 14, 1995, the FCC proposed a three-stage plan that would
substantially reduce ILEC price cap regulation as local markets become
increasingly competitive and ultimately would result in granting ILECs
nondominant status. Adoption of the FCC's proposal to reduce
significantly its regulation of ILEC pricing would significantly enhance
the ability of ILECs to compete against the Company and could have a
material adverse effect on the Company. The FCC released an order on
December 24, 1996 that adopted certain of these proposals, including the
elimination of the lower service band index limits on price reductions
within the access service category. The FCC's December 1996 order also
eased the requirements necessary for the introduction of new services by
ILECs. On May 7, 1997, the FCC took further action in its CC Docket No.
94-1 updating and reforming its price cap plan for the ILECs. Among other
things, the changes require price cap LECs to reduce their price cap
indices by 6.5 percent annually, less an adjustment for inflation. The
FCC also eliminated rules that require ILECs earning more than certain
specified rates of return to "share" portions of the excess with their
access customers during the next year in the form of lower access rates.
These actions could have a significant impact on the interstate access
prices charged by the ILECs with whom the Company expects to compete.
- ACCESS CHARGES. Over the past few years, the FCC has granted ILECs
significant flexibility in pricing their interstate special and switched
access services. Under this pricing scheme, ILECs may establish pricing
zones based on access traffic density and charge different prices for
each zone. The Company anticipates that this pricing flexibility will
result in ILECs lowering their prices in high traffic density areas, the
probable area of competition with the Company. The Company also
anticipates that the FCC will grant ILECs increasing pricing flexibility
as the number of interconnections and competitors increases. On May 7,
1997, the FCC took action in its CC Docket No. 96-262 to reform the
current interstate access charge system. The FCC adopted an order that
makes various reforms to the existing rate structure for interstate
access that are designed to move access charges, over time, to more
economically efficient rate levels and structures. The following is a
nonexclusive list of actions announced by the FCC:
- SUBSCRIBER LINE CHARGE ("SLC"). The maximum permitted amount that an
ILEC may charge for SLCs on certain lines was increased. Specifically,
the ceiling was increased significantly for second and additional
residential lines, and for multi-line business customers. SLC ceiling
increases began in July 1997 and will be phased in over a two-year
period.
- PRESUBSCRIBED INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER CHARGE ("PICC"). The FCC created
a new PICC access charge rate element. The PICC is a flat-rate, per-line
charge that is recovered by LECs from IXCs. The charge is designed to
recover common line revenue not recovered through SLCs. Effective
January 1, 1998, the maximum permitted interstate PICC charge is $0.53
per month for primary residential lines and $1.50 per month for second
and additional residential lines. The initial maximum interstate PICC
for multi-line businesses are $2.75. The ceilings will be permitted to
increase over time.
- CARRIER COMMON LINE CHARGE ("CCL"). As the ceilings on the SLCs and
PICCs increase, the per-minute CCL charge will be eliminated. Until
then, the CCL will be
80
86
assessed on originating minutes of use. Thus, ILECs will charge lower
rates for terminating than originating access. In addition, Long-term
Support ("LTS") payments for universal service will be eliminated from
the CCL charge.
- LOCAL SWITCHING. Effective January 1, 1998, ILECs subject to
price-cap regulation were required to move non-traffic-sensitive ("NTS")
costs of local switching associated with line ports to common line rate
elements and recover them through the common line charge discussed
above. Local switching costs attributable to dedicated trunk ports must
be moved to the trunking basket and recovered through flat-rate monthly
charges.
- TRANSPORT. The "unitary" rate structure option for tandem-switched
transport will be eliminated effective July 1, 1998. For price cap LECs,
additional rate structure changes became effective on January 1, 1998,
which altered the recovery of certain NTS costs of tandem- switching and
multiplexing and the minutes-of-use assumption employed to determine
tandem-switched transport prices. Also effective January 1, 1998,
certain costs currently recovered through the Transport Interconnection
Charge ("TIC") were reassigned to specified facilities charges. The
reassignment of tandem costs currently recovered through the TIC to the
tandem switching charge will be phased in evenly over a three-year
period. Residual TIC charges will be covered in part through the PICC,
and price cap reductions will be targeted at the per-minute residual TIC
until it is eliminated.
In other actions, the FCC clarified that ILECs may not assess
interstate access charges on the purchasers of unbundled network
elements or information services providers (including ISPs). Further
regulatory actions affecting ISPs are being considered in a FCC notice
of inquiry released on December 24, 1996. The FCC also decided not to
adopt any regulations governing the provision of terminating access by
CLECs. ILECs also were ordered to adjust their access charge rate levels
to reflect contributions to and receipts from the new universal service
funding mechanisms.
The FCC also announced that it will, in a subsequent Report and Order,
provide detailed rules for implementing a market-based approach to
further access charge reform. That process will give ILECs progressively
greater flexibility in setting rates as competition develops, gradually
replacing regulation with competition as the primary means of setting
prices. The FCC also adopted a "prescriptive safeguard" to bring access
rates to competitive levels in the absence of competition. For all
services then still subject to price caps and not deregulated in
response to competition, the FCC required ILECs subject to price caps to
file Total Service Long Run Incremental Cost ("TSLRIC") cost studies no
later than February 8, 2001.
This series of decisions is likely to have a significant impact on the
operations, expenses, pricing and revenue of the Company and costs
vis-a-vis larger, more efficient carriers such as AT&T, MCI and Sprint.
Various parties have sought reconsideration or appeal of the FCC's access
charge rulings and all or part of the order ultimately could be set aside
or revised. The Company cannot predict the outcome of these proceedings.
UNIVERSAL SERVICE REFORM. On May 8, 1997, the FCC released an order in its
CC Docket No. 96-45, which reforms the current system of interstate universal
service support and implements the universal service provisions of the
Telecommunications Act. The FCC established a set of policies and rules that
ensure that low-income consumers and consumers that live in rural, insular and
high-cost areas receive a defined set of local telecommunications services at
affordable rates. This is accomplished in part through expansion of direct
consumer subsidy programs and in part by ensuring that rural, small and
high-cost LECs continue to receive universal service subsidy support. The FCC
also created new programs to subsidize connection of eligible schools, libraries
and rural health care providers to telecommunications networks. These programs
will be funded by assessment of eligible revenue of nearly all providers of
interstate telecommunications carriers, including the Company.
81
87
The Company, like other telecommunications carriers that provide interstate
telecommunications services, will be required to contribute a portion of its
end-user telecommunications revenue to fund universal service programs. These
contributions became due beginning in 1998 for all providers of interstate
telecommunications services. Such contributions are assessed based on
intrastate, interstate and international end user telecommunications revenue.
Contribution factors vary quarterly, and carriers, including the Company, are
billed each month. Contribution factors for the first three quarters of 1998
have been determined by the FCC as follows: first quarter, second quarter and
third quarter factors are 3.19%, 3.14% and 3.14%, respectively, for the high
cost and low income funds (interstate and international end user
telecommunications revenue) and 0.72%, 0.76% and 0.75%, respectively, for the
schools, libraries and rural health funds (intrastate, interstate and
international end user communications revenue). In addition, many state
regulatory agencies have instituted proceedings to revise state universal
support mechanisms to make them consistent with the requirements of the
Telecommunications Act. As a result, the Company will be subject to state, as
well as federal, universal service fund contribution requirements, which will
vary from state to state. Several parties have appealed the FCC's May 8th order,
and these appeals have been consolidated in the U.S. Court of Appeals for the
Fifth Circuit. In addition, a number of telecommunications companies have filed
a petition for a stay with the FCC, which is currently pending.
Pursuant to the Universal Service Order, all carriers were required to
submit a Universal Service Fund worksheet in September 1997. The Company has
filed its Universal Service Fund worksheet. The amounts remitted to the
Universal Service Fund may be billed to the Company's customers. If the Company
does not bill these amounts to its customers, its profit margins may be less
than if it had elected to do so. However, if the Company elects to bill these
amounts to its customers, customers may reduce their use of the Company's
services, or elect to use the services provided by the Company's competitors,
which may have a material adverse effect upon the Company's business, financial
condition, or results of operation. The Company is eligible to qualify as a
recipient of universal service support if it elects to provide facilities-based
service to areas designated for universal service support and if it complies
with federal and state regulatory requirements to be an eligible
telecommunications carrier. The FCC's decisions in CC Docket No. 96-45 could
have a significant impact on future operations of the Company. Significant
portions of the FCC's order have been appealed and are under review by the U.S.
Court of Appeals for the Fifth Circuit. The Company cannot predict the outcome
of these proceedings.
CURRENT COMPANY CERTIFICATIONS. The Company has received Section 214
authorization from the FCC allowing it to engage in business as a resale and
facilities-based international carrier.
STATE REGULATION
Most states require a certification or other authorization to offer local
exchange and long distance intrastate services. These certifications generally
require a showing that the carrier has adequate financial, managerial and
technical resources to offer the proposed services in a manner consistent with
the public interest. In addition to tariff requirements, most states require
that common carriers charge just and reasonable rates and not discriminate among
similarly situated customers. Some states also require the filing of periodic
reports, the payment of various regulatory fees and surcharges, and compliance
with service standards and consumer protection rules. States generally retain
the right to sanction a carrier or to revoke certification if a carrier violates
relevant laws and/or regulations. If any state regulatory agency were to
conclude that the Company is or was providing intrastate services without the
appropriate authority, the agency could initiate enforcement actions, which
could include the imposition of fines, a requirement to disgorge revenues, or
the refusal to grant the regulatory authority necessary for the future provision
of intrastate telecommunications services. The Company holds authority to
provide intrastate interLATA and, where authorized, intraLATA toll service in 49
states. The authority in some states may be limited to resale of long distance
service. The Company is in the process of obtaining intrastate toll authority in
Alaska. The Company has authority to provide competitive local exchange service
in
82
88
Massachusetts, New Hampshire and Rhode Island. The Company has applications
pending to provide resold and facilities-based competitive local exchange
services in several other Northeastern and Southeastern states. There is no
industry consensus on what constitutes a "facilities-based" carrier and the FCC
and state regulatory agency definitions vary accordingly. There can be no
assurance that the Company will receive the authorizations it seeks currently or
in the future.
The FCC imposes on entities authorized to provide international
telecommunications service prior approval requirements for "transfers of
control", including pro forma transfers. The Company is also subject to
requirements in certain states to obtain prior approval for, or notify the state
commission of, any transfers of control, sales of assets, corporate
reorganizations, issuances of stock or debt instruments and related
transactions. The Company did not obtain prior approval for its July 1998
corporate reorganization to create a holding company structure whereby Network
Plus Corp. became the holding company of Network Plus, Inc. The Company is in
the process of filing the necessary papers at the FCC and relevant state
commissions seeking nunc pro tunc (retroactive) approval of the transaction on
the grounds that the transaction serves certain important business needs of the
Company and enhances the Company's ability to market and provide services more
efficiently. Although the Company believes that its applications will be
approved in due course, there can be no assurance that the FCC or state
commissions will grant the Company's requests for retroactive approval and/or
will not impose fines or license conditions, commence revocation proceedings or
otherwise exercise their authority to address violations of applicable statutes
and regulations.
The Company believes that most, if not all, states in which it proposes to
operate as a local telecommunications provider will require certification or
other authorization to offer local intrastate services. Many of the states in
which the Company intends to operate are in the process of addressing issues
relating to the regulation of CLECs.
In some states, existing state statutes, regulations or regulatory policy
may preclude some or all forms of local service competition. However, Section
253 of the Telecommunications Act prohibits states and localities from adopting
or imposing any legal requirement that may prohibit, or have the effect of
prohibiting, the ability of any entity to provide any interstate or intrastate
telecommunications service. The FCC has the authority to preempt any such state
or local requirements to the extent necessary to enforce the Telecommunications
Act's open market entry requirements. States and localities may, however,
continue to regulate the provision of intrastate telecommunications services and
require carriers to obtain certificates or licenses before providing service if
such requirements do not constitute prohibited barriers to market entry.
Some states in which the Company operates are considering legislation that
could impede efforts by new entrants in the local services market to compete
effectively with ILECs. For example, some state public utility commissions
("PUCs") are currently considering actions to preserve universal service and
promote the public interest. The actions may impose conditions on the
certificate issued to an operating company that would require it to offer
service on a geographically widespread basis through (i) the construction of
facilities to serve all residents and business customers in such areas, (ii) the
acquisition from other carriers of network facilities required to provide such
service, or (iii) the resale of other carriers' services. The Company believes
that state PUCs have limited authority to impose such requirements under the
Telecommunications Act. The imposition of such conditions by state PUCs,
however, could increase the cost to operating companies of providing local
exchange services, or could otherwise affect the operating companies'
flexibility to offer services. Another state action that impedes efforts by new
entrants to compete in the local exchange services market is the enactment of
state laws that prohibit competition in certain areas of a state. For example,
Section 65-4-201(d) of the Tennessee Code prohibits local exchange
telecommunications competition in areas of Tennessee served by carriers with
fewer than 100,000 access lines within the state. Other states have or may enact
similar provisions; however, to date the FCC has considered Texas and Wyoming
statutory provisions that are virtually identical to the
83
89
Tennessee statute, and has preempted both statutes as violative of sec.253(a) of
the Telecommunications Act. A petition for preemption of the Tennessee statute
has been filed at the FCC.
The Company believes that, as the degree of intrastate competition
increases, the states will offer the ILECs increasing pricing flexibility. This
flexibility may present the ILECs with an opportunity to subsidize services that
compete with the Company's services with revenue generated from non-competitive
services, thereby allowing ILECs to offer competitive services at prices below
the cost of providing the service. The Company cannot predict the extent to
which this may occur or its impact on the Company's business.
LOCAL INTERCONNECTION. The Telecommunications Act imposes a duty upon all
ILECs to negotiate in good faith with potential interconnectors to provide
interconnection to the ILEC networks, exchange local traffic, make unbundled
network elements available and permit resale of most local services. In the
event that negotiations do not succeed, the Company has a right to seek state
PUC arbitration of any unresolved issues. The Company entered into
interconnection agreements with Bell Atlantic for Massachusetts, New Hampshire
and Rhode Island and is negotiating interconnection arrangements in a number of
states in its targeted regions. Arbitration decisions involving interconnection
arrangements in several states have been challenged in lawsuits filed in U.S.
District Court by the affected ILECs.
The Company is currently negotiating interconnection agreements with (i)
Bell Atlantic or its affiliates in New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Vermont
and Maine; (ii) Southern New England Telephone or its affiliates in Connecticut;
(iii) Bell South or its affiliates in Georgia, Florida and Tennessee; (iv) GTE
or its affiliates in Florida; and (v) Sprint or its local affiliates in Florida.
It is the Company's intention that by December 31, 1998 it will have
successfully negotiated, and have in effect, interconnection agreements in each
of the aforementioned jurisdictions specifically covering the following
elements: (a) reciprocal transport and termination of local traffic (and related
compensation issues); (b) access to unbundled network elements, including local
loops and operations support systems; (c) resale of local exchange services at
wholesale rates (where it does not currently have such an agreement in place);
and (d) local number portability. The Company may experience difficulty in
obtaining timely ILEC implementation of local interconnection agreements, and
there can be no assurance the Company will offer local services in these areas
in accordance with its projected schedule, if at all. See "Risk Factors -- Lack
of Interconnection and Peering Agreements".
LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORIZATIONS. If the Company constructs local networks,
it will be required to obtain street use and construction permits and licenses
and/or franchises to install and expand its fiber optic networks using municipal
rights-of-way. In some municipalities the Company may be required to pay license
or franchise fees based on a percentage of gross revenue or on a per linear foot
basis, as well as post performance bonds or letters of credit. There can be no
assurance that the Company will not be required to post bonds in the future. In
many markets, the ILECs do not pay such franchise fees or pay fees that are
substantially less than those that will be required to be paid by the Company.
To the extent that competitors do not pay the same level of fees as the Company,
the Company could be at a competitive disadvantage. However, the
Telecommunications Act provides that any compensation extracted by states and
localities for use of public rights-of-way must be "fair and reasonable",
applied on a "competitively neutral and nondiscriminatory basis" and be
"publicly disclosed" by such government entity. See "Risk Factors -- The
Telecommunications Act and Other Regulation".
84
90
MANAGEMENT
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS
The following table provides certain information regarding the executive
officers and directors of the Company, including their ages as of August 15,
1998.
NAME AGE POSITIONS
- ---- --- ---------
Robert T. Hale............................. 60 Chairman of the Board of Directors
Robert T. Hale, Jr......................... 32 Chief Executive Officer, President and
Director
James J. Crowley........................... 34 Executive Vice President, Chief Operating
Officer, Secretary and Director
David Martin............................... 59 Director
Joseph C. McNay............................ 64 Director
Michael F. Oyster.......................... 42 Executive Vice President of Networks and
Product Development
Joseph Haines.............................. 36 Vice President of Local Operations
Steven L. Shapiro.......................... 40 Vice President of Finance, Chief Financial
Officer and Treasurer
Steven J. Stanfill......................... 45 Vice President of Network Services
Kevin B. McConnaughey...................... 40 Vice President and General Manager of
International Services
- ---------------
ROBERT T. HALE is a co-founder of the Company and has served as Chairman of
the Board since its inception in 1990. Mr. Hale is a founding member of the
Telecommunications Resellers Association and has served as chairman of its
Carrier Committee since 1993 and served as chairman of its board from May 1995
to May 1997. Mr. Hale was president of Hampshire Imports, the original importer
of Laura Ashley Womenswear to the U.S. and a manufacturer of exclusive women's
apparel, from 1968 to 1992.
ROBERT T. HALE, JR., is a co-founder of the Company and has served as Chief
Executive Officer, President and Director since its inception in 1990. He was
employed by U.S. Telecenters, a sales agent for NYNEX Corporation, from 1989 to
1990, and as a sales representative at MCI from 1988 to 1989.
JAMES J. CROWLEY has served as Executive Vice President since 1994 and
became Chief Operating Officer and a Director in 1998. He was an attorney at
Hale and Dorr LLP, a Boston law firm, from 1992 to 1994.
DAVID MARTIN has served as a Director of the Company since September 1998.
Mr. Martin was employed by Texas Instruments Inc. from 1960 until June 1998,
most recently as Executive Vice President. Mr. Martin is a member of the Board
of Directors of Mathsoft Inc.
JOSEPH C. MCNAY has served as a Director of the Company since September
1998. Mr. McNay serves as Chairman and Chief Investment Officer of Essex
Investment Management Company, LLC, a private investment management company
founded by Mr. McNay in 1976. Previously he served as Executive Vice President
and Director of Endowment Management & Research Corp. Mr. McNay serves as
Trustee of University Hospital, Boston, Trustee of Simmons College, Trustee of
the Dana Farber Cancer Institute, and Chairman and Trustee of Children's
Hospital, Boston.
MICHAEL F. OYSTER was named Executive Vice President of Networks and
Product Development in July 1998. Mr. Oyster served as Regional Vice President
and General Manager, and in other capacities, at Teleport Communications Group
from August 1997 to July 1998. Mr. Oyster served in various capacities at AT&T
from 1977 to 1997.
85
91
JOSEPH HAINES was named Vice President of Local Operations in July 1998.
From 1992 to 1998, Mr. Haines held various positions with Teleport
Communications Group, most recently as its Regional Vice President of
Operations.
STEVEN L. SHAPIRO has served as Vice President of Finance, Chief Financial
Officer and Treasurer since July 1997. He served as Vice President and
Controller of Grossman's Inc., a publicly held retailer of building materials,
from 1993 to 1997, and as its Assistant Controller from 1986 to 1993. Mr.
Shapiro served as a certified public accountant with Arthur Andersen & Co. from
1979 to 1986.
STEVEN J. STANFILL has served as Vice President of Network Services since
1994. He served as Vice President of Network Operations at Ascom Communications,
a telecommunication services provider, from 1989 to 1994. From 1983 to 1989, Mr.
Stanfill served in various management capacities at National Applied Computer
Technologies, a telecommunications switching equipment manufacturer.
KEVIN B. MCCONNAUGHEY has served as Vice President and General Manager of
International Services since March 1997. From 1995 to 1997, he was Associate
Vice President of Business Development for Teleglobe International. From 1990 to
1995, Mr. McConnaughey was employed by Sprint International, where he held a
variety of product management, international carrier relations and marketing
positions.
Each director serves until his or her successor is duly elected and
qualified. Officers serve at the discretion of the Board of Directors. Robert T.
Hale, Jr. is the son of Robert T. Hale. There are no other family relationships
among the Company's executive officers and directors. No executive officer of
the Company is a party to an employment agreement with the Company.
COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS
In July 1998, the Company adopted the 1998 Director Stock Option Plan (the
"Director Plan"). Under the terms of the Director Plan, options to purchase
5,000 shares of Common Stock will be granted to each new non-employee director
upon his or her initial election to the Board of Directors. Annual options to
purchase 2,500 shares of Common Stock will also be granted to each non-employee
director on the date of each annual meeting of stockholders, or on August 1 of
each year if no annual meeting is held by such date. Options granted under the
Director Plan will vest in four equal annual installments beginning on the first
anniversary of the date of grant. The exercisability of these options will be
accelerated upon the occurrence of an Acquisition Event (as defined in the
Director Plan). The exercise price of options granted under the Director Plan is
equal to the fair market value of the Common Stock on the date of grant. A total
of 100,000 shares of Common Stock may be issued upon the exercise of stock
options granted under the Director Plan. In addition, Directors are reimbursed
for out-of-pocket expenses incurred as a result of their service as Directors.
Pursuant to the Director Plan, on September 3, 1998 Messrs. Martin and McNay
each received an option to purchase 5,000 shares of Common Stock at an exercise
price of $15.00 per share.
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE
The following table sets forth certain information concerning the cash and
non-cash compensation during fiscal year 1997 earned by or awarded to the Chief
Executive Officer, the four other most highly compensated executive officers of
the Company whose combined salary and bonus exceeded $100,000 during the fiscal
year ended December 31, 1997, and the Chief Financial Officer of the Company
(the "Named Executive Officers").
86
92
ANNUAL COMPENSATION
ANNUAL COMPENSATION
---------------------
NAME AND TITLE YEAR SALARY BONUS(1)
- -------------- ---- -------- --------
Robert T. Hale, Jr.......................................... 1997 $355,431(2) $2,770
Chief Executive Officer and President
Robert T. Hale.............................................. 1997 220,692(3) 2,725
Chairman of the Board of Directors
James J. Crowley............................................ 1997 160,000 4,353
Executive Vice President and Chief Operating Officer
Steven J. Stanfill.......................................... 1997 121,615 2,888
Vice President of Network Services
Kevin B. McConnaughey(4).................................... 1997 100,961 --
Vice President and General Manager
of International Services
Steven L. Shapiro (5)....................................... 1997 70,096 --
Vice President of Finance, Chief
Financial Officer and Treasurer
- ---------------
(1) Includes the cash value of travel awarded as bonuses.
(2) Includes sales commissions of $49,662. Robert T. Hale, Jr.'s annual base
salary (excluding sales commissions) was reduced to $285,000 effective
August 17, 1998.
(3) Robert T. Hale's annual base salary was reduced to $195,000 effective
December 23, 1997.
(4) Commenced employment with the Company on March 17, 1997.
(5) Commenced employment with the Company on July 1, 1997.
EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS
1998 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN
The Company's 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (the "1998 Incentive Plan") was
adopted by the Company in July 1998. The 1998 Incentive Plan provides for the
grant of stock-based awards to employees, officers and directors of, and
consultants or advisors to, the Company. Under the 1998 Incentive Plan, the
Company may grant options that are intended to qualify as incentive stock
options ("incentive stock options") within the meaning of Section 422 of the
Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code"), options not intended to
qualify as incentive stock options ("nonqualified options"), restricted stock
and other stock-based awards. Incentive stock options may be granted only to
employees of the Company. A total of 1,400,000 shares of Common Stock may be
issued upon the exercise of options or other awards granted under the 1998
Incentive Plan. The number of shares with respect to which awards may be granted
to any employee under the 1998 Incentive Plan may not exceed 700,000 during any
calendar year. The exercisability of options or other awards granted under the
1998 Incentive Plan may in certain circumstances be accelerated in connection
with an Acquisition Event (as defined in the 1998 Incentive Plan). Options and
other awards may be granted under the 1998 Incentive Plan at exercise prices
that are equal to, less than or greater than the fair market value of the
Company's Common Stock, and the Board generally retains the right to reprice
outstanding options. The 1998 Incentive Plan expires in June 2008, unless sooner
terminated by the Board. As of July 15, 1998, the Company had granted options to
purchase an aggregate of 741,140 shares of Common Stock under the 1998 Incentive
Plan, including an option to purchase 120,000 shares to Mr. Crowley, an option
to purchase 23,334 shares to Mr. Stanfill, an option to purchase 14,620 shares
to Mr. McConnaughey, an option to purchase 10,045 shares to Mr. Shapiro, an
option to purchase 40,000 shares to Mr. Oyster and an option to purchase 40,000
shares to Mr. Haines. The remainder of the options were granted to approximately
190 employees of, and one consultant to, the Company. These options generally
87
93
become exercisable in four equal annual installments beginning on the first
anniversary of the date of grant, subject in certain cases to accelerated
vesting in connection with an Acquisition Event.
401(k) PLAN
Effective January 1, 1995, the Company adopted the Employee 401(k) and
Profit Sharing Plan (the "401(k) Plan") covering the Company's eligible
employees. Pursuant to the 401(k) Plan, employees may elect to reduce their
current compensation by up to the lesser of 15% of eligible compensation or the
statutorily prescribed annual limit ($10,000 in 1998) and have the amount of
such reduction contributed to the 401(k) Plan. The 401(k) Plan permits, but does
not require, additional contributions to the 401(k) Plan by the Company on
behalf of all participants. The Company contributed $175,000 to the 401(k) Plan
in 1995. No additional contributions have been made by the Company. The 401(k)
Plan is intended to qualify under Section 401 of the Code, so that contributions
by employees or by the Company to the 401(k) Plan, and income earned on plan
contributions, are not taxable to employees until withdrawn, and contributions
by the Company, if any, are deductible by the Company when made.
CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS
The Company's office space in Quincy, Massachusetts is leased from a trust,
the beneficiaries of which are the stockholders of the Company. The Company
makes monthly rental payments to the trust of $35,900. In each of the years
ending December 31, 1997, 1996 and 1995, the amount paid to the trust was
$431,000. The Company is currently in the process of negotiating an increase in
the rental payments under this lease and expects that, following such increase,
the lease will be on terms no less favorable to the Company than could be
obtained in an arms' length transaction. The Company is also contingently liable
as a guarantor on a bank loan made to the trust. The outstanding balance on the
loan at December 31, 1997 and 1996 was approximately $1.5 million. See
"Description of Certain Indebtedness".
On September 2, 1998, the Company paid a dividend in the aggregate amount
of $5.0 million. As a result, $2.5 million was distributed to each of Robert T.
Hale and Robert T. Hale, Jr. Robert T. Hale, Jr., reinvested $1.9 million in the
Company (representing approximately the distribution to him, net of his
estimated tax liability resulting from such dividend) in the form of a long-term
loan to the Company. Interest on such loan will accrue at Fleet's prime rate.
Principal and interest on such loan will be payable 10 days after the redemption
of the Series A Preferred Stock.
In December 1997, the Company's stockholders issued the Company loans
totaling $1,755,000. Interest on the loans accrued at the prevailing prime rate
(8.5% at December 31, 1997) and was payable monthly. There was no required
period for principal repayment. The loans, including accrued interest of
$12,017, were repaid in May 1998. See "Management's Discussion and Analysis of
Financial Condition and Results of Operations".
The Company had a service arrangement with a marketing company, the
controlling stockholders of which include the Company's stockholders. The
marketing company provided services relative to establishing, training and
expanding the Company's sales organization. For the years ending December 31,
1997, 1996 and 1995, the amounts paid to the marketing company were $55,000,
$132,000 and $197,000, respectively. This service arrangement was terminated in
May 1997.
88
94
STOCK OWNERSHIP
The following table sets forth as of September 15, 1998 the number of
shares of Common Stock and the percentage of the outstanding shares of such
class that are beneficially owned by (i) each person that is the beneficial
owner of more than 5% of the outstanding shares of Common Stock, (ii) each of
the directors and Named Executive Officers of the Company and (iii) all of the
current directors and executive officers of the Company as a group.
AMOUNT AND NATURE
OF BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP(1)
--------------------------
NUMBER OF PERCENT OF
NAME AND ADDRESS OF BENEFICIAL OWNER SHARES CLASS
- ------------------------------------ --------- ----------
5% STOCKHOLDERS
Robert T. Hale.............................................. 5,000,000 50%
c/o Network Plus, Inc.
234 Copeland Street
Quincy, Massachusetts 02169
Robert T. Hale, Jr.......................................... 5,000,000 50%
c/o Network Plus, Inc.
234 Copeland Street
Quincy, Massachusetts 02169
OTHER DIRECTORS
James J. Crowley............................................ 0 --
David Martin................................................ 0 --
Joseph C. McNay............................................. 0 --
OTHER NAMED EXECUTIVE OFFICERS
Steven L. Shapiro........................................... 0 --
Kevin B. McConnaughey....................................... 0 --
Steven J. Stanfill.......................................... 0 --
All directors and executive officers as a group (10
persons).................................................. 10,000,000 100%
- ---------------
(1) Each stockholder possesses sole voting and investment power with respect to
the shares listed. Excludes options that vest subsequent to November 14,
1998.
89
95
DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
The Company's Certificate of Incorporation (the "Charter") authorizes (i)
20,000,000 shares of Common Stock, $.01 par value, and (ii) 1,000,000 shares of
Preferred Stock, $.01 par value, of which 50,000 shares have been designated
13.5% Series A Cumulative Preferred Stock due 2009 and 50,000 shares have been
designated 13.5% Series A1 Cumulative Preferred Stock due 2009. Set forth below
and under "Description of the Series A Preferred Stock" is a description of the
capital stock of the Company.
COMMON STOCK
As of July 15, 1998, there were 10,000,000 shares of Common Stock issued
and outstanding and held of record by two stockholders. The holders of Common
Stock are entitled to receive dividends when and as dividends are declared by
the Board of Directors of the Company out of funds legally available therefor,
provided that if any shares of Preferred Stock are at the time outstanding, the
payment of dividends on the Common Stock or other distributions may be subject
to the declaration and payment of full cumulative dividends on outstanding
shares of Preferred Stock. Holders of Common Stock are entitled to one vote per
share on all matters submitted to a vote of the stockholders, including the
election of directors. Upon any liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the
affairs of the Company, whether voluntary or involuntary, any assets remaining
after the satisfaction in full of the prior rights of creditors and the
aggregate liquidation preference of any Preferred Stock (including the Series A
Preferred Stock) then outstanding will be distributed to the holders of Common
Stock ratably in proportion to the number of shares held by them. The Common
Stock is not publicly traded. See "Risk Factors -- Control by Existing
Stockholders; Potential Conflict of Interest; Deadlock; Antitakeover
Provisions".
PREFERRED STOCK
Under the Charter, the Board of Directors has the authority to issue up to
1,000,000 shares of Preferred Stock from time to time in one or more series with
such preferences, terms and rights as the Board of Directors may determine
without further action by the stockholders of the Company. Accordingly, the
Board of Directors has the power to establish the provisions, if any, relating
to dividends, voting rights, redemption rates, sinking funds, liquidation
preferences and conversion rights for any series of Preferred Stock issued in
the future. For a description of the Series A Preferred Stock, see "Description
of the Series A Preferred Stock". No other shares of preferred stock have been
issued or are outstanding.
One of the effects of undesignated Preferred Stock may be to enable the
Board of Directors to render more difficult or to discourage an attempt to
obtain control of the Company by means of a tender offer, proxy contest, merger
or otherwise, and thereby to protect the continuity of the Company's management.
The issuance of shares of the Preferred Stock pursuant to the Board of
Directors' authority described above may adversely affect the rights of the
holders of Common Stock. For example, Preferred Stock issued by the Company may
rank prior to the Common Stock as to dividend rights, liquidation preference or
both, may have full or limited voting rights and may be convertible into shares
of Common Stock. Accordingly, the issuance of shares of Preferred Stock may
discourage bids for the Common Stock or may otherwise adversely affect the
market price of the Common Stock.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY OF DIRECTORS
The Company's Charter eliminates the personal liability of the Company's
directors to the Company or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of
a director's fiduciary duty to the full extent permitted by the Delaware General
Corporation Law (the "DGCL").
90
96
INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS
The Charter provides that the directors and officers of the Company shall
be indemnified by the Company to the fullest extent authorized by Delaware law,
as it now exists or may in the future be amended, against all expenses and
liabilities reasonably incurred in connection with service for or on behalf of
the Company. Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the
Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons
of the Company pursuant to the Charter, in the opinion of the Securities and
Exchange Commission, such indemnification is against public policy as expressed
in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In addition, the Charter
of the Company provides that the directors of the Company will not be personally
liable for monetary damages to the Company for breaches of their fiduciary duty
as directors if they act in good faith and in a manner they reasonably believe
to be in, or not opposed to, the best interests of the Company, and, with
respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe
their conduct was unlawful.
The Company has purchased a general liability insurance policy that covers
certain liabilities of directors and officers of the Company arising out of
claims based on acts and omissions in their capacity as directors and officers.
CERTAIN CHARTER AND BY-LAW PROVISIONS
In the event the Company's Common Stock becomes or may become widely held,
the Board of Directors or the stockholders may adopt certain charter or by-law
provisions that have the effect of discouraging, delaying or making more
difficult a change in control of the Company or preventing the removal of
incumbent directors even if a majority of the Company's stockholders were to
deem such an attempt to be in the best interests of the Company. Such provisions
may include a classified board of directors, limitations in the manner in which
directors are elected and limitations on matters that may be presented at
meetings by stockholders.
DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN INDEBTEDNESS
NEW REVOLVING CREDIT FACILITY
The description set forth below does not purport to be complete and is
qualified in its entirety by reference to definitive documentation setting forth
the principal terms and conditions of the New Revolving Credit Facility, which
is available upon request from the Company. See "Risk Factors -- Substantial
Future Capital Requirements; Need for Additional Financing; Substantial
Leverage".
On October 7, 1998, the Company and NPI entered into a loan agreement with
Goldman Sachs Credit Partners L.P. and Fleet for the New Revolving Credit
Facility. The New Revolving Credit Facility is a $60 million facility,
concurrent with the closing of which the Company terminated the Former Bank
Credit Facility. The New Revolving Credit Facility has a term of 18 months and
is secured by the assets of the Company. Under the New Revolving Credit
Facility, up to $60 million is available, of which $30 million is available
based upon a percentage of accounts receivable. Interest is payable at one
percent above the prime rate. The New Revolving Credit Facility requires the
Company, among other things, to meet minimum levels of revenues and EBITDA, and
not to exceed certain customer turnover levels and debt to revenue ratios.
91
97
STOCKHOLDER LOAN
On September 2, 1998, Robert T. Hale, Jr., the Company's President and
Chief Executive Officer, loaned $1.9 million to the Company. This amount
represents a reinvestment in the Company of a $2.5 million dividend distribution
to Robert T. Hale, Jr., net of the estimated tax liability related to such
distribution. Interest on such loan accrues at Fleet's prime rate. Principal and
interest on such loan will be payable 10 days after redemption of the Series A
Preferred Stock. See "Certain Transactions".
FORMER BANK CREDIT FACILITY
The Former Bank Credit Facility with Fleet provided NPI the ability to
borrow amounts up to $23 million. This facility was terminated in connection
with the closing of the New Revolving Credit Facility.
DESCRIPTION OF THE SERIES A PREFERRED STOCK
The following is a summary of certain provisions of the Certificate of
Designation and the Series A Preferred Stock. A copy of the Certificate of
Designation and the form of Series A Preferred Stock is available upon request
to the Company at the address set forth under "Available Information". The
following summary of certain provisions of the Certificate of Designation does
not purport to be complete and is subject to, and is qualified in its entirety
by reference to, all the provisions of the Certificate of Designation. The
definitions of certain capitalized terms used but not defined in the following
summary are set forth under "-- Certain Definitions". Other capitalized terms
used but not defined herein and not otherwise defined under "-- Certain
Definitions" are defined in the Certificate of Designation.
GENERAL
At the consummation of the Initial Offering, the Company issued 40,000
shares of its 13.5% Series A Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009, $0.01 par
value per share. In this Exchange Offer, the Company will offer to exchange one
share of its 13.5% Series A1 Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009 for each
outstanding share of its 13.5% Series A Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009. The
13.5% Series A Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009 and the 13.5% Series A1
Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009 are substantially identical in all material
respects (except with respect to certain rights in connection with this Exchange
Offer), and, unless otherwise indicated, both are referred to in this Prospectus
as the "Series A Preferred Stock".
RANKING
The Series A Preferred Stock will, with respect to dividend rights and
rights on liquidation, winding-up and dissolution, rank (i) senior to all
classes of common stock and to each other class of Capital Stock of the Company
or series of Preferred Stock of the Company outstanding on the Issue Date and
each other class or series established hereafter by the Board of Directors the
terms of which do not expressly provide that it ranks senior to, or on a parity
with, the Series A Preferred Stock as to dividend rights and rights on
liquidation, winding-up and dissolution of the Company (collectively referred
to, together with all classes of common stock of the Company, as "Junior
Stock"); (ii) on a parity with each class of Capital Stock of the Company or
series of Preferred Stock of the Company established hereafter by the Board of
Directors, the terms of which expressly provide that such class or series will
rank on a parity with the Series A Preferred Stock as to dividend rights and
rights on liquidation, winding-up and dissolution (collectively referred to as
"Parity Stock"); and (iii) junior to each class of Capital Stock of the Company
or series of Preferred Stock of the Company established hereafter by the Board
of Directors, the terms of which expressly provide that such class or series
will rank senior to the Series A Preferred Stock as to dividend
92
98
rights and rights upon liquidation, winding-up and dissolution of the Company
(collectively referred to as "Senior Stock").
While any shares of Series A Preferred Stock are outstanding, the Company
may not authorize, create or increase the authorized amount of any class or
series of stock that ranks senior to or on parity with the Series A Preferred
Stock with respect to the payment of dividends or amounts upon liquidation,
dissolution or winding up without the consent of the holders of a majority of
the outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock. However, without the consent
of any holder of Series A Preferred Stock, the Company may create additional
classes of stock, increase the authorized number of shares of preferred stock or
issue series of a stock that ranks junior to the Series A Preferred Stock with
respect, in each case, to the payment of dividends and amounts upon liquidation,
dissolution and winding up. See "-- Voting Rights".
All claims of the holders of the Series A Preferred Stock, including
without limitation, claims with respect to dividend payments, redemption
payments, mandatory repurchase payments or rights upon liquidation, winding-up
or dissolution, shall rank junior to the claims of any holders of any debt of
the Company and its Subsidiary and all other creditors of the Company and its
Subsidiary. Substantially all the operations of the Company is conducted through
its Subsidiary and in future will be conducted through one or more of its
subsidiaries. Accordingly, the Company is and will be a holding company with no
assets other than the capital stock of such subsidiaries. Claims of creditors of
such subsidiaries, including trade creditors, secured creditors and creditors
holding indebtedness and guarantees issued by such subsidiaries, and claims of
preferred stockholders (if any) of such subsidiaries generally will have
priority with respect to the assets and earnings of such subsidiaries over the
claims of the Company. Although the Certificate of Designation limits the
incurrence of Debt of the Company and certain of its subsidiaries, such
limitation is subject to a number of significant qualifications. Moreover, the
Certificate of Designation does not impose any limitation on the incurrence of
liabilities that are not considered Debt under the Certificate of Designation.
See "-- Certain Covenants -- Limitation on Debt".
DIVIDENDS
The holders of shares of Series A Preferred Stock will be entitled to
receive, when, as and if dividends are declared by the Board of Directors out of
funds of the Company legally available therefor, cumulative preferential
dividends from the Issue Date at a rate per share of 13.5% per annum of the
Specified Amount per share of Series A Preferred Stock, payable quarterly in
arrears on each of March 1, June 1, September 1 and December 1 (each a "Dividend
Payment Date") or, if any such date is not a Business Day, on the next
succeeding Business Day, to the holders of record as of the next preceding
February 15, May 15, August 15 and November 15, respectively. Subject to the
next succeeding sentence, dividends will be payable in cash. If any dividend
(other than any Special Dividends) payable on any Dividend Payment Date on or
before September 1, 2003 is not declared or paid in full in cash on such
Dividend Payment Date, the amount payable as dividends on such Dividend Payment
Date (other than any Special Dividends) that is not paid in cash on such
Dividend Payment Date will be added automatically to the Specified Amount of the
Series A Preferred Stock on such Dividend Payment Date (such dividends being
herein called the "Accumulated Dividends"). The first dividend payment of Series
A Preferred Stock will be payable on December 1, 1998. Dividends payable on the
Series A Preferred Stock will be computed on a basis of the 360-day year
consisting of twelve 30-day months and will be deemed to accrue on a daily
basis.
For a discussion of certain Federal income tax considerations relevant to
the payment of dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock, see "Certain United
States Federal Income Tax Consequences".
Dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock will accrue whether or not the
Company has earnings or profits, whether or not there are funds legally
available for the payment of such dividends and whether or not dividends are
declared. Dividends will accumulate to the extent they are not paid on the
Dividend Payment Date for the period to which they relate. The Certificate of
Designation will
93
99
provide that the Company will take all actions required or permitted under the
Delaware General Corporation Law (the "DGCL") to permit the payment of dividends
on the Series A Preferred Stock.
No dividend whatsoever shall be declared or paid upon, or any sum set apart
for the payment of dividends upon, any outstanding share of the Series A
Preferred Stock with respect to any dividend period unless all dividends for all
preceding dividend periods have been added to the Specified Amount (if on or
before September 1, 2003), declared and paid, or declared and a sufficient sum
set apart for the payment of such dividend, upon all outstanding shares of
Series A Preferred Stock.
Except as provided in the next sentence, no dividend will be declared or
paid on any Parity Stock unless full cumulative dividends have been paid (or
deemed paid) on the Series A Preferred Stock for all prior dividend periods. If
accumulated dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock for all prior dividend
periods have not been paid (or deemed paid) in full then any dividend declared
on the Series A Preferred Stock for any dividend period and on any Parity Stock
will be declared ratably in proportion to accrued and unpaid dividends on the
Series A Preferred Stock and such Parity Stock.
The Company will not (i) declare, pay or set apart funds for the payment of
any dividend or other distribution with respect to any Junior Stock or (ii)
redeem, purchase or otherwise acquire for consideration any Junior Stock through
a sinking fund or otherwise, unless (A) all accrued and unpaid dividends with
respect to the Series A Preferred Stock and any Parity Stock at the time such
dividends are payable have been paid (or deemed paid) or funds have been set
apart for payment of such dividends and (B) sufficient funds have been paid or
set apart for the payment of the dividend for the current dividend period with
respect to the Series A Preferred Stock and any Parity Stock.
OPTIONAL REDEMPTION
Except as set forth below, the Series A Preferred Stock will not be
redeemable at the option of the Company prior to September 1, 2003. Thereafter,
the Series A Preferred Stock will be redeemable, at the Company's option
(subject to the legal availability of funds therefor), in whole or in part, at
any time or from time to time, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days'
prior notice mailed by first-class mail to each Holder's registered address, at
the following redemption prices (expressed in percentages of the Specified
Amount thereof), plus, without duplication, an amount in cash equal to all
accumulated and unpaid dividends (including Special Dividends and an amount in
cash equal to a prorated dividend for any partial dividend period) (subject to
the rights of holders of record on the relevant record date to receive dividends
due on the relevant Dividend Payment Date), if redeemed during the 12-month
period commencing on September 1 of the years set forth below:
REDEMPTION
PERIOD PRICE
- ------ ----------
2003....................................................... 106.500%
2004....................................................... 104.333%
2005....................................................... 102.167%
2006 and thereafter........................................ 100.000%
In the case of any partial redemption, selection of the Series A Preferred
Stock for redemption will be made on a pro rata basis.
MANDATORY REDEMPTION
As soon as practicable following the closing of a Senior Notes Offering the
net proceeds of which (excluding underwriting or other placement fees and
proceeds placed in escrow at the closing thereof pursuant to the terms of such
offering) received by the Company exceed $100 million, the Company will be
required to redeem (subject to the legal availability of funds therefor) all
outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock at a price in cash equal to 108%
of the Specified Amount thereof, plus, without duplication, an amount in cash
equal to all accumulated and unpaid dividends (including Special Dividends and
an amount in cash equal to a prorated dividend for any
94
100
partial dividend period), if any, to the date of redemption (subject to the
rights of holders of record on the relevant record date to receive dividends on
the relevant Dividend Payment Date).
In addition, if at any time and from time to time prior to September 1,
2001, the Company consummates one or more Public Equity Offerings, the Company
will be required to apply the first $25 million of net proceeds (excluding
underwriting or other placement fees and calculated on a cumulative basis
beginning with the first such Public Equity Offering) from such Public Equity
Offering or Offerings and one-half of each additional dollar of net proceeds
(excluding underwriting or other placement fees and calculated on a cumulative
basis beginning with the first such Public Equity Offering) in excess of $25
million to redeem the Series A Preferred Stock, at the following redemption
prices (expressed in percentages of the Specified Amount thereof), plus, without
duplication, an amount in cash equal to all accumulated and unpaid dividends
(including Special Dividends and an amount in cash equal to a prorated dividend
for any partial dividend period), if any, to the date of redemption (subject to
the rights of holders of record on the relevant record date to receive dividends
due on the relevant Dividend Payment Date), if redeemed during the period ending
on the dates set forth below:
REDEMPTION
PERIOD PRICE
- ------ ----------
June 1, 1999............................................... 102.000%
September 1, 1999.......................................... 104.000%
September 1, 2000.......................................... 106.000%
September 1, 2001.......................................... 108.000%
In the case of any partial redemption, selection of the Series A Preferred
Stock for redemption will be made on a pro rata basis.
The Company will not be required to make sinking fund payments with respect
to the Series A Preferred Stock. The Certificate of Designation will provide
that the Company will take all actions required or permitted under Delaware law
to permit such redemption.
LIQUIDATION PREFERENCE
Upon any voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding-up of
the Company, each holder of Series A Preferred Stock will be entitled to be
paid, out of the assets of the Company available for distribution to
stockholders, an amount equal to the Specified Amount per share of Series A
Preferred Stock held by such holder, plus, without duplication, an amount in
cash equal to all accumulated and unpaid dividends thereon to the date fixed for
liquidation, dissolution or winding-up before any distribution is made on any
Junior Stock, including the Common Stock. If, upon any voluntary or involuntary
liquidation, dissolution or winding-up of the Company, the amounts payable with
respect to the Series A Preferred Stock and all other Parity Stock are not paid
in full, the holders of the Series A Preferred Stock and the Parity Stock will
share equally and ratably in any distribution of assets of the Company in
proportion to the full liquidation preference and accumulated and unpaid
dividends to which each is entitled. After payment of the full amount of the
liquidation preference and accumulated and unpaid dividends to which they are
entitled, the holders of shares of Series A Preferred Stock will not be entitled
to any further participation in any distribution of assets of the Company.
However, neither the sale, conveyance, exchange or transfer (for cash, shares of
stock, securities or other consideration) of all or substantially all the
property or assets of the Company nor the consolidation or merger of the Company
with one or more entities shall be deemed to be a liquidation, dissolution or
winding-up of the Company. The liquidation preference of the Series A Preferred
Stock will be $1,000 per share.
The Certificate of Designation will not contain any provision requiring
funds to be set aside to protect the liquidation preference of the Series A
Preferred Stock, although such liquidation preference will be substantially in
excess of the par value of such shares of Series A Preferred Stock.
95
101
VOTING RIGHTS
The holders of Series A Preferred Stock, except as otherwise required under
Delaware law or as provided in the Certificate of Designation, shall not be
entitled or permitted to vote on any matter required or permitted to be voted
upon by the stockholders of the Company.
The Certificate of Designation will provide that if (i) after September 1,
2003, dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock are in arrears and unpaid for
six or more dividend periods (whether or not consecutive); (ii) the Company
fails to redeem the Series A Preferred Stock on September 1, 2009, or fails to
otherwise discharge any redemption obligation with respect to the Series A
Preferred Stock; (iii) the Company fails to make an Offer to Purchase if such
offer is required by the provisions of the covenant described under "-- Certain
Covenants -- Change of Control", (iv) a breach or violation of any of the other
provisions described under the caption "-- Certain Covenants" occurs and the
breach or violation continues for a period of 60 days or more after the Company
receives notice thereof specifying the default from the holders of at least 25%
of the shares of Series A Preferred Stock then outstanding; or (v) the Company
fails to pay at final maturity (giving effect to any applicable grace period)
the principal amount of any Debt of the Company or any Significant Subsidiary or
the final maturity of any such Debt is accelerated because of a default and the
total amount of such Debt unpaid or accelerated exceeds $10 million and such
nonpayment continues, or such acceleration is not rescinded or waived, within 10
days, then the holders of the outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock,
voting together as a single class, will be entitled to elect to serve on the
Board of Directors the lesser of (x) two additional members to the Board of
Directors or (y) that number of directors constituting 25% of the members of the
Board of Directors, and the number of members of the Board of Directors will be
immediately and automatically increased by such number. Such voting rights of
the Series A Preferred Stock will continue until such time as, in the case of a
dividend default, all dividends in arrears on the Series A Preferred Stock are
paid in full in cash (or, if prior to September 1, 2003, in shares of Series A
Preferred Stock) and, in all other cases, any failure, breach or default giving
rise to such voting rights is remedied or waived by the holders of a majority of
the shares of Series A Preferred Stock then outstanding, at which time the term
of any directors elected pursuant to the provisions of this paragraph (subject
to the right of holders of any other preferred stock to elect such directors)
shall terminate. Each such event described in clauses (i) through (v) above is
referred to herein as a "Voting Rights Triggering Event".
The Certificate of Designation also will provide that the Company will not
authorize any class of Senior Stock without the affirmative vote or consent of
holders of a majority of the shares of Series A Preferred Stock then
outstanding, voting or consenting, as the case may be, as one class. In
addition, the Certificate of Designation will provide that the Company may not
authorize the issuance of any additional shares of Series A Preferred Stock
without the affirmative vote or consent of the holders of a majority of the then
outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock, voting or consenting, as the
case may be, as one class. The Certificate of Designation will also provide
that, except as set forth above, (a) the creation, authorization or issuance of
any shares of Junior Stock or Parity Stock, including the designation of a
series thereof within the existing class of Series A Preferred Stock, or (b) the
increase or decrease in the amount of authorized Capital Stock of any class,
including any preferred stock, shall not require the consent of the holders of
Series A Preferred Stock and shall not be deemed to affect adversely the rights,
preferences, privileges or voting rights of shares of Series A Preferred Stock.
REGISTRATION COVENANT; EXCHANGE OFFER
The Company has agreed pursuant to the Registration Agreement, for the
benefit of the Holders of the Series A Preferred Stock, (i) to file with the
Commission, within 90 days following the closing of the Initial Offering (the
"Closing"), a registration statement (the "Exchange Offer Registration
Statement") with respect to the Exchange Offer and (ii) to use its reasonable
best efforts to cause the Exchange Offer Registration Statement to become
effective as soon as practicable thereafter.
96
102
The Company has further agreed to commence the Exchange Offer promptly after the
Exchange Offer Registration Statement has become effective, hold the offer open
for at least 30 days, and exchange New Preferred Shares for all Original
Preferred Shares validly tendered and not withdrawn before the expiration of the
Exchange Offer. The New Preferred Shares are being offered in this Exchange
Offer to satisfy the obligations of the Company under the Registration
Agreement.
Under existing Commission interpretations, the New Preferred Shares would
in general be freely transferable after the Exchange Offer without further
registration under the Securities Act, except that broker-dealers
("Participating Broker-Dealers") receiving New Preferred Shares in the Exchange
Offer will be subject to a prospectus delivery requirement with respect to
resale of those New Preferred Shares. The Commission has taken the position that
Participating Broker-Dealers may fulfill their prospectus delivery requirements
with respect to the New Preferred Shares (other than a resale of any unsold
allotment from the Initial Offering) by delivery of the prospectus contained in
the Exchange Offer Registration Statement. Under the Registration Agreement, the
Company is required to allow Participating Broker-Dealers and other persons, if
any, subject to similar prospectus delivery requirements to use the prospectus
contained in the Exchange Offer Registration Statement in connection with the
resale of such New Preferred Shares. The Exchange Offer Registration Statement
will be kept effective for a period of up to 90 days after the Exchange Offer
has been consummated in order to permit resales of New Preferred Shares acquired
by broker-dealers in after-market transactions. Each Holder of the Original
Preferred Shares, (other than certain specified Holders) who wishes to exchange
such Original Preferred Shares for New Preferred Shares in the Exchange Offer
will be required to represent that any New Preferred Shares to be received by it
will be acquired in the ordinary course of its business, that at the time of the
commencement of the Exchange Offer it has no arrangement with any person to
participate in the distribution (within the meaning of the Securities Act) of
the New Preferred Shares and that it is not an Affiliate of the Company.
However, if on or before the date of consummation of the Exchange Offer the
existing Commission interpretations are changed such that the New Preferred
Shares would not in general be freely transferable on such date, the Company
will, in lieu of effecting registration of New Preferred Shares, use its
reasonable best efforts to cause a registration statement under the Securities
Act relating to a shelf registration of the Original Preferred Shares for resale
by Holders (the "Resale Registration") to become effective and to remain
effective for a period of up to two years after the Closing. The Company will,
in the event of the Resale Registration, provide to the Holders of the Original
Preferred Shares copies of the prospectus that is a part of the registration
statement filed in connection with the Resale Registration, notify such Holders
when the Resale Registration for the Original Preferred Shares has become
effective and take certain other actions as are required to permit unrestricted
resales of the Original Preferred Shares. Use of the Resale Registration
registration statement by Holders will be subject to certain Company "black-out"
rights and customary information delivery requirements. A Holder of Original
Preferred Shares that sells such Original Preferred Shares pursuant to the
Resale Registration generally would be required to be named as a selling
securityholder in the related prospectus and to deliver a prospectus to
purchasers, will be subject to certain of the civil liability provisions under
the Securities Act in connection with such sales and will be bound by the
provisions of the Registration Agreement that are applicable to such Holder
(including certain indemnification obligations).
In the event that (i) the Company has not filed the registration statement
relating to the Exchange Offer (or, if applicable, the Resale Registration)
within 90 days following the Closing, (ii) such registration statement (or, if
applicable, the Resale Registration) has not become effective within 150 days
following the Closing, (iii) the Exchange Offer has not been consummated within
180 days following the Closing or (iv) any registration statement required by
the Registration Agreement is filed and declared effective but shall thereafter
cease to be effective (except as specifically permitted therein) without being
succeeded immediately by an additional registration statement filed and declared
effective (any such event referred to in clauses (i) through (iv), a
97
103
"Registration Default"), then dividends will accumulate (in addition to the
stated dividend on the Series A Preferred Stock) at the rate of 0.5% per annum
on the Specified Amount, for the period from the occurrence of the Registration
Default until such time as no Registration Default is in effect. Such additional
dividends (the "Special Dividends") will be payable in cash on each regular
dividend payment date. For each 90-day period that the Registration Default
continues, the per annum rate of such Special Dividends will increase by an
additional 0.25%, provided that such rate shall in no event exceed 1.0% per
annum in the aggregate. Special Dividends, if any, will be computed on the basis
of a 365 or 366 day year, as the case may be, and the number of days actually
elapsed.
The summary herein of certain provisions of the Registration Agreement does
not purport to be complete and is subject to, and is qualified in its entirety
by reference to, all the provisions of the Registration Agreement, a copy of
which will be available upon request to the Company.
COVENANTS
The Certificate of Designation contains, among others, the following
covenants:
LIMITATION ON DEBT
(a) The Company may not, and may not permit any Restricted Subsidiary of
the Company to, Incur any Debt unless the ratio of (i) the aggregate
consolidated principal amount of Debt of the Company and its Restricted
Subsidiaries outstanding as of the most recent available quarterly or annual
balance sheet, after giving pro forma effect to the Incurrence of such Debt and
any other Debt Incurred since such balance sheet date and the receipt and
application of the proceeds thereof to (ii) Consolidated Cash Flow Available for
Fixed Charges for the four full fiscal quarters next preceding the Incurrence of
such Debt for which consolidated financial statements are available, determined
on a pro forma basis as if any such Debt had been Incurred at the beginning of
such four fiscal quarters, would be less than 7.0 to 1 for such four-quarter
periods ending on or prior to September 1, 2000, and 5.0 to 1 for such periods
ending thereafter.
(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraph (a), the Company and any
Restricted Subsidiary (except as specified below) may incur any or all of the
following:
(i) Debt outstanding on the Issue Date;
(ii) Debt under any Bank Credit Agreement;
(iii) Purchase Money Debt Incurred to finance the construction,
acquisition, development, design, installation, integration, transportation
or improvement of Telecommunications Assets which, together with any other
outstanding Debt Incurred pursuant to this clause (iii) and any Debt
Incurred pursuant to clause (vi) of this paragraph (b) in respect of Debt
Incurred pursuant to this clause (iii), has an aggregate principal amount
at the time of Incurrence, not in excess of $100 million at any time
outstanding;
(iv) Senior Notes the offering of which, together with any other
outstanding Debt Incurred pursuant to this clause (iv), resulted in net
proceeds (excluding underwriting or other placement fees and proceeds
placed in escrow at the closing thereof pursuant to the terms of such
offering) to the Company, not in excess of $100 million;
(v) Debt owed by the Company to any Restricted Subsidiary of the
Company or Debt owed by a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company to the
Company or a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company; provided, however, that
upon either (x) the transfer or other disposition by such Restricted
Subsidiary or the Company of any Debt so permitted to a Person other than
the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary of the Company or (y) the
issuance (other than directors' qualifying shares), sale, lease, transfer
or other disposition of shares of Capital Stock (including by consolidation
or merger) of such Restricted Subsidiary to a Person other than the Company
or another such Restricted Subsidiary, the provisions of this clause (v)
shall no
98
104
longer be applicable to such Debt and such Debt shall be deemed to have
been Incurred at the time of such transfer or other disposition;
(vi) Debt Incurred to renew, extend, refinance or refund (each, a
"refinancing") (A) Debt outstanding on the Issue Date, (B) Debt Incurred
pursuant to paragraph (a) of this covenant or (C) Debt Incurred pursuant to
clause (iii) of this paragraph (b), in each case in an aggregate principal
amount not to exceed the aggregate principal amount of and accrued interest
on the Debt so refinanced plus the amount of any premium required to be
paid in connection with such refinancing pursuant to the terms of the Debt
so refinanced or the amount of any premium reasonably determined by the
Company as necessary to accomplish such refinancing by means of a tender
offer or privately negotiated repurchase, plus the amount of expenses of
the Company incurred in connection with such refinancing; provided,
however, that the refinancing Debt by its terms, or by the terms of any
agreement or instrument pursuant to which such Debt is issued, (x) does not
provide for payments of principal of such Debt at the stated maturity
thereof or by way of a sinking fund applicable thereto or by way of any
mandatory redemption, defeasance, retirement or repurchase thereof by the
Company (including any redemption, retirement or repurchase which is
contingent upon events or circumstances, but excluding any retirement
required by virtue of acceleration of such Debt upon any event of default
thereunder), in each case prior to the time the same are required by the
terms of the Debt being refinanced and (y) does not permit redemption or
other retirement (including pursuant to an offer to purchase made by the
Company) of such debt at the option of the holder thereof prior to the
final stated maturity of the Debt being refinanced, other than a redemption
or other retirement at the option of the holder of such Debt (including
pursuant to an offer to purchase made by the Company) which is conditioned
upon a change substantially similar to those described under "-- Change of
Control" or which is pursuant to provisions substantially similar to those
in the covenant described under "-- Limitation on Asset Dispositions";
(vii) Debt consisting of Permitted Interest Rate or Currency
Protection Agreements;
(viii) Debt consisting of performance and other similar bonds and
reimbursement obligations Incurred in the ordinary course of business
securing the performance of contractual, franchise or license obligations
of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, or in respect of a letter of
credit obtained to secure such performance;
(ix) Debt of the Company to Robert T. Hale, Jr. in an original
principal amount at the time of issuance not to exceed $2 million;
provided, however, that no payment of principal on such Debt may be made
prior to the redemption of the Series A Preferred Stock and the payment in
full of all accumulated dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock; and
(x) Debt of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary not otherwise
permitted to be Incurred pursuant to clauses (i) through (viii) above,
which, together with any other outstanding Debt Incurred pursuant to this
clause (x), has an aggregate principal amount or, in the case of Debt
issued at a discount, an accreted amount (determined in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles) at the time of Incurrence, not in
excess of $10 million at any time outstanding.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this "Limitation on Debt" covenant,
the maximum amount of Debt that the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary may Incur
pursuant to this "Limitation on Debt" covenant shall not be deemed to be
exceeded, with respect to any outstanding Debt, due solely to the result of
fluctuations in exchange rates of currencies.
For purposes of determining compliance with this "Limitation on Debt"
covenant, in the event that an item of Debt meets the criteria of more than one
of the types of Debt the Company is permitted to incur pursuant to the foregoing
clauses (i) through (x), the Company shall have the right, in its sole
discretion, to classify such item of Debt and shall only be required to include
the amount and type of such Debt under the clause permitting the Debt as so
classified. For purposes of
99
105
determining any particular amount of Debt under such covenant, Guarantees or
Liens with respect to letters of credit supporting Debt otherwise included in
the determination of a particular amount shall not be included.
LIMITATION ON RESTRICTED PAYMENTS
The Company (i) may not, directly or indirectly, declare or pay any
dividend, or make any distribution, in respect of any Junior Stock or to the
holders thereof (in their capacity as such), excluding any dividends or
distributions payable solely in shares of Junior Stock (other than Disqualified
Stock) or in options, warrants or other rights to acquire Junior Stock (other
than Disqualified Stock); (ii) may not, and may not permit any Restricted
Subsidiary to, purchase, redeem, or otherwise retire or acquire for value (a)
any Junior Stock of the Company or any Related Person of the Company or (b) any
options, warrants or rights to purchase or acquire shares of Junior Stock of the
Company or any Related Person of the Company or any securities convertible or
exchangeable into shares of Capital Stock of the Company or any Related Person
of the Company; and (iii) may not make, or permit any Restricted Subsidiary to
make, any Investment in, or payment on a Guarantee of any obligation of, any
Person, other than the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company, except
for Permitted Investments (each of clauses (i) through (iii) being a "Restricted
Payment") if: (1) any accrued and payable dividends (including dividends for the
then current dividend period) with respect to the Series A Preferred Stock or
any Parity Stock have not been paid (or deemed paid) in full and funds for such
payment have not been set apart shall have occurred and is continuing; or (2)
upon giving effect to such Restricted Payment, the Company could not Incur at
least $1.00 of additional Debt pursuant to the covenant described in paragraph
(a) of "-- Limitation on Debt" above; or (3) upon giving effect to such
Restricted Payment, the aggregate amount of all Restricted Payments from the
Issue Date exceeds the sum of: (a) (x) Consolidated Cash Flow Available for
Fixed Charges since the end of the last full fiscal quarter prior to the Issue
Date through the last day of the last full fiscal quarter ending immediately
preceding the date of such Restricted Payment (the "Calculation Period") minus
(y) 1.5 times Consolidated Interest Expense for the Calculation Period; plus (b)
the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds received by the Company from the issuance or
sale of its Junior Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) subsequent to the Issue
Date (other than an issuance or sale to a Subsidiary of the Company and other
than an issuance or sale to an employee stock ownership plan or a trust
established by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries for the benefit of their
employees); plus (c) the amount by which Debt of the Company is reduced on the
Company's balance sheet upon the conversion or exchange (other than by a
Subsidiary of the Company) subsequent to the Issue Date of any Debt of the
Company convertible or exchangeable for Junior Stock (other than Disqualified
Stock) of the Company (less the amount of any cash, or the fair value of any
property, distributed by the Company upon such conversion or exchange); plus (d)
$5 million.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, (i) the Company may pay any dividend on
Capital Stock of any class within 60 days after the declaration thereof if, on
the date when the dividend was declared, the Company could have paid such
dividend in accordance with the foregoing provisions; (ii) the Company may
repurchase any shares of its Common Stock or options to acquire its Common Stock
from Persons who are currently or were formerly directors, officers or employees
of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary, provided that the aggregate amount
of all such repurchases made pursuant to this clause (ii) shall not exceed (a)
$1 million in any calendar year and (b) $5 million in the aggregate; (iii) the
Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries may refinance any Debt otherwise
permitted by clause (vi) of paragraph (b) under "-- Limitation on Debt" above;
(iv) the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries may retire or repurchase any
Junior Stock of the Company or any Capital Stock of any Restricted Subsidiary of
the Company in exchange for, or out of the proceeds of the substantially
concurrent sale (other than to a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company) of,
Junior Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company; and (v) the Company
may pay the dividend of $5 million declared on July 15, 1998. If the Company
makes a Restricted Payment which,
100
106
at the time of the making of such Restricted Payment, would in the good faith
determination of the Company be permitted under the Certificate of Designation,
such Restricted Payment shall be deemed to have been made in compliance with the
Certificate of Designation notwithstanding any subsequent adjustments made in
good faith to the Company financial statements affecting Consolidated Cash Flow
Available for Fixed Charges or Consolidated Interest Expense for any period.
LIMITATION ON ASSET DISPOSITIONS
The Company may not, and may not permit any Restricted Subsidiary to, make
any Asset Disposition in one or more related transactions occurring within any
12-month period unless: (i) the Company or the Restricted Subsidiary, as the
case may be, receives consideration for such disposition at least equal to the
fair market value for the assets sold or disposed of as determined by management
of the Company in good faith, which determination shall be conclusive; (ii) at
least 75% of the consideration for such disposition consists of (1) cash or
readily marketable cash equivalents or the assumption of Debt of the Company or
of the Restricted Subsidiary and release from all liability on the Debt assumed;
(2) Telecommunications Assets; or (3) shares of publicly-traded Voting Stock of
any Person engaged in the Telecommunications Business in the United States; and
(iii) all Net Available Proceeds, less any amounts invested within 365 days of
such disposition in new Telecommunications Assets, are applied within 365 days
of such disposition (1) first, to the permanent repayment or reduction of Debt
(other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company or Debt (other than Disqualified
Stock) of a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company, to the extent permitted under
the terms thereof and (2) second, to the extent of remaining Net Available
Proceeds, to make an Offer to Purchase outstanding shares of Series A Preferred
Stock at 100% of the Specified Amount thereof plus, without duplication, an
amount in cash equal to all accumulated and unpaid dividends (including Special
Dividends and an amount in cash equal to a prorated dividend for any partial
dividend period), if any, to the date of purchase (subject to the rights of
holders of record on the relevant record date to receive dividends due on the
relevant dividend payment date), and, to the extent required by the terms
thereof, any other Parity Stock of the Company at a price no greater than 100%
of the liquidation preference thereof plus accumulated dividends to the date of
purchase. To the extent any Net Available Proceeds remain after such uses, the
Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries may use such amounts for any purposes
not prohibited by the Certificate of Designation. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
these provisions shall not apply to any Asset Disposition which constitutes a
transfer, conveyance, sale, lease or other disposition of all or substantially
all the Company's properties or assets as described under "-- Mergers,
Consolidations and Certain Sales of Assets".
TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES AND RELATED PERSONS
The Company may not, and may not permit any Restricted Subsidiary of the
Company to, enter into any transaction (or series of related transactions) with
an Affiliate or Related Person of the Company (other than the Company or a
Restricted Subsidiary of the Company), including any Investment, either directly
or indirectly, unless such transaction is on terms no less favorable to the
Company or such Restricted Subsidiary than those that could be obtained in a
comparable arm's-length transaction with an entity that is not an Affiliate or
Related Person and is in the best interests of such Company or such Restricted
Subsidiary. For any transaction that involves in excess of $1 million but less
than or equal to $5 million, the Chief Executive Officer of the Company or a
majority of the disinterested members of the Board of Directors of the Company
shall determine that the transaction satisfies the above criteria. For any
transaction that involves in excess of $5 million but less than or equal to $10
million, a majority of the disinterested members of the Board of Directors of
the Company shall determine that the transaction satisfies the above criteria.
For any transaction that involves in excess of $10 million, the Company shall
also obtain an opinion from a nationally recognized investment banking or
accounting firm or another nationally recognized expert with experience in
appraising the terms and conditions, taken as a whole, of the type of
transaction (or series of related transactions) for which the opinion is
required stating that such transaction (or
101
107
series of related transactions) is on terms and conditions, taken as a whole, no
less favorable to the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary than those that
could be obtained in a comparable arm's-length transaction with an entity that
is not an Affiliate or Related Person of the Company, which opinion shall be
available for inspection by holders of Series A Preferred Stock at the Company's
offices. This covenant shall not apply to Investments by an Affiliate or a
Related Person of the Company in the Capital Stock (other than Disqualified
Stock) of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company.
CHANGE OF CONTROL
The Certificate of Designation will provide that, within 30 days of the
occurrence of a Change of Control, the Company shall make an Offer to Purchase
all outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock at a purchase price equal to
101% of the liquidation preference thereof plus accumulated and unpaid
dividends, if any, to the date of purchase (subject to the rights of holders of
record on the relevant record date to receive dividends due on the relevant
dividend payment date).
A "Change of Control" will be deemed to have occurred at such time as
either (a) any Person or any Persons acting together (other than Permitted
Holders or an underwriter engaged in a firm commitment underwriting on behalf of
the Company) that would constitute a "group" (a "Group") for purposes of Section
13(d) of the Exchange Act, or any successor provision thereto, shall
beneficially own (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act, or
any successor provision thereto) more than 50% of the aggregate voting power of
all classes of Voting Stock of the Company or (b) during any period of two
consecutive years, individuals who at the beginning of such period constituted
the Board of Directors (together with any new directors whose election by the
Board of Directors or whose nomination by the Board of Directors for election by
the Company's stockholders was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the
members of the Board of Directors then in office who either were members of the
Board of Directors at the beginning of such period or whose election or
nomination for election was previously so approved) cease for any reason to
constitute a majority of the members of the Board of Directors then in office.
Except as described above with respect to a Change of Control, the
Certificate of Designation does not contain provisions that permit the Holders
of the Series A Preferred Stock to require that the Company repurchase or redeem
the Series A Preferred Stock in the event of a takeover, recapitalization or
similar restructuring.
The Company does not currently have adequate financial resources to effect
a repurchase of the Series A Preferred Stock upon a Change of Control and there
can be no assurance that the Company will have such resources in the future. The
inability of the Company to repurchase the Series A Preferred Stock upon
acceptance of the Offer to Purchase made following a Change of Control would
constitute a Voting Rights Triggering Event.
In addition, there may be restrictions contained in instruments evidencing
Debt incurred by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries permitted under the
Certificate of Designation which restrict or prohibit the ability of the Company
to effect any repurchase required under the Certificate of Designation in
connection with a Change of Control.
In the event that the Company makes an Offer to Purchase the Series A
Preferred Stock, the Company intends to comply with any applicable securities
laws and regulations, including any applicable requirements of Section 14(e) of,
and Rule 13e-4 and Rule 14e-1 under, the Exchange Act.
PROVISION OF FINANCIAL INFORMATION
The Company has agreed that, for so long as any Series A Preferred Stock
remains outstanding, it will furnish to the holders of the Series A Preferred
Stock and to securities analysts and prospective investors, upon their request,
the information required to be delivered pursuant to
102
108
Rule 144A(d)(4) under the Securities Act. In addition, prior to the
effectiveness of the Exchange Offer Registration Statement, the Company will
furnish to the holders of the Series A Preferred Stock the quarterly and annual
financial statements and related notes and an accompanying Management's
Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations in the
format that would be required to be included in the Company's periodic reports
filed with the Commission if the Company were required to file such reports with
the Commission. The Company will furnish such information to the holders of the
Series A Preferred Stock within 15 days after the date on which the Company
would have been required to file the same with the Commission. Following the
effectiveness of the Exchange Offer Registration Statement (or earlier if the
Company becomes obligated to file reports with the Commission), the Company will
furnish to the holders of the Series A Preferred Stock within 15 days after it
files them with the Commission copies of the annual and quarterly reports and
the information, documents, and other reports that the Company is required to
file with the Commission pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Exchange Act
("SEC Reports"). In the event the Company shall cease to be required to file SEC
Reports pursuant to the Exchange Act, the Company will nevertheless continue to
file such reports with the Commission (unless the Commission will not accept
such a filing) and furnish such reports to the holders of Series A Preferred
Stock. The Company will make copies of the SEC Reports available to investors
who request them in writing.
MERGERS, CONSOLIDATIONS AND CERTAIN SALES OF ASSETS
The Company may not, in a single transaction or a series of related
transactions, (i) consolidate with or merge into any other Person or permit any
other Person to consolidate with or merge into the Company (other than the
consolidation or merger of a Restricted Subsidiary organized under the laws of a
State of the United States into the Company), or (ii) directly or indirectly,
transfer, sell, lease or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all its
assets (determined on a consolidated basis for the Company and its Restricted
Subsidiaries taken as a whole), unless: (1) in a transaction in which the
Company does not survive or in which the Company sells, leases or otherwise
disposes of all or substantially all its assets to any other Person, the
successor entity to the Company is organized under the laws of the United States
of America or any State thereof or the District of Columbia and the Series A
Preferred Stock shall be converted into or exchanged for and shall become shares
of such successor entity, having in respect of such successor entity the same
powers, preferences and relative participating, optional or other special rights
and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions thereon, that the Series A
Preferred Stock had immediately prior to such transaction; (2) immediately after
giving pro forma effect to such transaction as if such transaction had occurred
at the beginning of the last full fiscal quarter immediately prior to the
consummation of such transaction with the appropriate adjustments with respect
to the transaction being included in such pro forma calculation and treating any
Debt which becomes an obligation of the Company or a Subsidiary as a result of
such transaction as having been Incurred by the Company or such Subsidiary at
the time of the transaction, no Voting Rights Triggering Event, and no event
that after the giving of notice or lapse of time or both would become a Voting
Rights Triggering Event, shall have occurred and be continuing; (3) immediately
after giving effect to such transaction, the Consolidated Net Worth of the
Company (or the successor entity to the Company) is equal to or greater than
that of the Company immediately prior to the transaction; (4) immediately after
giving effect to such transaction, the Company (or the successor entity to the
Company) would be able to incur an additional $1.00 of Debt under paragraph (a)
of the Covenant described under "-- Limitation on Debt" above; and (5) the
Company has caused to be delivered to the holders of the Series A Preferred
Stock an Opinion of Counsel to the effect that the holders of the Series A
Preferred Stock will not recognize gain or loss for Federal income tax purposes
as a result of such transaction.
In the event of any transaction (other than a lease) described in and
complying with the immediately preceding paragraph in which the Company is not
the surviving person and the surviving person complies with clause (1) of the
preceding paragraph, such surviving person shall succeed to, and be substituted
for, and may exercise every right and power of, the Company, and
103
109
the Company will be discharged from its obligations under the Series A Preferred
Stock and the Certificate of Designation; provided that solely for the purpose
of calculating amounts described in clause (3) under the covenant described
under "Covenant -- Limitations on Restricted Payments", any such surviving
person shall only be deemed to have succeeded to and be substituted for the
Company with respect to the period subsequent to the effective time of such
transaction, and the Company (before giving effect to such transaction) shall be
deemed to be the "Company" for such purposes for all prior periods.
The meaning of the phrase "all or substantially all" as used above varies
according to the facts and circumstances of the subject transaction, has no
clearly established meaning under relevant law and is subject to judicial
interpretation. Accordingly, in certain circumstances, there may be a degree of
uncertainty in ascertaining whether a particular transaction would involve a
disposition of "all or substantially all" the assets of the Company, and
therefore it may be unclear whether the foregoing provisions are applicable.
CERTAIN DEFINITIONS
Set forth below is a summary of certain of the defined terms used in the
Certificate of Designation. Reference is made to the Certificate of Designation
for the full definition of all such terms, as well as any other terms used
herein for which no definition is provided.
"Acquired Debt" means, with respect to any specified Person, (i) Debt of
any other Person existing at the time such Person merges with or into or
consolidates with or becomes a Restricted Subsidiary of such specified Person
and (ii) Debt secured by a Lien encumbering any asset acquired by such specified
Person, which Debt, in each case, was not Incurred in anticipation of, and was
outstanding prior to, such merger, consolidation or acquisition.
"Affiliate" of any Person means any other Person directly or indirectly
controlling or controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with
such Person. For the purposes of this definition, "control" when used with
respect to any Person means the power to direct the management and policies of
such Person, directly or indirectly, whether through the ownership of voting
securities, by contract or otherwise; and the terms "controlling" and
"controlled" have meanings correlative to the foregoing.
"Asset Disposition" by any Person means any transfer, conveyance, sale,
lease or other disposition by such Person or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries
(including a consolidation or merger or other sale of any such Restricted
Subsidiary with, into or to another Person in a transaction in which such
Restricted Subsidiary ceases to be a Restricted Subsidiary of the specified
Person, but excluding a disposition by a Restricted Subsidiary of such Person to
such Person or a Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiary of such Person or by such
Person to a Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiary of such Person) of (i) shares of
Capital Stock or other ownership interests of a Restricted Subsidiary of such
Person (other than pursuant to a transaction in compliance with the covenant
described under "-- Mergers, Consolidations and Certain Sales of Assets" above),
(ii) substantially all the assets of such Person or any of its Restricted
Subsidiaries representing a division or line of business (other than as part of
a Permitted Investment) or (iii) other assets or rights of such Person or any of
its Restricted Subsidiaries other than (A) in the ordinary course of business,
(B) that constitute a Permitted Investment or a Restricted Payment which is
permitted under the covenant "-- Limitation on Restricted Payments" above or (C)
pursuant to or in connection with Receivables Sales under, or Debt in connection
with Permitted Receivables Facilities permitted to be Incurred pursuant to the
covenant described under "-- Limitation on Debt"; provided that a transaction
described in clauses (i), (ii) and (iii) shall constitute an Asset Disposition
only if the aggregate consideration for such transfer, conveyance, sale, lease
or other disposition is equal to $1 million or more in any 12-month period.
"Attributable Value" means, as to any particular lease under which any
Person is at the time liable other than a Capital Lease Obligation, and at any
date as of which the amount thereof is to be
104
110
determined, the total net amount of rent required to be paid by such Person
under such lease during the initial term thereof as determined in accordance
with generally accepted accounting principles, discounted from the last date of
such initial term to the date of determination at a rate per annum equal to the
discount rate which would be applicable to a Capital Lease Obligation with like
term in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. The net amount
of rent required to be paid under any such lease for any such period shall be
the aggregate amount of rent payable by the lessee with respect to such period
after excluding amounts required to be paid on account of insurance, taxes,
assessments, utility, operating and labor costs and similar charges. In the case
of any lease which is terminable by the lessee upon the payment of a penalty,
such net amount shall also include the lesser of the amount of such penalty (in
which case no rent shall be considered as required to be paid under such lease
subsequent to the first date upon which it may be so terminated) or the rent
which would otherwise be required to be paid if such lease is not so terminated.
"Attributable Value" means, as to a Capital Lease Obligation, the principal
amount thereof.
"Bank Credit Agreement" means any one or more (i) credit agreements (which
may include or consist of revolving credits) between the Company and/or any
Restricted Subsidiary of the Company and one or more banks or other financial
institutions providing financing for the business of the Company and its
Restricted Subsidiaries and (ii) Permitted Receivables Facilities, which credit
agreements and Permitted Receivables Facilities provide for borrowings by the
Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries in an aggregate principal amount
outstanding at any one time not to exceed $100 million, and any renewal,
extension, refinancing or refunding thereof in an amount which, together with
any principal amount remaining outstanding or available under all credit
agreements and Permitted Receivables Facilities of the Company and its
Restricted Subsidiaries, plus the amount of any premium required to be paid in
connection with such refinancing pursuant to the terms of any credit agreement
or Permitted Receivables Facility so refinanced plus the amount of expenses
incurred in connection with such refinancing, does not exceed the aggregate
principal amount outstanding or available under all such credit agreements and
Permitted Receivables Facilities of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries
immediately prior to such renewal, extension, refinancing or refunding.
"Capital Lease Obligation" of any Person means the obligation to pay rent
or other payment amounts under a lease of (or other Debt arrangements conveying
the right to use) real or personal property of such Person which is required to
be classified and accounted for as a capital lease or a liability on the face of
a balance sheet of such Person in accordance with generally accepted accounting
principles (a "Capital Lease"). The stated maturity of such obligation shall be
the date of the last payment of rent or any other amount due under such lease
prior to the first date upon which such lease may be terminated by the lessee
without payment of a penalty. The principal amount of such obligation shall be
the capitalized amount thereof that would appear on the face of a balance sheet
of such Person in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.
"Capital Stock" of any Person means any and all shares, interests,
participations or other equivalents (however designated) of corporate stock or
other equity participations, including partnership interests, whether general or
limited, of such Person.
"Common Stock" of any Person means Capital Stock of such Person that is not
Disqualified Stock.
"Consolidated Cash Flow Available for Fixed Charges" for any period means
the Consolidated Net Income of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for
such period increased by the sum of (i) Consolidated Interest Expense of the
Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period, plus (ii) Consolidated
Income Tax Expense of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such
period, plus (iii) the consolidated depreciation and amortization expense
included in the income statement of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries
for such period plus (iv) any non-cash expense related to the issuance to
employees of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of the
105
111
Company of options to purchase Capital Stock of the Company or such Restricted
Subsidiary, plus (v) any charge related to any premium or penalty paid in
connection with redeeming or retiring any Debt prior to its stated maturity;
provided, however, that there shall be excluded therefrom the Consolidated Cash
Flow Available for Fixed Charges (if positive) of any Restricted Subsidiary of
the Company (calculated separately for such Restricted Subsidiary in the same
manner as provided above for the Company) that is subject to a restriction which
prevents the payment of dividends or the making of distributions to the Company
or another Restricted Subsidiary of the Company to the extent of such
restriction.
"Consolidated Income Tax Expense" for any period means the consolidated
provision for income taxes of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for
such period calculated on a consolidated basis in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles.
"Consolidated Interest Expense" means for any period the consolidated
interest expense included in a consolidated income statement (excluding interest
income) of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period
calculated on a consolidated basis in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles, including without limitation or duplication (or, to the
extent not so included, with the addition of), (i) the amortization of Debt
discounts; (ii) any payments or fees with respect to letters of credit, bankers'
acceptances or similar facilities; (iii) fees with respect to interest rate swap
or similar agreements or foreign currency hedge, exchange or similar agreements;
(iv) dividends on Preferred Stock of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries
held by Persons other than the Company or a Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiary
(other than dividends paid in shares of Preferred Stock that is not Disqualified
Stock) declared and paid or payable; (v) accrued Disqualified Stock dividends of
the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, whether or not declared or paid;
(vi) interest on Debt guaranteed by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries;
and (vii) the portion of any Capital Lease Obligation paid during such period
that is allocable to interest expense.
"Consolidated Net Income" for any period means the consolidated net income
(or loss) of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period
determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles; provided that there shall be excluded therefrom (a) the
net income (or loss) of any Person acquired by the Company or a Restricted
Subsidiary of the Company in a pooling-of-interests transaction for any period
prior to the date of such transaction, (b) the net income (or loss) of any
Person that is not a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company except to the extent
of the amount of dividends or other distributions actually paid to the Company
or a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company by such Person during such period, (c)
gains or losses on Asset Dispositions by the Company or its Restricted
Subsidiaries, (d) all extraordinary gains and extraordinary losses, (e) the
cumulative effect of changes in accounting principles, (f) non-cash gains or
losses resulting from fluctuations in currency exchange rates, (g) any non-cash
gain or loss realized on the termination of any employee pension benefit plan
and (h) the tax effect of any of the items described in clauses (a) through (g)
above; provided, further, that for purposes of any determination pursuant to the
covenant described under "Covenants -- Limitation on Restricted Payments," there
shall further be excluded therefrom the net income (but not net loss) of any
Restricted Subsidiary of the Company that is subject to a restriction which
prevents the payment of dividends or the making of distributions to the Company
or another Restricted Subsidiary of the Company to the extent of such
restriction.
"Consolidated Net Worth" of any Person means the consolidated stockholders'
equity of such Person, determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with
generally accepted accounting principles, less amounts attributable to
Disqualified Stock of such Person.
"Debt" means (without duplication), with respect to any Person, whether
recourse is to all or a portion of the assets of such Person and whether or not
contingent, (i) every obligation of such Person for money borrowed, (ii) every
obligation of such Person evidenced by bonds, debentures, notes or other similar
instruments, including any such obligations Incurred in connection with the
106
112
acquisition of property, assets or businesses, (iii) every reimbursement
obligation of such Person with respect to letters of credit, bankers'
acceptances or similar facilities issued for the account of such Person, (iv)
every obligation of such Person issued or assumed as the deferred purchase price
of property or services (including securities repurchase agreements but
excluding trade accounts payable or accrued liabilities arising in the ordinary
course of business which are not overdue or which are being contested in good
faith), (v) every Capital Lease Obligation of such Person and all Attributable
Value in respect of a Sale and Leaseback Transaction of such Person, (vi) all
Receivables Sales of such Person, together with any obligation of such Person to
pay any discount, interest, fees, indemnities, penalties, recourse, expenses or
other amounts in connection therewith, (vii) all obligations to redeem
Disqualified Stock issued by such Person, (viii) every obligation under Interest
Rate or Currency Protection Agreements of such Person and (ix) every obligation
of the type referred to in clauses (i) through (viii) of another Person and all
dividends of another Person the payment of which, in either case, such Person
has Guaranteed. The "amount" or "principal amount" of Debt at any time of
determination as used herein represented by (a) any Debt issued at a price that
is less than the principal amount at maturity thereof, shall be the amount of
the liability in respect thereof determined in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles, (b) any Receivables Sale, shall be the amount of
the unrecovered capital or principal investment of the purchaser (other than the
Company or a Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiary of the Company) thereof,
excluding amounts representative of yield or interest earned on such investment,
(c) any Disqualified Stock, shall be the maximum fixed redemption or repurchase
price in respect thereof, (d) any Capital Lease Obligation, shall be determined
in accordance with the definition thereof, or (e) any Permitted Interest Rate or
Currency Protection Agreement, shall be zero. In no event shall Debt include any
liability for taxes.
"Disqualified Stock" of any Person means any Capital Stock of such Person
which, by its terms (or by the terms of any security into which it is
convertible or for which it is exchangeable), or upon the happening of any
event, matures or is mandatorily redeemable, pursuant to a sinking fund
obligation or otherwise, or is redeemable at the option of such Person, any
Restricted Subsidiary of such Person or the holder thereof, in whole or in part,
on or prior to the final Stated Maturity of the Series A Preferred Stock;
provided, however, that any Preferred Stock which would not constitute
Disqualified Stock but for provisions thereof giving holders thereof the right
to require the Company to repurchase or redeem such Preferred Stock upon the
occurrence of a Change of Control occurring prior to September 1, 2009 shall not
constitute Disqualified Stock if the change of control provisions applicable to
such Preferred Stock are no more favorable to the holders of such Preferred
Stock than the provisions applicable to the Series A Preferred Stock contained
in the covenant described under "Covenants -- Change of Control" and such
Preferred Stock specifically provides that the Company will not repurchase or
redeem any such stock pursuant to such provisions prior to the Company's
repurchase of such number of shares of Series A Preferred Stock as are required
to be repurchased pursuant to the covenant described under "Covenants -- Change
of Control".
"Eligible Institution" means a commercial banking institution that has
combined capital and surplus of not less than $500 million or its equivalent in
foreign currency, whose debt is rated "A-3" or higher, "A-" or higher or "A-" or
higher according to Moody's Investors Service, Inc., Standard & Poor's Ratings
Group or Duff & Phelps Credit Rating Co. (or such similar equivalent rating by
at least one "nationally recognized statistical rating organization" (as defined
in Rule 436 under the Securities Act)), respectively, at the time as of which
any investment or rollover therein is made.
"Exchange Act" means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (or
any successor act) and the rules and regulations thereunder.
"Government Securities" means direct obligations of, or obligations
guaranteed by, the United States of America for the payment of which obligations
or guarantee the full faith and credit of the
107
113
United States is pledged and which have a remaining weighted average life to
maturity of not more than one year from the date of Investment therein.
"Guarantee" by any Person means any obligation, contingent or otherwise, of
such Person guaranteeing, or having the economic effect of guaranteeing, any
Debt of any other Person (the "primary obligor") in any manner, whether directly
or indirectly, and including, without limitation, any obligation of such Person,
(i) to purchase or pay (or advance or supply funds for the purchase or payment
of) such Debt or to purchase (or to advance or supply funds for the purchase of)
any security for the payment of such Debt, (ii) to purchase property, securities
or services for the purpose of assuring the holder of such Debt of the payment
of such Debt, or (iii) to maintain working capital, equity capital or other
financial statement condition or liquidity of the primary obligor so as to
enable the primary obligor to pay such Debt (and "Guaranteed", "Guaranteeing"
and "Guarantor" shall have meanings correlative to the foregoing); provided,
however, that the Guarantee by any Person shall not include endorsements by such
Person for collection or deposit, in either case, in the ordinary course of
business.
"Hale Family" means collectively Robert T. Hale, Robert T. Hale, Jr. and
members of their immediate families; any of their respective spouses, estates,
lineal descendants, heirs, executors, personal representatives, administrators,
trusts for any of their benefit and charitable foundations to which shares of
the Company's Capital Stock beneficially owned by any of the foregoing have been
transferred; and any corporation or partnership, all of the Capital Stock of
which is owned by one or more of the foregoing Persons.
"Incur" means, with respect to any Debt or other obligation of any Person,
to create, issue, incur (by conversion, exchange or otherwise), assume,
Guarantee or otherwise become liable in respect of such Debt or other obligation
including by acquisition of Subsidiaries or the recording, as required pursuant
to generally accepted accounting principles or otherwise, of any such Debt or
other obligation on the balance sheet of such Person (and "Incurrence",
"Incurred", "Incurrable" and "Incurring" shall have meanings correlative to the
foregoing); provided, however, that a change in generally accepted accounting
principles that results in an obligation of such Person that exists at such time
becoming Debt shall not be deemed an Incurrence of such Debt and that neither
the accrual of interest nor the accretion of original issue discount shall be
deemed an Incurrence of Debt; provided further, however, that the Company may
elect to treat all or any portion of revolving credit debt of the Company or a
Subsidiary as being Incurred from and after any date beginning the date the
revolving credit commitment is extended to the Company or a Subsidiary, by
memorializing such determination in the corporate records of the Company, and
any borrowings or reborrowings by the Company or a Subsidiary under such
commitment up to the amount of such commitment designated by the Company as
Incurred shall not be deemed to be new Incurrences of Debt by the Company or
such Subsidiary.
"Interest Rate or Currency Protection Agreement" of any Person means any
forward contract, futures contract, swap, option or other financial agreement or
arrangement (including, without limitation, caps, floors, collars and similar
agreements) relating to, or the value of which is dependent upon, interest rates
or currency exchange rates or indices.
"Investment" by any Person means any direct or indirect loan, advance or
other extension of credit or capital contribution (by means of transfers of cash
or other property to others or payments for property or services for the account
or use of others, or otherwise) to, or purchase or acquisition of Capital Stock,
bonds, notes, debentures or other securities or evidence of Debt issued by, any
other Person, including any payment on a Guarantee of any obligation of such
other Person, but excluding any loan, advance or extension of credit to an
employee of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in the ordinary
course of business, accounts receivables and other commercially reasonable
extensions of trade credit.
"Issue Date" means the first date on which any shares of Series A Preferred
Stock are issued pursuant to the Certificate of Designation.
108
114
"Lien" means, with respect to any property or assets, any mortgage or deed
of trust, pledge, hypothecation, assignment, Receivables Sale, deposit
arrangement, security interest, lien, charge, easement (other than any easement
not materially impairing usefulness or marketability), encumbrance, preference,
priority or other security agreement or preferential arrangement of any kind or
nature whatsoever on or with respect to such property or assets (including,
without limitation, any conditional sale or other title retention agreement
having substantially the same economic effect as any of the foregoing).
"Marketable Securities" means: (i) Government Securities; (ii) any time
deposit account, money market deposit and certificate of deposit maturing not
more than 270 days after the date of acquisition issued by, or time deposit of,
an Eligible Institution; (iii) commercial paper maturing not more than 270 days
after the date of acquisition issued by a corporation (other than an Affiliate
of the Company) with a rating, at the time as of which any investment therein is
made, of "P-1" or higher according to Moody's Investors Service, Inc., "A-1" or
higher according to Standard & Poor's Ratings Group or "A-1" or higher according
to Duff & Phelps Credit Rating Co. (or such similar equivalent rating by at
least one "nationally recognized statistical rating organization" (as defined in
Rule 436 under the Securities Act)); (iv) any banker's acceptances or money
market deposit accounts issued or offered by an Eligible Institution; (v)
repurchase obligations with a term of not more than 7 days for Government
Securities entered into with an Eligible Institution; and (vi) any fund
investing primarily in investments of the types described in clauses (i) through
(v) above.
"Net Available Proceeds" from any Asset Disposition by any Person means
cash or readily marketable cash equivalents received (including by way of sale
or discounting of a note, installment receivable or other receivable, but
excluding any other consideration received in the form of assumption by the
acquiror of Debt or other obligations relating to such properties or assets)
therefrom by such Person, net of (i) all legal, title and recording tax
expenses, commissions and other fees and expenses (including appraisals,
commissions, investment banking fees, and accounting, legal, broker and finder's
fees) Incurred and all Federal, state, provincial, foreign and local taxes
(including taxes payable upon payment or other distribution of funds from a
foreign subsidiary to the Company or another subsidiary of the Company) required
to be accrued as a liability as a consequence of such Asset Disposition, (ii)
all payments made by such Person or its Restricted Subsidiaries on any Debt
which is secured by such assets in accordance with the terms of any Lien upon or
with respect to such assets or which must by the terms of such Lien, or in order
to obtain a necessary consent to such Asset Disposition or by applicable law, be
repaid out of the proceeds from such Asset Disposition, (iii) all distributions
and other payments made to minority interest holders in Restricted Subsidiaries
of such Person or joint ventures as a result of such Asset Disposition, (iv)
appropriate amounts to be provided by such Person or any Restricted Subsidiary
thereof, as the case may be, as a reserve in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles against any liabilities associated with such assets and
retained by such Person or any Restricted Subsidiary thereof, as the case may
be, after such Asset Disposition, including, without limitation, liabilities
under any indemnification obligations and severance and other employee
termination costs associated with such Asset Disposition, in each case as
determined by management of the Company, in its reasonable good faith judgment;
provided, however, that any reduction in such reserve within 12 months following
the consummation of such Asset Disposition will be treated for all purposes of
the Certificate of Designation as a new Asset Disposition at the time of such
reduction with Net Available Proceeds equal to the amount of such reduction, and
(v) any consideration for an Asset Disposition (which would otherwise constitute
Net Available Proceeds) that is required to be held in escrow pending
determination of whether a purchase price adjustment will be made, but amounts
under this clause (v) shall become Net Available Proceeds at such time and to
the extent such amounts are released to such Person.
"Net Cash Proceeds" means the proceeds of any issuance or sale of Capital
Stock in the form of cash or cash equivalents, including payments in respect of
deferred payment obligations (to the extent corresponding to the principal, but
not interest, component thereof) when received in the
109
115
form of cash or cash equivalents (except to the extent such obligations are
financed or sold with recourse to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary) and
proceeds from the conversion of other property received when converted to cash
or cash equivalents, net of attorney's fees, accountants' fees, underwriters' or
placement agents' fees, discounts or commissions and brokerage, consultant and
other fees incurred in connection with such issuance or sale and net of taxes
paid or payable as a result thereof.
"Offer to Purchase" means a written offer (the "Offer") sent by the Company
by first-class mail, postage prepaid, to each holder at his address appearing in
the Stock Register on the date of the Offer offering to purchase up to the
number of shares of Series A Preferred Stock having the aggregate liquidation
preference specified in such Offer at the purchase price specified in such Offer
(as determined pursuant to the Certificate of Designation). Unless otherwise
required by applicable law, the Offer shall specify an expiration date (the
"Expiration Date") of the Offer to Purchase which shall be, subject to any
contrary requirements of applicable law, not less than 30 days or more than 60
days after the date of such Offer and a settlement date (the "Purchase Date")
for purchase of shares of Series A Preferred Stock within five Business Days
after the Expiration Date. The Offer shall contain information concerning the
business of the Company and its Subsidiaries which the Company in good faith
believes will enable such holders to make an informed decision with respect to
the Offer to Purchase (which at a minimum will include (i) the most recent
annual and quarterly financial statements and "Management's Discussion and
Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations" contained in the
documents required to be filed with the Commission, (ii) a description of
material developments in the Company's business subsequent to the date of the
latest of such financial statements referred to in clause (i) (including a
description of the events requiring the Company to make the Offer to Purchase),
(iii) if applicable, appropriate pro forma financial information concerning the
Offer to Purchase and the events requiring the Company to make the Offer to
Purchase and (iv) any other information required by applicable law to be
included therein). The Offer shall contain all instructions and materials
necessary to enable such holders to tender shares of Series A Preferred Stock
pursuant to the Offer to Purchase. The Offer shall also state:
a. the paragraph of the Certificate of Designation pursuant to which
the Offer to Purchase is being made;
b. the Expiration Date and the Purchase Date;
c. the aggregate number of shares of Series A Preferred Stock offered
to be purchased by the Company pursuant to the Offer to Purchase
(including, if less than 100%, the manner by which such has been determined
pursuant to the Certificate of Designation provision requiring the Offer to
Purchase) (the "Purchase Amount");
d. the purchase price to be paid by the Company for the Specified
Amount of shares of Series A Preferred Stock accepted for payment (as
specified pursuant to the Certificate of Designation) (the "Purchase
Price");
e. that the holder may tender all or any portion of the shares of
Series A Preferred Stock registered in the name of such holder;
f. the place or places where shares of Series A Preferred Stock are to
be surrendered for tender pursuant to the Offer to Purchase;
g. that dividends on any shares of Series A Preferred Stock not
tendered or tendered but not purchased by the Company pursuant to the Offer
to Purchase will continue to accumulate;
h. that on the Purchase Date the Purchase Price will become due and
payable upon each share of Series A Preferred Stock being accepted for
payment pursuant to the Offer to Purchase and that dividends thereon shall
cease to accumulate on and after the Purchase Date;
110
116
i. that each holder electing to tender a share of Series A Preferred
Stock pursuant to the Offer to Purchase will be required to surrender such
share of Series A Preferred Stock at the place or places specified in the
Offer prior to the close of business on the Expiration Date (such share of
Series A Preferred Stock being, if the Company so requires, duly endorsed
by, or accompanied by a written instrument of transfer in form satisfactory
to the Company duly executed by, the holder thereof or his attorney duly
authorized in writing);
j. that holders will be entitled to withdraw all or any portion of
shares of Series A Preferred Stock tendered if the Company receives, not
later than the close of business on the Expiration Date, a telegram, telex,
facsimile transmission or letter setting forth the name of the holder, the
number of shares of Series A Preferred Stock the holder tendered, the
certificate number of the shares the holder tendered and a statement that
such holder is withdrawing all or a portion of his tender;
k. that (a) if shares of Series A Preferred Stock in an aggregate
number less than or equal to the Purchase Amount are duly tendered and not
withdrawn pursuant to the Offer to Purchase, the Company shall purchase all
such shares of Series A Preferred Stock and (b) if shares of Series A
Preferred Stock in an aggregate number in excess of the Purchase Amount are
tendered and not withdrawn pursuant to the Offer to Purchase, the Company
shall purchase shares of Series A Preferred Stock equal to the Purchase
Amount on a pro rata basis (with such adjustments as may be deemed
appropriate so that only whole shares shall be purchased); and
l. that in the case of any holder whose shares of Series A Preferred
Stock are purchased only in part, the Company shall return all such
unpurchased shares or execute and deliver to the holder of such shares
without service charge, new shares as requested by such holder, in an
aggregate liquidation preference equal to and in exchange for the
unpurchased portion of the shares so tendered.
Any Offer to Purchase shall be governed by and effected in accordance with
the Offer for such Offer to Purchase.
"Permitted Holders" means the Hale Family.
"Permitted Interest Rate or Currency Protection Agreement" of any Person
means any Interest Rate or Currency Protection Agreement entered into with one
or more financial institutions in the ordinary course of business that is
designed to protect such Person against fluctuations in interest rates or
currency exchange rates with respect to Debt Incurred and which shall have a
notional amount no greater than the payments due with respect to the Debt being
hedged thereby and not for purposes of speculation.
"Permitted Investment" means (i) any Investment in the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary, (ii) any Investment in any Person as a result of which
such Person becomes a Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiary, (iii) any Investment
in Marketable Securities, (iv) Investments in Permitted Interest Rate or
Currency Protection Agreements, (v) Investments made as a result of the receipt
of noncash consideration from an Asset Disposition that was made pursuant to and
in compliance with the covenant described under "Covenants -- Limitation on
Asset Dispositions" above, (vi) loans or advances to employees of the Company or
any Restricted Subsidiary that in the aggregate at any one time do not exceed $1
million, (vii) Strategic Investments in an amount not to exceed $5 million at
any one time outstanding and (viii) an amount equal to the sum of (a) $5 million
and (b) the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds received by the Company from the sale of
its Capital Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) subsequent to the Issue Date
(other than an issuance or sale to a Subsidiary of the Company and other than an
issuance or sale to an employee stock ownership plan or a trust established by
the Company or any of its Subsidiaries for the benefit of their employees) to
the extent such Net Cash Proceeds have not been used pursuant to clause (3)(b)
of the first
111
117
paragraph or clause (iv) of the second paragraph of the covenant described under
"-- Limitation on Restricted Payments" above.
"Permitted Receivables Facility" means a transaction pursuant to which any
Restricted Subsidiary transfers (pursuant to a sale, contribution to capital or
a combination thereof) to a Special Purpose Subsidiary Receivables and certain
related rights, and such Special Purpose Subsidiary securitizes such Receivables
and related rights pursuant to a loan agreement, receivables purchase agreement,
pooling and servicing agreement or similar contract with one or more commercial
paper conduits, banks, financial institutions or similar entities.
"Person" means any individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability
company, joint venture, association, joint stock company, trust, unincorporated
organization, government or agency or political subdivision thereof or any other
entity.
"Preferred Stock" of any Person means Capital Stock of such Person of any
class or classes (however designated) that ranks prior, as to the payment of
dividends or as to the distribution of assets upon any voluntary or involuntary
liquidation, dissolution or winding up of such Person, to shares of Capital
Stock of any other class of such Person.
"Public Equity Offering" means an underwritten primary public offering of
Common Stock of the Company pursuant to an effective registration statement
under the Securities Act (other than a registration statement on Form S-8 or any
successor form).
"Purchase Money Debt" means (i) Acquired Debt Incurred in connection with
the acquisition of Telecommunications Assets and (ii) Debt of the Company or of
any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company (including, without limitation, Debt
represented by Capital Lease Obligations, mortgage financings and purchase money
obligations) Incurred for the purpose of financing all or any part of the cost
of construction, acquisition, development, design, installation, integration,
transportation or improvement by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of the
Company of any Telecommunications Assets of the Company or any Restricted
Subsidiary of the Company, and including any related notes, Guarantees,
collateral documents, instruments and agreements executed in connection
therewith, as the same may be amended, supplemented, modified or restated from
time to time.
"Receivables" means receivables, chattel paper, instruments, documents or
intangibles evidencing or relating to the right to payment of money in respect
of the sale of goods or services.
"Receivables Sale" of any Person means any sale of Receivables of such
Person (pursuant to a purchase facility or otherwise), other than in connection
with a disposition of the business operations of such Person relating thereto or
a disposition of defaulted Receivables for purpose of collection and not as a
financing arrangement.
"Related Person" of any Person means any other Person directly or
indirectly owning (a) 10% or more of the outstanding Common Stock of such Person
(or, in the case of a Person that is not a corporation, 10% or more of the
equity interest in such Person) or (b) 10% or more of the combined voting power
of the Voting Stock of such Person.
"Restricted Subsidiary" of the Company means any Subsidiary, whether
existing on or after the Issue Date, unless such Subsidiary is an Unrestricted
Subsidiary.
"Sale and Leaseback Transaction" of any Person means an arrangement with
any lender or investor or to which such lender or investor is a party providing
for the leasing by such Person of any property or asset of such Person which has
been or is being sold or transferred by such Person more than 365 days after the
later of the acquisition thereof or the completion of construction or
commencement of operation thereof to such lender or investor or to any person to
whom funds have been or are to be advanced by such lender or investor on the
security of such property or asset. The stated maturity of such arrangement
shall be the date of the last payment of rent or any other amount due under such
arrangement prior to the first date on which such arrangement may be terminated
by the lessee without payment of a penalty.
112
118
"Senior Notes" means Debt of the Company having a maturity of at least six
years.
"Senior Notes Offering" means an offering (whether private or registered
under the Securities Act) of Senior Notes.
"Significant Subsidiary" means a Restricted Subsidiary that is a
"significant subsidiary" as defined in Rule 1-02(w) of Regulation S-X under the
Securities Act and the Exchange Act.
"Special Purpose Subsidiary" means a corporation, limited liability
company, partnership or business trust, all of the capital stock or other equity
interests therein are owned, directly or indirectly, by the Company or any
Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiary, that has been established for the purpose
of, and whose activities are limited to, the consummation of Receivables Sales
and activities incidental thereto.
"Specified Amount" means, on any date with respect to any share of Series A
Preferred Stock, the sum of (i) the Liquidation Preference with respect to such
share and (ii) the Accumulated Dividends with respect to such share that are
added automatically to the Specified Amount of such share.
"Strategic Investment" means (a) Investments that the Board of Directors
has determined in good faith will enable the Company or any of its Wholly Owned
Restricted Subsidiaries to obtain additional business that it might not be able
to obtain without making such Investment and (b) Investments in entities, the
principal function of which is to perform research and development with respect
to products and services that may be useful in the Telecommunications Business;
provided that the Company or one of its Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiaries is
entitled or otherwise reasonably expected to obtain rights to such products or
services as a result of such Investment.
"Subsidiary" of any Person means (i) a corporation more than 50% of the
combined voting power of the outstanding Voting Stock of which is owned,
directly or indirectly, by such Person or by one or more other Subsidiaries of
such Person or by such Person and one or more Subsidiaries thereof or (ii) any
other Person (other than a corporation) in which such Person, or one or more
other Subsidiaries of such Person or such Person and one or more other
Subsidiaries thereof, directly or indirectly, has at least a majority ownership
and power to direct the policies, management and affairs thereof.
"Telecommunications Assets" means all assets, rights (contractual or
otherwise) and properties, whether tangible or intangible, used or intended for
use in connection with a Telecommunications Business.
"Telecommunications Business" means the business of (i) transmitting, or
providing services relating to the transmission of, voice, video or data through
owned or leased transmission facilities, (ii) creating, developing or marketing
communications related network equipment, software and other devices for use in
a Telecommunication Business or (iii) evaluating, participating or pursuing any
other activity or opportunity that is primarily related to those identified in
(i) or (ii) above and shall, in any event, include all businesses in which the
Company or any of its Subsidiaries are engaged on the Issue Date; provided that
the determination of what constitutes a Telecommunications Business shall be
made in good faith by the Board of Directors of the Company, which determination
shall be conclusive.
"Unrestricted Subsidiary" means (1) any Subsidiary of the Company
designated as such by the Board of Directors of the Company as set forth below
where (a) neither the Company nor any of its other Subsidiaries (other than
another Unrestricted Subsidiary) (i) provides credit support for, or Guarantee
of, any Debt of such Subsidiary or any Subsidiary of such Subsidiary (including
any undertaking, agreement or instrument evidencing such Debt) or (ii) is
directly or indirectly liable for any Debt of such Subsidiary or any Subsidiary
of such Subsidiary, and (b) no default with respect to any Debt of such
Subsidiary or any Subsidiary of such Subsidiary (including any right which the
113
119
holders thereof may have to take enforcement action against such Subsidiary)
would permit (upon notice, lapse of time or both) any holder of any other Debt
of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries to declare a default on such
other Debt or cause the payment thereof to be accelerated or payable prior to
its final scheduled maturity and (2) any Subsidiary of an Unrestricted
Subsidiary. The Board of Directors of the Company may designate any Subsidiary
to be an Unrestricted Subsidiary unless such Subsidiary owns any Capital Stock
of, or owns or holds any Lien on any property of, any other Subsidiary of the
Company which is not a Subsidiary of the Subsidiary to be so designated or
otherwise an Unrestricted Subsidiary; provided that either (x) the Subsidiary to
be so designated has total assets of $1,000 or less or (y) immediately after
giving effect to such designation, the Company could incur at least $1.00 of
additional Debt pursuant to paragraph (a) under "Covenants -- Limitation on
Debt" above; and provided further, that the Company could make a Restricted
Payment in an amount equal to the greater of the fair market value and the book
value of such Subsidiary pursuant to the covenant described under
"Covenants -- Limitation on Restricted Payments" and such amount is thereafter
treated as a Restricted Payment for the purpose of calculating the aggregate
amount available for Restricted Payments thereunder. The Board of Directors may
designate any Unrestricted Subsidiary to be a Restricted Subsidiary, provided
that, immediately after giving effect to such designation, the Company could
incur at least $1.00 of additional Debt pursuant to paragraph (a) under
"Covenants -- Limitation on Debt" above.
"Voting Stock" of any Person means Capital Stock of such Person which
ordinarily has voting power for the election of directors (or persons performing
similar functions) of such Person, whether at all times or only so long as no
senior class of securities has such voting power by reason of any contingency.
"Wholly Owned Restricted Subsidiary" of any Person means a Restricted
Subsidiary of such Person 99% or more of the outstanding Capital Stock or other
ownership interests of which (other than directors' qualifying shares) shall at
the time be owned by such Person or by one or more Wholly Owned Restricted
Subsidiaries of such Person or by such Person and one or more Wholly Owned
Restricted Subsidiaries of such Person.
114
120
CERTAIN FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS
The following general discussion summarizes certain U.S. federal income tax
consequences of the purchase, ownership and disposition of the Series A
Preferred Stock. This discussion only deals with persons that hold shares of
Series A Preferred Stock as capital assets within the meaning of Section 1221 of
the Code, and that purchase the Original Preferred Shares for cash at original
issue. This discussion does not address the U.S. federal income tax consequences
that may be relevant to a particular holder subject to special treatment under
certain U.S. federal income tax laws, such as dealers in securities or foreign
currency, banks, trusts, insurance companies, tax-exempt organizations, persons
who are not U.S. Holders (as defined below), persons that hold Series A
Preferred Stock as part of a straddle, hedge, synthetic security, constructive
sale or conversion transaction, persons that have a functional currency other
than the U.S. dollar and investors in pass-through entities.
This discussion is based on the Code, the final, temporary and proposed
Treasury regulations promulgated thereunder, administrative pronouncements and
judicial decisions, all as in effect on the date hereof and all of which are
subject to change, possibly with retroactive effect. The Company has not
requested, and will not request, a ruling from the U.S. Internal Revenue Service
(the "IRS") with respect to any of the U.S. Federal income tax consequences
described below, and as a result, there can be no assurance that the IRS will
not disagree with or challenge any of the conclusions set forth herein.
LOSS OF S CORPORATION STATUS
The status of the Company as an "S Corporation" under Subchapter S of the
Code terminated as a result of the issuance of the Units in the Initial
Offering. As a result, the Company became taxable under the Code on its taxable
income at the entity level as a regular "C" corporation, generally at the rate
of 35%. Additionally, its income, losses and other tax items no longer "flow
through" to its shareholders, who instead are taxed on the Company's
distributions, which are treated as ordinary dividend income to the extent they
do not exceed the Company's current and accumulated earnings and profits, with
any excess generally taxable as capital gain. The Company also became subject to
entity-level taxation in many states that is less favorable than the state tax
treatment afforded S corporations.
U.S. HOLDERS
The following discussion is limited to persons who or which are U.S.
Holders that acquired Original Preferred Shares for cash upon their original
issuance. For these purposes, "U.S. Holder" means (i) an individual who is a
citizen or resident of the United States, (ii) a corporation or other entity
taxable as a corporation created or organized under the laws of the United
States or any political subdivision thereof or therein, (iii) an estate the
income of which is subject to U.S. federal income tax regardless of its source,
(iv) a trust if (a) a court within the United States is able to exercise primary
supervision over the administration of the trust and (b) one or more United
States trustees have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the
trust or (v) any person or entity whose worldwide income or gain is otherwise
subject to U.S. federal income tax on a net income basis.
Classification of Series A Preferred Stock
Although the characterization of an instrument as debt or equity is a
factual determination the outcome of which cannot be predicted with certainty,
the Company intends to treat the Series A Preferred Stock as equity rather than
debt for U.S. federal income tax purposes. The remainder of this discussion
assumes that such treatment will be respected, but no opinion is either
expressed or implied on this issue.
115
121
Series A Preferred Stock
Dividends
Distributions on the Series A Preferred Stock will constitute dividends to
the extent they are paid from current or accumulated earnings and profits of the
Company (as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles). Since the
Contingent Warrants are not separable from the Series A Preferred Stock until
the later of the Contingent Warrant Release Date and the Separation Date, the
Company intends to treat the Contingent Warrants as a distribution with respect
to the Series A Preferred Stock on each applicable Contingent Warrant Release
Date. Thus, the fair market value of the Contingent Warrants, if any,
distributed on each applicable Contingent Warrant Release Date will be a taxable
distribution to holders of the Series A Preferred Stock. Such amount will also
be the initial tax basis of the Contingent Warrants for U.S. federal income tax
purposes.
In addition to the amount of cash and Contingent Warrants received, a U.S.
Holder may be treated as having received an annual distribution, taxable as a
dividend to the extent of current or accumulated earnings and profits of the
Company, in an amount equal to the annual accrual of the difference between the
issue price of such Series A Preferred Stock and the redemption price (as
discussed below) of such stock (the "Redemption Premium"). Such accrual will be
determined under a constant yield method that will result in increasing amounts
of accruals of income over the accrual period. The accrual will not be required,
however, if the difference between the issue price of the Series A Preferred
Stock and the redemption price of such stock does not exceed a de minimis
amount, as determined under principles similar to the principles of Section
1273(a)(3) of the Code.
For purposes of determining the Redemption Premium, the Company intends to
treat the redemption price as the amount that will be paid upon retirement of
the Series A Preferred Stock on September 1, 2009. The IRS may assert, however,
that the Redemption Premium should be determined by using one of the higher
redemption prices that apply (1) in the event of an optional redemption by the
Company after September 1, 2003 (an "Optional Redemption") or (2) in the event
of a mandatory redemption by the Company following a Permitted Senior Notes
Offering or a Public Equity Offering (a "Mandatory Redemption"). The Company
believes that using a redemption price applicable to an Optional Redemption to
calculate the Redemption Premium is not required because, as of the issue date,
redemption pursuant to the Optional Redemption is not more likely than not to
occur, as described in Treasury Regulation Section 1.305-5(b)(3). The Company
believes that using a redemption price applicable to a Mandatory Redemption to
calculate the Redemption Premium is not required because, under Section
305(c)(1) of the Code and Treasury Regulation Section 1.305-5(b)(2) the Company
should not be treated as required to redeem the Series A Preferred Stock "at a
specified time," since (1) as of the issue date it is not possible to ascertain
the time at which a Mandatory Redemption might occur, if at all, and (2) it is
possible that, as of the issue date, the likelihood of a Mandatory Redemption
might be regarded as remote. However, despite the language of the Code and
Regulation section cited above, the preamble to these regulations contemplates
that a redemption triggered by an initial public offering may be treated as
non-remote, and the IRS may be successful in making such a contention. In this
event, the redemption price could be deemed to be as high as 108% of the
liquidation preference of the Series A Preferred Stock; the amount of the
Redemption Premium, and therefore the amounts of the income accruals described
above, would be correspondingly greater than the accruals, if any, determined by
the Company; and the income accruals would be required to be taken into account
entirely in a period or periods prior to the date on which the Mandatory
Redemption is deemed to occur for this purpose.
The Company's determination of the amount(s) of any required accruals of
Redemption Premium is binding on all U.S. Holders of the Series A Preferred
Stock (who may obtain this information from the Company) other than a U.S.
Holder that explicitly discloses that its determination of the amounts, if any,
of such accruals differs from that of the Company. Such disclosure must be made
on a statement attached to the U.S. Holder's timely filed federal income tax
return for the taxable year that includes the date the U.S. Holder acquired the
Series A Preferred Stock. Each U.S.
116
122
Holder should consult its own tax advisor concerning the appropriate accruals of
Redemption Premium and related disclosure requirements.
Any dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock that are not paid in cash
will accrue and compound, and will therefore be payable upon the optional or
mandatory redemption of the Series A Preferred Stock. The tax treatment of such
accruing and compounding dividends ("Accumulated Dividends") is not free from
doubt. Under current law, it appears that Accumulated Dividends would not be
treated as having been received by holders of the Series A Preferred Stock until
such Accumulated Dividends were actually paid in cash (and would then be taxable
distributions for U.S. federal income tax purposes treated as dividends.) The
legislative history to the 1990 amendments to Section 305(c) of the Code,
however, grants the IRS authority to issue regulations (possibly with
retroactive effect) that would treat such Accumulated Dividends as part of the
redemption price of the stock. If Accumulated Dividends were included in the
redemption price of the Series A Preferred Stock, a holder would be required to
take such Accumulated Dividends into account in determining the amount that
constitutes the redemption premium price, as described above. The effect of such
treatment would be to treat such holder as having received such Accumulated
Dividends as constructive distributions at the time they accrue, rather than at
the time they are paid in cash. Until regulations requiring such treatment with
respect to Accumulated Dividends are issued, however, the Company intends to
take the position that Accumulated Dividends on Series A Preferred Stock need
not be treated as received by a holder until such time as such Accumulated
Dividends are actually paid to such holder in cash, and will report to the IRS
on that basis.
To the extent that the amount of (1) any actual distribution (including
those of Accumulated Dividends) or (2) any constructive distribution resulting
from the accrual of Redemption Premium on the Series A Preferred Stock
(including distributions of Contingent Warrants) exceeds the Company's current
and accumulated earnings and profits allocable to such distributions (as
determined for federal income tax purposes), such distribution will be treated
as a return of capital, thus reducing the U.S. Holder's adjusted tax basis in
such Series A Preferred Stock. Any such excess distribution that is greater than
the U.S. Holder's adjusted tax basis in the Series A Preferred Stock will be
taxed as capital gain and will be long-term capital gain if the U.S. Holder's
holding period for such Series A Preferred Stock exceeds one year.
Dividends Received Deduction
Under Section 243 of the Code, corporate U.S. Holders generally will be
able to deduct 70% of the amount of any distribution qualifying as a dividend.
There are, however, many exceptions and restrictions relating to the
availability of such dividends received deduction.
Section 246A of the Code reduces the dividends received deduction allowed
to a corporate U.S. Holder that has incurred indebtedness "directly
attributable" to its investment in portfolio stock. Section 246(c) of the Code
requires that, in order to be eligible for the dividends received deduction, a
corporate U.S. Holder must, among other things, hold the shares of the Series A
Preferred Stock for tax purposes for a minimum of 46 days (91 days in the case
of certain preferred stock dividends attributable to a period or periods
aggregating in excess of 366 days) during the 90-day period beginning on the
date which is 45 days before the date on which such share becomes ex-dividend
with respect to such dividend (during the 180-day period beginning on the date
which is 90 days before such ex-dividend date in the case of certain preferred
stock dividends attributable to a period or periods aggregating in excess of 366
days). A U.S. Holder's holding period for these purposes is suspended during any
period in which it has certain options or contractual obligations with respect
to substantially identical stock or holds one or more other positions with
respect to substantially similar or related property that diminishes the risk of
loss from holding the Series A Preferred Stock. No deduction is allowed if the
corporate U.S. Holder is under an obligation to make related payments with
respect to positions in substantially similar or related property. To the extent
the dividends received deduction is allowed, a corporate U.S. Holder's
liability, if any, for alternative minimum tax may be increased.
117
123
Under Section 1059 of the Code, a corporate U.S. Holder is required to
reduce its tax basis (but not below zero) in the Series A Preferred Stock by the
nontaxed portion of any "extraordinary dividend" if such stock has not been held
for tax purposes for more than two years before the earliest of the date such
dividend is declared, announced, or agreed to. Generally, the nontaxed portion
of an extraordinary dividend is the amount excluded from income by operation of
the dividends received deduction provisions of Section 243 of the Code. An
extraordinary dividend on the Series A Preferred Stock generally would be a
dividend that (i) equals or exceeds 5% of the corporate U.S. Holder's adjusted
tax basis in the Series A Preferred Stock, treating all dividends having
ex-dividend dates within an 85-day period as one dividend or (ii) exceeds 20% of
the corporate U.S. Holder's adjusted tax basis in the Series A Preferred Stock,
treating all dividends having ex-dividend dates within a 365-day period as one
dividend. In determining whether a dividend paid on the Series A Preferred Stock
is an extraordinary dividend, a corporate U.S. Holder may elect to substitute
the fair market value of the stock for such U.S. Holder's adjusted tax basis for
purposes of applying these tests, provided such fair market value is established
to the satisfaction of the Secretary of the Treasury as of the day before the
ex-dividend date. An extraordinary dividend also includes any amount treated as
a dividend in the case of a redemption that is non-pro rata as to all
stockholders or in partial liquidation of the Company or which would not have
been treated as a dividend if any options had not been taken into account under
Section 318(a)(4) of the Code or Section 304(a) of the Code had not applied,
regardless of the stockholder's holding period and regardless of the size of the
dividend. If any part of the nontaxed portion of an extraordinary dividend is
not applied to reduce the U.S. Holder's tax basis as a result of the limitation
on reducing such basis below zero, such part will be treated as capital gain and
will be recognized in the taxable year in which the extraordinary dividend is
received.
Special rules exist with respect to extraordinary dividends for "qualified
preferred dividends." A qualified preferred dividend is any fixed dividend
payable with respect to any share of stock which (i) provides for fixed
preferred dividends payable not less frequently than annually and (ii) is not in
arrears as to dividends at the time the U.S. Holder acquired such stock. A
qualified preferred dividend does not include any dividend payable with respect
to any share of stock if the actual rate of return of such stock exceeds 15%.
Section 1059 does not apply to qualified preferred dividends if the corporate
U.S. Holder holds the stock with respect to which the dividends are paid for
more than five years. If the U.S. Holder disposes of such stock before it has
been held for more than five years, the amount subject to extraordinary dividend
treatment with respect to qualified preferred dividends is limited to the excess
of the actual rate of return over the stated rate of return. Actual or stated
rates of return are the actual or stated dividends expressed as a percentage of
the lesser of (1) the U.S. Holder's adjusted tax basis in such stock or (2) the
liquidation preference of such stock. CORPORATE U.S. HOLDERS ARE URGED TO
CONSULT THEIR TAX ADVISORS WITH RESPECT TO THE POSSIBLE APPLICATION OF SECTION
1059 TO THEIR OWNERSHIP OR DISPOSITION OF THE SERIES A PREFERRED STOCK.
Disposition of Preferred Stock
A U.S. Holder's adjusted tax basis in the Series A Preferred Stock will, in
general, be the U. S. Holder's initial tax basis of such Series A Preferred
Stock increased by the Redemption Premium, if any, previously included in income
by the U.S. Holder. A corporate U.S. Holder's tax basis may be further adjusted
by the extraordinary dividend provisions discussed above. Upon the sale or other
disposition of Series A Preferred Stock (other than by redemption), a U.S.
Holder will generally recognize capital gain or loss equal to the difference
between the amount realized upon the disposition and the adjusted tax basis of
the Series A Preferred Stock. Such gain or loss will be capital gain or loss and
will be long-term capital gain or loss if at the time of sale, exchange, or
other disposition the Series A Preferred Stock has been held for more than one
year. The deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations.
118
124
A redemption of the Series A Preferred Stock by the Company would be
treated, under Section 302 of the Code, either as a sale or exchange giving rise
to capital gain or loss or as a dividend. If a redemption is treated as a sale
or exchange, a U.S. Holder will generally recognize capital gain or loss as
described above, except to the extent that the redemption price includes
dividends which have been declared but not paid prior to the redemption, which
will be treated as dividends as described above. If a redemption of shares of
the Series A Preferred Stock is treated as a dividend with respect to a
particular U.S. Holder under Section 302 of the Code, such U.S. Holder (i) will
not recognize any loss on the redemption, (ii) will recognize dividend income
(rather than capital gain) in an amount equal to its proportionate share of the
Company's current or accumulated earnings and profits. Pursuant to Section 302
of the Code, the redemption will not be treated as a dividend, if after giving
effect to the constructive ownership rules of Section 318 of the Code, the
redemption (i) represents a "complete termination" of the redeeming U.S.
Holder's stock interest in the Company, (ii) is "substantially disproportionate"
with respect to the redeeming U.S. Holder or (iii) is "not essentially
equivalent to a dividend" with respect to the redeeming U.S. Holder, all within
the meaning of Section 302(b) of the Code. Under the constructive ownership
rules of Section 318 of the Code, a U.S. Holder of a Warrant will be treated as
owning the Common Stock which would be received pursuant to the exercise of such
Warrant. Accordingly, a redemption of Series A Preferred Stock could not,
standing alone, satisfy the "complete termination" test if the U.S. Holder owns
Warrants before and after the redemption, but could satisfy such test if the
U.S. Holder does not own Warrants or any other stock interest (including through
constructive ownership) after the redemption. A redemption will be "not
essentially equivalent to a dividend" as to a particular U.S. Holder if it
results in a "meaningful reduction" in such U.S. Holder's interest in the
Company (after application of the constructive ownership rules of Section 318 of
the Code). In general, there are no fixed rules for determining whether a
"meaningful reduction" has occurred. EACH U.S. HOLDER SHOULD CONSULT ITS OWN TAX
ADVISOR AS TO ITS ABILITY IN LIGHT OF ITS OWN PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES TO
SATISFY ANY OF THE FOREGOING TESTS. ADDITIONALLY, CORPORATE U.S. HOLDERS SHOULD
CONSULT THEIR OWN TAX ADVISORS CONCERNING THE AVAILABILITY OF THE CORPORATE
DIVIDENDS RECEIVED DEDUCTION AND THE POSSIBLE APPLICATION OF THE EXTRAORDINARY
DIVIDEND RULES OF SECTION 1059 OF THE CODE TO A DISTRIBUTION THAT IS TAXABLE AS
A DIVIDEND.
Exchange Offer
The exchange of Original Preferred Shares for substantially identical
preferred stock (i.e., the New Preferred Shares) pursuant to this Exchange Offer
should not constitute a taxable event for U.S. federal income tax purposes. As a
result, (i) a U.S. Holder of Original Preferred Shares should not recognize
taxable gain or loss as a result of the exchange of Original Preferred Shares
for New Preferred Shares pursuant to the Exchange Offer, (ii) the holding period
of the New Preferred Shares should include the holding period of the Original
Preferred Shares surrendered in exchange therefor and (iii) a U.S. Holder's
adjusted tax basis in the New Preferred Shares should be the same as such U.S.
Holder's adjusted tax basis in the Original Preferred Shares surrendered in
exchange therefor.
Information Reporting and Backup Withholding
A noncorporate U.S. Holder of Series A Preferred Stock may be subject to
backup withholding at a 31% rate with respect to "reportable payments", which
include dividends (including any accrual of Redemption Premium) paid on Series A
Preferred Stock or the proceeds of a sale or exchange of the Series A Preferred
Stock. The payor of any reportable payments will be required to deduct and
withhold 31% of such payments if (i) the payee fails to furnish a correct
Taxpayer Identification Number (a "TIN") to the payor in the prescribed manner,
(ii) the IRS notifies the payor that the TIN furnished by the payee is
incorrect, (iii) the payee has failed properly to report the receipt of certain
reportable payments and the IRS has notified the payor that backup withholding
is required or (iv) the payee fails to certify under penalties of perjury that
such payee is not subject to backup withholding. If any one of these events
occurs with respect to a U.S. Holder of Series A Preferred
119
125
Stock, the payer of any reportable payment will be required to withhold 31% of
any such reportable payments with respect thereto.
Any amount withheld from a payment to a U.S. Holder under the backup
withholding rules will be allowed as a refund or credit against such holder's
U.S. federal income tax liability, so long as the required information is
provided to the IRS. The payer of any reportable payment generally will report
to a U.S. Holder of Series A Preferred Stock and to the IRS the amounts of any
reportable payments made in respect to the Series A Preferred Stock for each
calendar year and the amount of tax withheld, if any, with respect to such
payments.
NON-U.S. HOLDERS
The discussion above is applicable only to U.S. Holders. The Series A
Preferred Stock may not be an appropriate investment for persons other than U.S.
Holders ("Non-U.S. Holders"), since dividends on the Series A Preferred Stock
(whether paid in cash or in-kind) generally will be subject to the withholding
of U.S. federal income tax at a 30% rate (or lower applicable treaty rate,
subject to applicable requirements, including the requirement to provide
specified documentation of foreign status). Tax consequences for Non-U.S.
Holders, if any, may differ if their investment in Series A Preferred Stock is
treated as effectively connected with their conduct of a trade or business
within the United States. The tax consequences to Non-U.S. Holders may be
complex and in some cases, adverse, and are not described herein except to the
limited extent set forth in this paragraph. Persons who are Non-U.S. Holders
should consult their own tax advisors prior to acquiring Series A Preferred
Stock.
PROSPECTIVE PURCHASERS OF UNITS ARE URGED TO CONSULT THEIR OWN TAX ADVISORS
WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATION TO THEIR PARTICULAR SITUATIONS OF U.S. FEDERAL
INCOME TAX LAWS, AS WELL AS THE LAWS OF ANY STATE, LOCAL OR FOREIGN TAXING
JURISDICTION.
PLAN OF DISTRIBUTION
Each broker-dealer that receives New Preferred Shares for its own account
pursuant to the Exchange Offer must acknowledge that it will deliver a
prospectus in connection with any resale of such New Preferred Shares. The
Prospectus, as it may be amended or supplemented from time to time, may be used
by a broker-dealer in connection with resales of New Preferred Shares received
in exchange for Original Preferred Shares where such shares were acquired as a
result of market-making activities or other trading activities. The Company has
agreed that it will make this Prospectus, as amended or supplemented, available
to any broker-dealer for use in connection with any such resale for a period
ending 90 days after the completion of the Exchange Offer.
The Company will not receive any proceeds from any sale of New Preferred
Shares by broker-dealers. New Preferred Shares received by broker-dealers for
their own account pursuant to the Exchange Offer may be sold from time to time
in one or more transactions in the over-the-counter market, in negotiated
transactions, through the writing of options on the New Preferred Shares or a
combination of such methods of resale, at market prices prevailing at the time
of resale, at prices related to such prevailing market prices or negotiated
prices. Any such resale may be made directly to purchasers or to or through
brokers or dealers who may receive compensation in the form of commissions or
concessions from any such broker-dealer and/or the purchasers of any such New
Preferred Shares. Any broker-dealer that resells New Preferred Shares that were
received by it for its own account pursuant to the Exchange Offer and any broker
or dealer that participates in a distribution of such New Preferred Shares may
be deemed to be an "underwriter" within the meaning of the Securities Act and
any profit of any such resale of New Preferred Shares and any commissions or
concessions received by any such persons may be deemed to be underwriting
compensation under the Securities Act. The Letter of Transmittal states that by
acknowledging that
120
126
it will deliver and by delivering a prospectus, a broker-dealer will not be
deemed to admit that it is an "underwriter" within the meaning of the Securities
Act.
The Company has agreed to pay all expenses incident to the Exchange Offer
other than the expenses of counsel for the holders of the Original Preferred
Shares and commissions or concessions of any brokers or dealers, and will
indemnify the holders of the Original Preferred Shares (including any
broker-dealers) against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the
Securities Act.
VALIDITY OF THE SECURITIES
The validity of the New Preferred Shares will be passed upon for the
Company by Hale and Dorr LLP, Boston, Massachusetts.
INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS
The financial statements of the Company as of December 31, 1997 and 1996
and for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 1997
included in this Prospectus have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP,
independent accountants, as stated in their report appearing herein.
121
127
GLOSSARY
1+ OUTBOUND SERVICE -- Standard, self-dialed long distance telephone service.
"500 NUMBER" TECHNOLOGY -- A non-geographic area code system that allows for
"follow me" services.
ACCESS CHARGES -- The fees paid by long distance carriers to LECs for
originating and terminating long distance calls on their local networks.
ADVANCED INTELLIGENT NETWORK (AIN) -- A network architecture with three basic
elements: (1) Signal Control Points (SCPs) -- computers that hold databases in
which customer-specific information is stored for use by the network to route
calls; (2) Signal Switching Points (SSPs) -- digital telephone switches that can
communicate with SCPs and ask them for customer-specific instructions as to how
a call should be completed; and (3) Signal Transfer Points (STPs) -- packet
switches that shuttle messages between SSPs and SCPs.
AMERICAS 1 -- A submarine telecommunications cable system linking the United
States and several Caribbean and South American countries.
AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI) -- The delivery of the calling party's
number by a LEC for billing or routing purposes and the subsequent delivery of
such number of end users.
BANDWIDTH -- The number of bits of information that can move through a
communications medium in a given amount of time; the capacity of a
telecommunications circuit or network to carry voice, data and video
information.
BUNDLED SERVICES -- Services for which a carrier must pay one all-inclusive
charge for switching, transmission, LEC access, and other charges.
CALL DETAIL RECORD (CDR) -- A paper or electronic record of the time, duration,
and points of origination and termination of a telephone call, made and kept
primarily for billing purposes.
CATVS (COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION OR CABLE TELEVISION) -- Cable television
service providers.
CENTREX -- A trademarked name for an ILEC service that offers direct dialing
within a given phone system, direct dialing of incoming calls and automatic
identification of outbound calls. This service simulates, through equipment
located centrally, the features of a dedicated switching system located within
an office building (a so-called Private Branch Exchange or PBX).
CO-CARRIER STATUS -- A relationship between CLECs that affords equal access to
and rights on each other's networks, and that provides access and services on an
equal basis.
COLLOCATION -- The physical or virtual connection of a telecommunications
carrier's equipment with a given LEC's system to facilitate the interconnection
of their respective switching/routing equipment.
COMMERCIAL MOBILE RADIO SERVICE (CMRS) -- The FCC's term for certain wireless
telecommunication services, provided on a commercial basis, including cellular
telephone service and personnel communications services.
COMMUNICATIONS ACT -- The Communications Act of 1934, 47 U.S.C. sec. 151 et
seq., as amended.
COMPETITIVE ACCESS PROVIDER (CAP) -- A company that provides its customers with
an alternative to the local exchange company for local transport of private line
and special access services, and interstate transport of switched access
telecommunications services.
COMPETITIVE LOCAL EXCHANGE CARRIER (CLEC) -- A company that provides its
customers an alternative to the local telephone carrier for local transport of
private line, special access and switched local access telecommunications
services.
G-1
128
CONTRACT TARIFFS -- Contractually prescribed rates for telecommunications
services, generally set forth on a per minute basis by place of termination of
call, and filed with a state or federal regulatory agency.
DEDICATED ACCESS LINES -- Telecommunications lines dedicated or reserved for use
exclusively by particular customers along predetermined routes (in contrast to
telecommunications lines within a LEC's public, switched network).
DIALING PARITY -- The ability to reach a given termination point by dialing the
same telephone number, or same number of digits, through any provider of
telecommunication services.
DSO, DS1, DS3 AND E1 SPEEDS -- Standard telecommunications industry signal
formats which are distinguishable by bit rate (the number of binary digits (0
and 1) transmitted per second).
FACILITIES-BASED PROVIDER -- A telecommunications company that carries all or a
portion of its traffic over its own network infrastructure, including switching
facilities and/or transport facilities; distinguished from a company that
carriers traffic solely over leased infrastructure elements. There is no
industry consensus on what constitutes a facilities-based carrier and the FCC
and state regulatory agency definitions vary accordingly.
FCC -- United States Federal Communications Commission.
FGD (FEATURE GROUP D) -- A trunk-side LATA access affording call supervision to
an interexchange carrier (IXC), a uniform access code, optional calling-party
identification, recording of access-charge billing details, and presubscription
to a customer-specified IXC. FGD also provides automatic number identification
(ANI) for billing purposes.
FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL (FTP) -- A service that supports file transfer between
local and remote computers.
"FOLLOW ME" NUMBERS -- "Smart" telephone numbers that, through number
translation and computer switching, can be used to reach a person among various
possible locations (e.g., home, office, etc.).
FRAME RELAY SERVICE -- A high-speed data packet switching service used to
transmit data between computers.
HUNT SEQUENCING -- A series of telephone lines organized in such a way that if
the first line is busy the next line is hunted and so on until a free line is
found.
INCUMBENT LOCAL EXCHANGE CARRIERS (ILEC) -- Companies providing local telephone
services that were historically the sole local provider in their respective
regions, including RBOCs.
INDEFEASIBLE RIGHT OF USE ("IRU") -- An unconditional right to use a facility,
such as a fiber optic filament or right of way; this right is created by
contract and confers upon the holder certain indicia of ownership, while leaving
legal title in the hands of the grantor.
INTELLIGENT NETWORK -- See "AIN", above.
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS PROVIDER (ICP) -- A telecommunications carrier that
provides packaged or integrated services from among a broad range of categories,
including local exchange, long distance, enhanced data, cable TV, and other
communications services.
INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK (ISDN) -- A transmission method that
provides circuit-switched access to a public network at high speeds for voice,
data and video transmission.
INTERCONNECTION AGREEMENT -- A contract between an ILEC and CLEC for the
interconnection of the two networks and CLEC access to the ILEC's unbundled
network elements and resale of the ILEC's services. Such an agreement sets out
the financial and operational aspects of such interconnection and access.
G-2
129
INTERCONNECTION ORDERS -- Rulings by the FCC announced in August 1996 that
implemented the local competition provisions of the Telecommunications Act and
that require ILECs to provide interconnection to any CLEC, seeking such
interconnection.
INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER (IXC) -- A telecommunications company that provides
telecommunications services between local exchanges on an interstate or
intrastate basis.
INTER-LATA SERVICE -- Telecommunications services originating in one LATA and
terminating in another.
INTERNATIONAL GATEWAY SWITCH -- A switch that routes international
telecommunications traffic.
INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) -- Network protocols that allow computers with different
architectures and operating system software to communicate with other computers
on the Internet.
INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDER (ISP) -- A vendor who provides access for customers to
the Internet and the World Wide Web.
INTRA-LATA SERVICE -- Telecommunications services originating and terminating in
the same LATA.
LOCAL ACCESS AND TRANSPORT AREA (LATA) -- A geographic area established by the
MFJ within which a former Bell System local exchange carrier offers switched
telecommunications services, including long distance services. The MFJ
established approximately 200 LATAs in the United States. The term is primarily
of historical significance since the enactment of the Telecommunications Act.
LOCAL EXCHANGE -- A geographic area determined by the appropriate state
regulatory authority in which calls generally are transmitted without toll
charges to the customer.
LOCAL EXCHANGE CARRIER (LEC) -- A telecommunications company that provides
telecommunications services in a geographic area in which calls generally are
transmitted without toll charges. LECs include both RBOCs and CLECs.
LOCAL MULTIPORT DISTRIBUTION SERVICE (LMDS) -- Digital wireless service licensed
by the FCC in the 28-30 GHz frequency band.
LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY (LNP) -- The ability of an end user to retain a given
telephone number upon changing local telephone service providers.
LOOPS -- Circuits that connect end users to telecommunications switching
equipment.
MODIFIED FINAL JUDGMENT (MFJ) -- The consent decree resulting from United States
v. AT&T that effected the breakup of AT&T and the separation of its local and
long distance businesses.
MULTICHANNEL MULTIPOINT DISTRIBUTION SERVICE (MMDS) -- A one-way domestic public
radio service rendered on microwave frequencies from a fixed station
transmitting to multiple receiving facilities located at fixed points.
MULTIPLEXING -- An electronic or optical process that combines a number of lower
speed transmission lines into one high-speed line in order to maximize capacity.
NETWORK -- A web of telecommunications equipment, including switches and lines,
over which telecommunications traffic can be transmitted.
NETWORK OPERATIONS CENTER -- The central office from which the Company manages
its network.
NODE -- A point on a network at which a router and user access equipment are
located.
NPI -- Network Plus, Inc., a wholly owned operating subsidiary of Network Plus
Corp.
ON-NET TRAFFIC -- Customer traffic that is switched by one or more of the
Company's switches; such traffic may be transported on third-party facilities.
G-3
130
OFF-NET TRAFFIC -- Customer traffic that is neither switched nor transported on
the Company's network; such traffic is carried entirely on third-party
facilities.
OPERATIONAL SUPPORT SYSTEM (OSS) -- The Company's methods, procedures and
software that directly support the daily operations of its telecommunications
infrastructure.
PEERING -- The commercial practice under which ISPs exchange each other's
traffic without the payment of settlement charges. Peering occurs at both public
and private exchange points.
PERCENTAGE ALLOCATION ROUTING -- An 800 Service that allows a customer to route
pre-selected percentages of calls from each originating routing group (typically
an area code) to two or more answering locations. Allocation percentages may be
further dictated based on the day of the week, time of day, etc.
PERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE (PCS) -- A type of wireless telephone system
licensed by the FCC that uses light, inexpensive handheld sets and communicates
via low-powered antennas.
POINT OF PRESENCE (POP) -- The location at which a long distance carrier has
installed transmission equipment in a service area that serves as, or relays
calls to, a network switching center of that long distance carrier.
PRIVATE LINE -- A private, dedicated telecommunications line connecting
different point-to-point locations (excluding long distance carrier POPs).
PROVISIONING -- The act of supplying telecommunications services to a user,
including all associated transmission, fiber and equipment.
PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK (PSTN) -- That portion of a local exchange
company's network available to all users generally on a shared basis (i.e., not
dedicated to a particular user). Traffic along the PSTN is generally switched at
the LECs central offices.
PUBLIC UTILITY COMMISSION (PUC) -- A state regulatory commission, existing in
most states, that regulates public utilities, including telecommunications
companies providing intrastate services.
REGIONAL BELL OPERATING COMPANIES (RBOCS) -- The regional local telephone
holding companies established by the MFJ that effected the breakup of AT&T, and
which generally had a monopoly on local telephone service in their respective
areas prior to the enactment of the Telecommunications Act.
ROUTING -- The process by which sophisticated computer switching equipment
directs a call from its point of origination to its point of termination.
Intelligent routing capabilities include time-of-day, day-of-week, and
day-of-year routing, which direct calls to varying termination points based on
specified computer instructions; and least cost routing, which chooses the most
cost-efficient route available.
SIGNALLING SYSTEM SEVEN (SS7) -- An advanced signaling protocol that helps
optimize a network's efficiency through intelligent out-of-band routing
decisions.
SIGNALLING TRANSFER POINT -- The signalling facility through which SS7 messages
must pass as they are transmitted to their points of termination.
SWITCH -- A sophisticated computer that (a) routes telecommunications
transmissions by selecting the paths or circuits to be used for the transmission
of information and (b) establishes a connection. Switches allow
telecommunications service providers to connect calls to their destinations
while providing advanced features and recording connection information for
future billing.
SWITCHED ACCESS SERVICE -- The origination or termination of long distance
traffic between a customer's premises and a long distance carrier's POP via
shared local trunks using a local switch.
SWITCHED TRAFFIC -- Telecommunications traffic along a switched network.
G-4
131
TAT 12/13 RIOJA -- A transatlantic submarine telecommunications cable linking
the United States and Europe.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACT -- The federal Telecommunications Act of 1996, 47 U.S.C.
sec. 230 et seq.
TERMINATION POINT -- The destination point of a telephone call.
TPC-5 -- A transpacific submarine telecommunications cable system linking the
United States and East Asia.
TRUNK LINE SERVICE -- A service that combines multiple channels with
unrestricted access in such a manner that user demands for channels are
automatically "queued" and then allocated to the first available channels.
UNBUNDLED ACCESS -- Access to unbundled elements of a telecommunications
services provider's network including network facilities, equipment, features,
functions and capabilities, at any technically feasible point within such
network.
UNBUNDLED NETWORK ELEMENTS (UNE) -- The various portions of an ILECs network
that a CLEC can lease for purposes of building a facilities-based competitive
network, including copper lines, fiber, central office collocation space,
interoffice transport, operational support systems, local switching and rights
of way.
VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (VPN) -- A service that establishes a software-derived
network offering the appearance, functionality and usefulness of a dedicated
private network.
WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE -- A generic term for telecommunications
services transmitted by radio signal, as opposed to those sent over fiber optic
or copper lines.
G-5
132
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
PAGE
----
1997 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Report of Independent Accountants......................... F-2
Balance Sheets as of December 31, 1997 and 1996........... F-3
Statements of Operations and Retained Earnings for the
Years Ended December 31, 1997, 1996 and 1995........... F-4
Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31,
1997, 1996 and 1995.................................... F-5
Notes to Financial Statements............................. F-6
UNAUDITED JUNE 30, 1998 INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Balance Sheets as of June 30, 1998 and December 31,
1997................................................... F-15
Statements of Operations and Retained Earnings for the
Three Months and Six Months Ended June 30, 1998 and
1997................................................... F-16
Statements of Cash Flows for the Six Months Ended June 30,
1998 and 1997.......................................... F-17
Notes to Unaudited Interim Financial Statements........... F-18
F-1
133
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS
To the Board of Directors and
Stockholders of Network Plus Corp.:
In our opinion, the accompanying balance sheets and the related statements
of operations and retained earnings and of cash flows present fairly, in all
material respects, the financial position of Network Plus, Inc., a wholly owned
subsidiary of Network Plus Corp., at December 31, 1997 and 1996, and the results
of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period
ended December 31, 1997, in conformity with generally accepted accounting
principles. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's
management; our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial
statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in
accordance with generally accepted auditing standards which require that we plan
and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial
statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a
test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial
statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates
made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for the opinion expressed
above.
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Boston, Massachusetts
June 24, 1998, except for the information in
Notes 12 and 15, for which the dates are
July 15, 1998 and September 3, 1998, respectively
F-2
134
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
BALANCE SHEETS
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
DECEMBER 31,
------------------
1997 1996
------- -------
ASSETS
CURRENT ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents................................. $ 1,502 $ 2,241
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful
accounts of $926 and $850, respectively................ 16,927 14,974
Marketable securities..................................... 65 62
Investments............................................... 9,500 2,093
Prepaid expenses.......................................... 415 308
Other current assets...................................... 112 93
------- -------
Total current assets.............................. 28,521 19,771
PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET................................. 6,957 3,075
OTHER ASSETS................................................ 103 69
------- -------
TOTAL ASSETS...................................... $35,581 $22,915
======= =======
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Accounts payable.......................................... $17,445 $14,023
Accrued liabilities....................................... 2,245 1,934
Revolving line of credit.................................. 4,510 2,000
Notes payable to stockholders............................. 1,755 --
Current portion of debt and capital lease obligations..... 5,694 193
------- -------
Total current liabilities......................... 31,649 18,150
LONG-TERM DEBT AND CAPITAL LEASE OBLIGATIONS................ 3,623 664
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
Common stock, $.01 par value, 20,000,000 shares
authorized, 10,000,000 shares issued and outstanding... 100 100
Additional paid-in capital................................ 183 183
Retained earnings......................................... 26 3,818
------- -------
Total stockholders' equity........................ 309 4,101
------- -------
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY........ $35,581 $22,915
======= =======
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-3
135
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS AND RETAINED EARNINGS
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
--------------------------------------
1997 1996 1995
---------- ---------- ----------
Revenue............................................ $ 98,209 $ 75,135 $ 49,024
Direct cost of revenue............................. 78,106 57,208 35,065
---------- ---------- ----------
Gross profit....................................... 20,103 17,927 13,959
Operating expenses
Selling, general and administrative expenses....... 25,704 19,230 17,697
Depreciation and amortization...................... 994 533 276
---------- ---------- ----------
26,698 19,763 17,973
---------- ---------- ----------
Operating loss..................................... (6,595) (1,836) (4,014)
Other income (expense)
Interest and dividend income..................... 86 95 202
Other income, net................................ 3,917 3,529 7,859
Interest expense................................. (557) (313) (40)
---------- ---------- ----------
3,446 3,311 8,021
---------- ---------- ----------
Income (loss) before state income taxes............ (3,149) 1,475 4,007
Provision for state income taxes................... 42 60 312
---------- ---------- ----------
Net income (loss).................................. $ (3,191) $ 1,415 $ 3,695
========== ========== ==========
Retained earnings, beginning....................... 3,818 3,639 1,834
Distributions to stockholders...................... (601) (1,237) (1,890)
---------- ---------- ----------
Retained earnings, ending.......................... $ 26 $ 3,818 $ 3,639
========== ========== ==========
Net income (loss) per share -- basic and diluted... $ (.32) $ .14 $ .37
========== ========== ==========
Weighted average shares outstanding................ 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
========== ========== ==========
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-4
136
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(IN THOUSANDS)
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
-----------------------------
1997 1996 1995
------- ------- -------
Cash flows from operating activities:
Net income (loss)......................................... $(3,191) $ 1,415 $ 3,695
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided
by (used for) operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization.......................... 994 533 276
Provision for losses on accounts receivable............ 4,104 1,102 887
Amortization of AT&T credits........................... -- (1,810) (2,436)
Exercise of Tel-Save common stock warrants received as
consideration........................................ (3,570) (2,800) --
Valuation of Tel-Save common stock warrants received as
consideration........................................ (3,837) (2,093) --
Proceeds from sale of Tel-Save common stock............ -- 4,167 --
Gain on sale of Tel-Save common stock.................. -- (1,367) --
(Increase) decrease in assets:
Accounts receivable.................................. (6,059) (1,584) (7,967)
Prepaid expenses..................................... (107) (218) (60)
Other current assets................................. (19) 11 198
Other long-term assets............................... (34) (13) 484
(Decrease) increase in liabilities:
Accounts payable..................................... 8,022 4,146 6,727
Accrued liabilities.................................. 311 (438) 659
------- ------- -------
Net cash provided by (used for) operating
activities...................................... (3,386) 1,051 2,463
Cash flows from investing activities:
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets..................... 9 -- --
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets to affiliate........ -- 34 535
Capital expenditures................................... (3,363) (2,135) (860)
Purchase of marketable securities...................... (3) (3) --
Proceeds from sale of marketable securities............ -- 90 141
------- ------- -------
Net cash used for investing activities............ (3,357) (2,014) (184)
Cash flows from financing activities:
Net proceeds from line of credit....................... 2,510 2,000 --
Proceeds from note payable............................. -- 1,000 --
Proceeds from notes payable to stockholders............ 1,755 -- --
Proceeds from sale and leaseback of fixed assets....... 3,450 -- --
Payments on debt and capital lease obligations......... (1,110) (167) (13)
Distributions to stockholders.......................... (601) (1,237) (1,890)
------- ------- -------
Net cash provided by (used for) financing
activities...................................... 6,004 1,596 (1,903)
------- ------- -------
Net increase (decrease) in cash............................. (739) 633 376
Cash at beginning of year................................... 2,241 1,608 1,232
------- ------- -------
Cash at end of year......................................... $ 1,502 $ 2,241 $ 1,608
======= ======= =======
Supplemental disclosures of cash flow information:
Cash paid during the year for:
Interest............................................. $ 498 $ 298 $ 40
======= ======= =======
Income taxes......................................... $ 15 $ 243 $ 167
======= ======= =======
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-5
137
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
1. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
BUSINESS ACTIVITY
Network Plus, Inc. (the "Company"), a wholly owned subsidiary of Network
Plus Corp. (see Note 12), is a switch-based carrier and switchless reseller of
long distance telecommunications services, principally to small and medium-sized
businesses in the Northeastern and Southeastern regions of the United States.
Revenues are derived from the sale of domestic and international telephone
services, calling cards, debit cards and paging services. The Company operates
two telephony switches, located in Quincy, Massachusetts and Orlando, Florida,
and contracts with Sprint Communications Company, LP ("Sprint") to provide
switching and dedicated voice and data services for a portion of the Company's
telecommunications traffic.
CASH EQUIVALENTS
All highly liquid cash investments with maturities of three months or less
at date of purchase are considered to be cash equivalents.
REVENUE RECOGNITION AND ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
Telecommunication revenues and accounts receivable are recognized when
calls are completed or when services are provided. Accounts receivable include
both billed and unbilled amounts, and are reduced by an estimate for
uncollectible amounts.
PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
Property and equipment are recorded at cost and are depreciated using the
straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Leasehold
improvements are amortized over the shorter of the lease term or the estimated
useful life of the improvements. Upon retirement or other disposition of
property and equipment, the cost and related depreciation are removed from the
accounts and the resulting gain or loss is reflected in earnings.
CAPITAL LEASES
Capital leases, those leases which transfer substantially all benefits and
risks of ownership, are accounted for as acquisitions of assets and incurrences
of obligations. Capital lease amortization is included in depreciation and
amortization expense, with the amortization period restricted to the lease term.
Interest on the related obligation is recognized over the lease term at a
constant periodic rate.
USE OF ESTIMATES
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally
accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and
assumptions that affect amounts reported in the financial statements and
accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
INCOME TAXES
Effective March 1, 1992, the Company elected by the consent of its
stockholders to be taxed under the provisions of Subchapter S of the Internal
Revenue Code. Under those provisions, the Company does not pay corporate federal
income taxes on its taxable income. Instead, the stockholders are liable for
individual income taxes on their share of the Company's taxable income.
F-6
138
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
The Company continues to pay state income taxes in those states that do not
fully recognize the Subchapter S provision and states that assess certain
franchise taxes.
CONCENTRATION OF RISK
Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to
concentrations of credit risk consist primarily of trade accounts receivable. In
addition, risk exists in cash deposited in banks that may, at times, be in
excess of FDIC insurance limits. Cash balances are managed daily to reduce
revolving credit borrowings. The trade accounts receivable risk is limited due
to the breadth of entities comprising the Company's customer base and their
dispersion across different industries and geographical regions. The Company
evaluates the creditworthiness of customers, as appropriate, and maintains an
adequate allowance for potential uncollectible accounts.
EARNINGS (LOSS) PER SHARE
The Company computes and reports earnings per share in accordance with the
provisions of SFAS No. 128, "Earnings Per Share". The computations of basic and
diluted earnings (loss) per common share are based upon the weighted average
number of common shares outstanding and potentially dilutive securities.
Potentially dilutive securities include convertible preferred stock, stock
options and warrants. There were no potentially dilutive securities outstanding
during 1997, 1996 or 1995.
NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
In June 1997, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement of
Financial Accounting Standards No. 130, "Reporting Comprehensive Income" ("SFAS
130"), which is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 1997,
including interim periods. SFAS 130 requires the presentation of comprehensive
income and its components. Comprehensive income presents a measure of all
changes in equity that result from recognized transactions and other economic
events during the period other than transactions with stockholders. The Company
will adopt SFAS 130 in the first quarter of 1998 and does not expect
comprehensive income to differ from reported net income.
In July 1997, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement of
Financial Accounting Standards No. 131, "Disclosures About Segments of an
Enterprise and Related Information" ("SFAS 131"), which is effective for fiscal
years beginning after December 15, 1997. Interim reporting disclosures are not
required in the first year of adoption. SFAS 131 specifies revised guidelines
for determining an entity's operating segments and the type and level of
operating information to be disclosed. SFAS 131 changes current practice under
SFAS 14 by establishing a new framework on which to base segment reporting. The
management approach described in SFAS 131 expands the required disclosures for
each segment. The Company will adopt SFAS 131 in its year ending December 31,
1998, and has yet to determine the impact of such adoption on the reporting of
its results of operations as currently presented.
In March 1998, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
issued Statement of Position 98-1, "Accounting for the Costs of Computer
Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use". The Company does not believe
that this pronouncement will have a material impact on its business or results
of operations.
F-7
139
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
RECLASSIFICATIONS
Certain amounts in the financial statements for prior years have been
reclassified to conform with the current year presentation. Such
reclassifications had no effect on previously reported results of operations.
2. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
In December 1997, the Company's stockholders made loans to the Company
totaling $1,755. Interest on the loans accrues at the prevailing prime rate
(8.5% at December 31, 1997) and is payable monthly. There is no required period
for principal repayment. The loans were repaid in May 1998 and, accordingly,
have been classified as a current liability in the accompanying balance sheet.
The Company had a service arrangement through May 1997 with a marketing
company, the controlling stockholders of which include the Company's
stockholders. The marketing company provided services relative to establishing,
training and expanding the Company's sales organization. For the years ending
December 31, 1997, 1996 and 1995, the amounts paid to the marketing company were
$55, $132 and $197, respectively.
Office space, located in Quincy, Massachusetts, is leased from a trust, the
beneficiaries of which are the stockholders of the Company (see Note 11). The
Company makes monthly rental payments of $36. In each of the years ending
December 31, 1997, 1996, and 1995, the amount paid to the trust was $431.
3. MARKETABLE SECURITIES
Marketable securities are as follows:
DECEMBER 31, 1997 DECEMBER 31, 1996
-------------------- --------------------
COST FAIR VALUE COST FAIR VALUE
------ ---------- ------ ----------
U.S. obligations.................................. $ 3 $ 3 $ 3 $ 3
Other securities.................................. 62 62 59 59
------ ------ ------ ------
$ 65 $ 65 $ 62 $ 62
====== ====== ====== ======
4. INVESTMENTS AND SALE OF CUSTOMER BILLING BASE
Investments are as follows:
DECEMBER 31, 1997 DECEMBER 31, 1996
-------------------- --------------------
COST FAIR VALUE COST FAIR VALUE
------ ---------- ------ ----------
Tel-Save warrants................................. $9,500 $9,500 $2,093 $2,093
====== ====== ====== ======
In 1995, the Company sold three separate billing bases of customer accounts
to other telecommunications companies for cash totaling approximately $8,422 and
warrants to purchase shares of common stock of Tel-Save Holdings, Inc.
("Tel-Save"). The cash received was recognized as miscellaneous income in 1995.
The Company was required to fulfill certain sales volume obligations in order to
exercise the warrants. As of December 31, 1995, the Company had not met those
obligations and, accordingly, had ascribed no value to the warrants.
During 1996, the Company met the sales volume obligations to exercise a
portion of the outstanding warrants. Certain of these warrants were exercised
and common stock related to those
F-8
140
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
warrants was sold by the Company, resulting in net proceeds and income of
$1,367. The remainder of the warrants that became exercisable in 1996 were
subsequently exercised in 1997. These warrants were classified as investments
and were valued at approximately $2,093 at December 31, 1996 using an
established valuation model. A total of approximately $3,460 was recognized as
other income in 1996 relating to these warrants.
The agreements between Tel-Save and the Company required the transfer of
ownership of the common stock certificates from Tel-Save to the Company upon the
Company meeting certain requirements, which the Company, based upon available
information, believed it had met in 1996 and 1997. Accordingly, in 1997, cash
payments totaling $3,570 were made to exercise all outstanding warrants. In
total, payments for warrants in 1997 were believed to entitle the Company to
765,000 shares of Tel-Save common stock, subject to the registration of the
shares by Tel-Save. The shares were registered with the Securities and Exchange
Commission in November 1997, but common stock certificates were not physically
transferred to the Company.
In order to take physical possession of the Tel-Save common stock
certificates, the Company filed suit against Tel-Save in January 1998. On June
24, 1998, a settlement agreement was signed between the parties pursuant to
which Tel-Save returned $1,470 paid by the Company during 1997 in its attempt to
exercise the final warrant for 315,000 shares, and canceled that warrant. In
addition, Tel-Save issued the remaining 450,000 shares to the Company and
simultaneously repurchased such shares for $8,030. There are no continuing
obligations between the parties. Accordingly, the Company's investment in
Tel-Save at December 31, 1997 was valued at the $9,500 received pursuant to the
settlement in June 1998, and other income of $3.8 million was recorded in 1997
to reflect this valuation.
5. PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
DECEMBER 31,
ESTIMATED ------------------
USEFUL LIFE 1997 1996
------------- ------- -------
Switching equipment................................... 5 years $ 4,004 $ 1,513
Computer equipment.................................... 3-5 years 2,756 948
Office furniture and equipment........................ 7 years 1,272 1,157
Purchased software.................................... 3 years 694 275
Motor vehicles........................................ 5 years 174 175
Leasehold improvements................................ Term of lease 130 92
------- -------
9,030 4,160
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization........ (2,073) (1,085)
------- -------
$ 6,957 $ 3,075
======= =======
In 1997, upon review of the Company's experience and expectations for
upgrades and replacement of equipment, the Company changed the estimated useful
life of its switching equipment from 12 years to 5 years. Depreciation expense
in 1997 was approximately $136 more than what would have otherwise been reported
had the change in estimate not been made. Annual depreciation expense related to
these assets will be approximately $407 more through 2002 than what would have
otherwise been reported had the change not been made.
In August 1997, the Company entered into a sale and leaseback of its
switching equipment. The equipment was sold at book value, which approximates
market value, and, consequently, no gain or loss was recorded on the sale. The
Company has the right to reacquire the equipment at the end of the lease's
five-year term.
F-9
141
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
6. ACCRUED LIABILITIES
Accrued liabilities consist of the following:
DECEMBER 31,
----------------
1997 1996
------ ------
Accrued interest......................................... $ 60 $ 14
Accrued salaries, wages, commissions and related taxes... 297 445
Customer deposits........................................ 361 125
Accrued income and franchise taxes....................... 766 879
Accrued taxes other than income and franchise............ 238 375
Other accrued liabilities................................ 523 96
------ ------
$2,245 $1,934
====== ======
7. REVOLVING CREDIT AGREEMENT
The Company has a revolving line of credit with Fleet National Bank
("Fleet") for borrowings up to $7,000, including letters of credit, which
expires on May 31, 1998. Availability in excess of $5,000 is based upon a
percentage of accounts receivable. Interest is payable monthly at the bank's
prime rate or available LIBOR options. The revolving line of credit requires the
Company to meet certain debt service, liquidity and tangible net worth
covenants. At December 31, 1997, cash borrowings under the line of credit
totalled $4,510 and letters of credit issued in the ordinary course of business
totalled $120. At December 31, 1996, cash borrowings under the line totalled
$2,000 and there were no outstanding letters of credit. The interest rate on
such borrowings was 8.5% at December 31, 1997 and 8.25% at December 31, 1996.
The maximum borrowings under the agreement in 1997 and 1996 were $5,000 and
$3,000, respectively.
On May 1, 1998, the Company entered into a new revolving credit agreement
with Fleet, which allows for up to $23 million of borrowings, based upon a
percentage of accounts receivable. The new agreement has a term of three years.
Interest is payable monthly at Fleet's prime rate or available LIBOR options.
The revolving credit agreement requires the Company to meet certain gross
margin, operating income and tangible net worth covenants. All outstanding notes
payable were paid in full with proceeds from the new facility.
8. DEBT AND CAPITAL LEASE OBLIGATIONS
Debt and capital lease obligations consist of the following:
DECEMBER 31,
------------------
1997 1996
------- -------
Notes payable.......................................... $ 4,600 $ 855
Capital lease obligations.............................. 4,717 2
------- -------
9,317 857
Less current portion................................... (5,694) (193)
------- -------
$ 3,623 $ 664
======= =======
The Company issued a promissory note, dated December 1, 1997, to Sprint for
repayment of $4,600 previously classified as accounts payable. Monthly principal
payments are required from February 1998 through the note's maturity on
September 1, 1998. Interest accrues at a fixed rate of
F-10
142
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
9.75% per annum on the unpaid principal balance and is payable monthly. The
promissory note and accrued interest were paid in full on May 1, 1998.
In January of 1996, the Company entered into a five-year term loan
agreement in the amount of $1,000 at a fixed rate of 8.11% per year,
collateralized by switching equipment. This loan was repaid in October 1997. At
December 31, 1996, the unpaid principal on the loan was $846.
The Company's capital leases contain various covenants which, among other
things, require the Company to maintain specified ratios of total liabilities to
net worth and to meet certain net income requirements.
9. LEASE COMMITMENTS
The Company has entered into noncancellable operating leases for office
space in several locations in the eastern United States. The leases have
termination dates through 2003 and require the payment of various operating
costs including condominium fees. Rental expense related to the leases for the
years ended December 31, 1997, 1996 and 1995 were $733, $688 and $501,
respectively.
Minimum lease payments for the next five years and thereafter are as
follows:
YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, CAPITAL LEASES OPERATING LEASES
- ----------------------------------------------------- -------------- ----------------
1998................................................. $ 1,254 $ 684
1999................................................. 1,368 630
2000................................................. 1,230 346
2001................................................. 817 88
2002................................................. 750 90
Thereafter........................................... -- 75
------- -------
Total minimum lease payments......................... $ 5,419 $ 1,913
=======
Less imputed interest................................ (702)
-------
Present value of minimum lease payments.............. 4,717
Less current portion................................. (1,094)
-------
Long-term capital lease obligations.................. $ 3,623
=======
Property and equipment under capital leases are as follows:
DECEMBER 31,
--------------
1997 1996
------ ----
Switching equipment......................................... $3,837 $--
Computer equipment.......................................... 1,527 --
Office equipment............................................ -- 3
------ ---
5,364 3
Less accumulated amortization............................... (515) (3)
------ ---
$4,849 $--
====== ===
F-11
143
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
10. UNEARNED CREDITS
In 1993 and 1994, the Company, through special sales promotions offered
through AT&T on three-year service contracts, received cash based on maintaining
annual sales commitment levels over a specific dollar amount. The total amounts
received from the AT&T promotions were amortized over the three-year length of
each contract and were fully amortized prior to 1997. Amortization of these
credits included in revenue in 1996 and 1995 was $1,810 and $2,436,
respectively.
11. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
The Company is contingently liable as a guarantor on a bank loan made to
the trust from whom the Company leases office space in Quincy, Massachusetts
(see Note 2). The outstanding balance of the loan at December 31, 1997 and 1996
is $1,486 and $1,546, respectively.
12. STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
On July 15, 1998, the stockholders of the Company created Network Plus
Corp. ("NP Corp."), which was incorporated in the State of Delaware. NP Corp.
expects to elect to be taxed under the provisions of Subchapter S of the
Internal Revenue Code. NP Corp. became the owner of 100% of the issued and
outstanding common stock of the Company on July 15, 1998, the date on which the
stockholders of the Company contributed their ownership interest in the Company
totaling 100 shares of common stock in return for 10,000,000 shares of common
stock, representing 100% of the ownership interest of NP Corp. These
transactions were initiated by the stockholders of the Company to achieve a
number of business objectives including an increase in the number of shares of
common stock authorized for issuance and issued and outstanding. The Company has
accounted for the effects of these transactions as a 100,000-for-1 stock split
and retroactively restated the accompanying financial statements to reflect
these transactions.
COMMON STOCK
The certificate of incorporation of NP Corp. authorizes the issuance of up
to 20,000,000 shares of $.01 par value common stock. There are 10,000,000 shares
of common stock issued and outstanding and held of record by two stockholders as
of July 15, 1998. The holders of common stock are entitled to receive dividends
when and as dividends are declared by the Board of Directors of NP Corp. out of
funds legally available therefor, provided that if any shares of preferred stock
are at the time outstanding, the payment of dividends on the common stock or
other distributions may be subject to the declaration and payment of dividends
on outstanding shares of preferred stock. Holders of common stock are entitled
to one vote per share on all matters submitted to a vote of the stockholders,
including the election of directors. Upon any liquidation, dissolution or
winding up of the affairs of NP Corp., whether voluntary or involuntary, any
assets remaining after the satisfaction in full of the prior rights of creditors
and the aggregate liquidation preference of any preferred stock then outstanding
will be distributed to the holders of common stock ratably in proportion to the
number of shares held by them. The common stock is not publicly traded.
PREFERRED STOCK
Under the certificate of incorporation of NP Corp., the Board of Directors
has the authority to issue up to 1,000,000 shares of $.01 par value preferred
stock from time to time in one or more series with such preferences, terms and
rights as the Board of Directors may determine without further action by the
stockholders of NP Corp. Accordingly, the Board of Directors has the power to
establish the provisions, if any, relating to dividends, voting rights,
redemption rates, sinking funds,
F-12
144
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
liquidation preferences and conversion rights for any series of preferred stock
issued in the future. There are currently no shares of preferred stock
outstanding.
STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION PLANS
On July 15, 1998, NP Corp. adopted the 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (the "1998
Incentive Plan"). The 1998 Incentive Plan provides for the grant of stock-based
awards to employees, officers and directors of, and consultants or advisors to,
NP Corp. Under the 1998 Incentive Plan, the Company may grant options that are
intended to qualify as incentive stock options ("incentive stock options")
within the meaning of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as
amended (the "Code"), options not intended to qualify as incentive stock options
("non-statutory options"), restricted stock and other stock-based awards.
Incentive stock options may be granted only to employees of NP Corp. or its
subsidiaries. A total of 1,400,000 shares of common stock may be issued upon the
exercise of options or other awards granted under the 1998 Incentive Plan. The
number of shares with respect to which awards may be granted to any employee
under the 1998 Incentive Plan may not exceed 700,000 during any calendar year.
The exercisability of options or other awards granted under the 1998 Incentive
Plan may, in certain circumstances, be accelerated in connection with an
Acquisition Event (as defined in the 1998 Incentive Plan). Options and other
awards may be granted under the 1998 Incentive Plan at exercise prices that are
equal to, less than or greater than the fair market value of NP Corp.'s common
stock, and the Board generally retains the authority to reprice outstanding
options. The 1998 Incentive Plan expires in July 2008, unless sooner terminated
by the Board.
On July 15, 1998, NP Corp. authorized the grant of a total of 741,140
options to purchase NP Corp. common stock at exercise prices at or above the
fair market value of NP Corp.'s common stock, as determined by its Board of
Directors. The options, when issued, will generally vest ratably over a period
of four years. NP Corp. and the Company intend to adopt the accounting
provisions of Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, "Accounting for Stock
Issued to Employees", and the disclosure-only provisions of Statement of
Financial Accounting Standards No. 123, "Accounting for Stock Based
Compensation". Accordingly, the Company's or NP Corp.'s results of operations
are not expected to be materially affected by the options granted to date under
this plan.
On July 15, 1998, NP Corp. adopted the 1998 Director Stock Option Plan (the
"Director Plan"). Under the terms of the Director Plan, 5,000 shares of common
stock will be granted to each non-employee director upon his or her initial
election to the Board of Directors. Annual options to purchase 2,500 shares of
common stock will also be granted to each non-employee director on the date of
each annual meeting of stockholders, or on August 1 of each year if no annual
meeting is held by such date. Options granted under the Director Plan will vest
in four equal annual installments beginning on the first anniversary of the date
of grant. The exercisability of these options will be accelerated upon the
occurrence of an Acquisition Event (as defined in the Director Plan). The
exercise price of options granted under the Director Plan is equal to the fair
market value of the common stock on the date of grant. A total of 100,000 shares
of common stock may be issued upon the exercise of stock options granted under
the Director Plan. No options have been granted under this plan.
DIVIDEND
On July 15, 1998, the Board of Directors of NP Corp. declared a dividend in
the aggregate amount of $5,000. As a result, it is anticipated that $2,500 will
be distributed to each of the stockholders of NP Corp. Following receipt of the
dividend, one stockholder will loan the Company $1,875 (representing the
distribution to that stockholder, net of the estimated tax liability resulting
F-13
145
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
from such distribution). Interest will accrue at Fleet's prime rate, and
interest and principal will be payable 10 days after redemption of the Series A
Preferred Stock.
13. MAJOR SUPPLIER
The Company has an agreement with Sprint to provide switching and dedicated
voice and data services. At expiration or any time prior, the Company can seek
to renew all material aspects of the agreement with Sprint. In the event that
renewal does not occur, the Company may be able to negotiate equally beneficial
terms with other major telecommunications companies. Should neither of these
alternatives be possible, there could be material adverse implications for the
Company's financial position and operations. Management's experience has been to
renegotiate agreements annually to ensure receiving competitive pricing, and
management believes the Company will be able to continue to renegotiate the
agreements. The current agreement was renegotiated, effective February 1998, and
will expire in February 2000.
14. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN
The Company sponsors a 401(k) and profit sharing plan (the "Plan") which is
open to all eligible employees under the Plan's provisions. The terms of the
Plan allow the Company to determine its annual profit sharing contribution.
There were no Company contributions to the Plan in 1997 or 1996. The Company's
contribution to the Plan in 1995 was $175.
15. SUBSEQUENT EVENT
On September 3, 1998, NP Corp. (see Note 12) issued 40,000 shares of 13.5%
Series A Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009 and initial warrants to purchase,
for $.01 per share, 310,000 shares of NP Corp.'s common stock (and contingent
warrants to purchase 600,000 shares of common stock) resulting in proceeds to NP
Corp. of $37.5 million, net of issuance costs of $2.5 million. A total value of
$4.35 million was ascribed to the initial warrants, net of issuance costs of
$0.3 million, and was accounted for as additional paid-in capital. The value
ascribed to the initial warrants was recorded as a discount to the preferred
stock which will be accreted to the preferred stock balance over an assumed
maturity period. Through September 3, 1998, NP Corp.'s activities consist
principally of the issuance of its preferred stock and warrants.
The issuance of the preferred stock terminated NP Corp.'s election to be
taxed under the provisions of Subchapter S of the Internal Revenue Code.
Accordingly, NP Corp. will provide for and report Federal and state income
taxes, if any.
F-14
146
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
BALANCE SHEETS
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
(UNAUDITED)
JUNE 30, DECEMBER 31,
1998 1997
-------- ------------
ASSETS
CURRENT ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents................................. $ 8,194 $ 1,502
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful
accounts of $403 and $926, respectively................ 15,458 16,927
Marketable securities..................................... 66 65
Investments............................................... -- 9,500
Prepaid expenses.......................................... 1,230 415
Other current assets...................................... 142 112
------- -------
Total current assets.............................. 25,090 28,521
PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET................................. 8,361 6,957
OTHER ASSETS................................................ 227 103
------- -------
TOTAL ASSETS...................................... $33,678 $35,581
======= =======
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Accounts payable.......................................... $17,620 $17,445
Accrued liabilities....................................... 2,526 2,245
Revolving line of credit.................................. 9,000 4,510
Notes payable to stockholders............................. -- 1,755
Current portion of debt and capital lease obligations..... 1,132 5,694
------- -------
Total current liabilities......................... 30,278 31,649
LONG-TERM DEBT AND CAPITAL LEASE OBLIGATIONS................ 3,167 3,623
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
Common stock, $.01 par value, 20,000,000 shares
authorized, 10,000,000 shares issued and outstanding... 100 100
Additional paid-in capital................................ 183 183
Retained earnings (deficit)............................... (50) 26
------- -------
Total stockholders' equity........................ 233 309
------- -------
TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY........ $33,678 $35,581
======= =======
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the unaudited interim financial
statements.
F-15
147
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS AND RETAINED EARNINGS
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)
(UNAUDITED)
THREE MONTHS SIX MONTHS
ENDED JUNE 30, ENDED JUNE 30,
-------------------------- --------------------------
1998 1997 1998 1997
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Revenue.......................... $ 27,103 $ 24,641 $ 52,305 $ 49,381
Direct cost of revenues.......... 19,992 19,330 38,828 38,440
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Gross profit..................... 7,111 5,311 13,477 10,941
Operating expenses
Selling, general and
administrative expenses..... 6,391 5,440 11,935 10,567
Depreciation and
amortization................ 483 168 951 324
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
6,874 5,608 12,886 10,891
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Operating income (loss).......... 237 (297) 591 50
Other income (expense)
Interest and dividend income... 9 38 12 60
Other income, net.............. 16 20 37 37
Interest expense............... (293) (93) (578) (177)
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
(268) (35) (529) (80)
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Income (loss) before state income
taxes.......................... (31) (332) 62 (30)
Provision for state income
taxes.......................... 125 -- 134 25
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Net loss......................... $ (156) $ (332) $ (72) $ (55)
=========== =========== =========== ===========
Retained earnings, beginning..... 106 3,808 26 3,818
Distributions to stockholders.... -- -- (4) (299)
----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Retained earnings (deficit),
ending......................... $ (50) $ 3,476 $ (50) $ 3,464
=========== =========== =========== ===========
Net loss per share -- basic and
diluted........................ $ (.02) $ (.03) $ (.01) $ (.01)
=========== =========== =========== ===========
Weighted average shares
outstanding.................... 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000 10,000,000
=========== =========== =========== ===========
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the unaudited interim financial
statements.
F-16
148
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(IN THOUSANDS)
(UNAUDITED)
SIX MONTHS
ENDED JUNE 30,
------------------
1998 1997
------- -------
Cash flows from operating activities:
Net loss.................................................. $ (72) $ (55)
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided
by (used for) operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization.......................... 951 324
(Gain) loss on disposal of fixed assets................ (8) --
Exercise of Tel-Save common stock warrants............. -- (3,570)
Refund of exercise price of Tel-Save common stock
warrants.............................................. 1,470 --
Sale of Tel-Save common stock.......................... 8,030 --
Provision for losses on accounts receivable............ 729 639
(Increase) decrease in assets:
Accounts receivable.................................. 740 (1,881)
Prepaid expenses..................................... (815) (61)
Other current assets................................. (30) 23
Other long-term assets............................... (124) (28)
(Decrease) increase in liabilities:
Accounts payable..................................... 175 3,822
Accrued liabilities.................................. 281 (333)
------- -------
Net cash provided by (used for) operating
activities...................................... 11,327 (1,120)
Cash flows from investing activities:
Proceeds from disposal of fixed assets.................... 17 --
Capital expenditures...................................... (2,364) (1,605)
Purchase of marketable securities......................... (1) (1)
------- -------
Net cash used for investing activities............ (2,348) (1,606)
Cash flows from financing activities:
Net proceeds from line of credit.......................... 4,490 3,000
Payments on debt and capital lease obligations............ (6,773) (99)
Distributions to stockholders............................. (4) (299)
------- -------
Net cash provided by (used for) financing
activities...................................... (2,287) 2,602
------- -------
Net increase (decrease) in cash............................. 6,692 (124)
Cash at beginning of period................................. 1,502 2,241
------- -------
Cash at end of period....................................... $ 8,194 $ 2,117
======= =======
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the unaudited interim financial
statements.
F-17
149
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO UNAUDITED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
1. BASIS OF PRESENTATION
The accompanying Unaudited Interim Financial Statements of Network Plus,
Inc. (the "Company"), a wholly owned subsidiary of Network Plus Corp., have been
prepared in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles and, in the
opinion of management, include all adjustments, consisting of normal recurring
accruals, necessary for a fair presentation of the results for the interim
periods. The results of operations for the interim periods are not necessarily
indicative of the results to be expected for the year.
These unaudited interim financial statements should be read in conjunction
with the financial statements and related notes in the Company's annual audited
Financial Statements. The balance sheet as of December 31, 1997 has been derived
from the audited financial statements as of that date.
Certain amounts in the financial statements for the prior year have been
reclassified to conform with the current year presentation. Such
reclassifications had no effect on previously reported results of operations.
2. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
In December 1997, the Company's stockholders issued the Company loans
totaling $1,755. The loans were repaid on May 1, 1998.
The Company had a service arrangement through May 1997 with a marketing
company, the shareholders of which have a controlling interest in the Company.
The marketing company provided services relative to establishing, training and
expanding the Company's sales organization. During the six months ended June 30,
1997, $55 was paid to the marketing company.
Office space, located in Quincy, MA, is leased from a trust, the
beneficiaries of which are stockholders of the Company. The Company makes
monthly rental payments of $36. In each of the six-month periods ended June 30,
1998 and 1997, $216 was paid to the trust.
3. PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
JUNE 30, DECEMBER 31,
1998 1997
-------- ------------
Switching equipment......................................... $ 6,160 $ 4,004
Computer equipment.......................................... 2,811 2,756
Office furniture and equipment.............................. 1,292 1,272
Purchased software.......................................... 725 694
Motor vehicles.............................................. 201 174
Leasehold improvements...................................... 184 130
------- -------
11,373 9,030
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization.............. (3,012) (2,073)
------- -------
$ 8,361 $ 6,957
======= =======
In August 1997, upon review of the Company's experience and expectations
for upgrades and replacement of equipment, the Company changed the estimated
useful life of its switching equipment from 12 years to 5 years. Depreciation
expense in the six months ended June 30, 1997 was approximately $76 less than
what would have otherwise been reported had the change been previously made.
F-18
150
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO UNAUDITED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
4. ACCRUED LIABILITIES
Accrued liabilities consist of the following:
JUNE 30, DECEMBER 31,
1998 1997
-------- ------------
Accrued interest............................................ $ 83 $ 60
Accrued salaries, wages, commissions and related taxes...... 552 297
Customer deposits........................................... 159 361
Accrued income and franchise taxes.......................... 684 766
Accrued taxes other than income and franchise............... 331 238
Accrued agency commissions.................................. 440 340
Other accrued liabilities................................... 277 183
------ ------
$2,526 $2,245
====== ======
5. REVOLVING CREDIT AGREEMENTS
The Company had a revolving line of credit with Fleet National Bank
("Fleet") for borrowings up to $7,000 including letters of credit, which was
terminated on May 1, 1998 upon entering into a new revolving credit agreement,
described below. At June 30, 1998, cash borrowings under the new revolving
credit agreement totaled $9,000 and letters of credit issued in the ordinary
course of business totaled $1,020. At December 31, 1997, cash borrowings under
the new revolving credit agreement totaled $4,510 and letters of credit totaled
$120. The interest rate on such borrowings was 7.4% at June 30, 1998 and 8.5% at
December 31, 1997.
On April 30, 1998, the Company entered into a new revolving credit
agreement with Fleet, which allowed for up to $23,000 of borrowings, based upon
a percentage of accounts receivable. The agreement had a term of three years.
Interest was payable monthly at Fleet's prime rate or available LIBOR options.
The agreement required the Company to meet certain gross margin, operating
income and tangible net worth covenants. The agreement was terminated in
connection with the closing of the New Revolving Credit Facility, described
below.
On October 7, 1998, the Company entered into a loan agreement with Goldman
Sachs Credit Partners, L.P. and Fleet for a $60,000 revolving credit facility
(the "New Revolving Credit Facility"), concurrent with the closing of which the
Company terminated the Fleet agreement. The New Revolving Credit Facility has a
term of 18 months. Under the New Revolving Credit Facility, $30,000 of the
$60,000 available is available based upon a percentage of accounts receivable.
Interest is payable monthly at one percent above the prime rate. The New
Revolving Credit Facility requires the Company, among other things, to meet
minimum levels of revenues and earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and
amortization, and not to exceed certain customer turnover levels and debt to
revenue ratios.
F-19
151
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO UNAUDITED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
6. DEBT AND CAPITAL LEASE OBLIGATIONS
Debt and capital lease obligations consist of the following:
JUNE 30, DECEMBER 31,
1998 1997
-------- ------------
Note payable................................................ $ -- $ 4,600
Capital lease obligations................................... 4,299 4,717
------- -------
4,299 9,317
Less current portion........................................ (1,132) (5,694)
------- -------
$ 3,167 $ 3,623
======= =======
The Company issued a promissory note, dated December 1, 1997, to Sprint for
repayment of $4,600 previously classified as accounts payable. On May 1, 1998,
the remaining balance of $3,700 due on the note was repaid.
The Company received a waiver from the lender for a violation at June 30,
1998 of the debt-to-equity financial covenant of its capital lease. The Company
continues to classify a portion of the capital lease liability as non-current
based on the expectation that the Company will be in compliance in subsequent
periods.
7. MAJOR SUPPLIER
The Company has an agreement with Sprint to provide switching and dedicated
voice and data services. At expiration or any time prior, the Company can renew
all material aspects of the agreement with Sprint. In the event that renewal
does not occur, the Company may be able to negotiate equally beneficial terms
with other major telecommunications companies. Should neither of these
alternatives be possible, there could be material adverse implications for the
Company's financial position and operations. Management's experience has been to
renegotiate agreements annually to ensure receiving competitive pricing, and
management believes the Company will be able to continue to renegotiate the
agreement. The current agreement was renegotiated, effective February 1998, and
will expire February 2000.
8. SIGNIFICANT CUSTOMER
During the six months ended June 30, 1998, the Company had one customer
that accounted for 11% of the Company's revenue. No other customer comprised
greater than 10% of total revenue.
9. EARNINGS PER SHARE
The computations of basic and diluted earnings per common share are based
upon the weighted average number of common shares outstanding and potentially
dilutive securities. Potentially dilutive securities include convertible
preferred stock, stock options and warrants. No potentially dilutive securities
were outstanding during the six months ended June 30, 1998 or 1997.
10. COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
Effective January 1, 1998, the Company adopted Statement of Financial
Accounting Standards No. 130, "Reporting Comprehensive Income". This Statement
establishes new rules for the reporting and display of comprehensive income and
its components; however, the adoption of this statement had no impact on the
Company's net income or stockholders' equity. There were no
F-20
152
NETWORK PLUS, INC.
NOTES TO UNAUDITED INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
adjustments required to calculate comprehensive income for either the six months
ended June 30, 1998 or 1997.
11. NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
In 1997, Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 131 ("SFAS 131"),
"Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information", was
issued which establishes standards for segment reporting in a full set of
general purpose financial statements. Management has not yet evaluated the
effects of this change on the reporting of its results of operations. The
Company will adopt SFAS 131 for its fiscal year ending December 31, 1998.
In March 1998, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
issued Statement of Position 98-1, "Accounting for the costs of Computer
Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use". The Company does not believe
that this pronouncement will have a material impact on its business or results
of operations.
12. PREFERRED STOCK ISSUANCE
On September 3, 1998, Network Plus Corp. issued 40,000 shares of 13.5%
Series A Cumulative Preferred Stock Due 2009 and initial warrants to purchase,
for $0.1 per share, 310,000 shares of Network Plus Corp.'s common stock (and
contingent warrants to purchase 600,000 shares of common stock) resulting in
proceeds to Network Plus Corp. of $37.5 million, net of issuance costs of $2.5
million. A total value of $4.35 million was ascribed to the initial warrants,
net of issuance costs of $0.3 million, and was accounted for as additional
paid-in capital. The value ascribed to the initial warrants was recorded as a
discount to the preferred stock which will be accreted to the preferred stock
balance over an assumed maturity period. Through September 3, 1998, Network Plus
Corp.'s activities consist principally of the issuance of its preferred stock
and warrants.
The issuance of the preferred stock terminated Network Plus Corp.'s
election to be taxed under the provisions of Subchapter S of the Internal
Revenue Code. Accordingly, Network Plus Corp. will provide for and report
Federal and state income taxes, if any.
F-21
153
- -------------------------------------------------------
- -------------------------------------------------------
NO DEALER, SALESPERSON OR ANY OTHER PERSON HAS BEEN AUTHORIZED TO GIVE ANY
INFORMATION OR TO MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION OTHER THAN THOSE CONTAINED IN THIS
PROSPECTUS IN CONNECTION WITH THE OFFER MADE HEREBY, AND, IF GIVEN OR MADE, SUCH
INFORMATION OR REPRESENTATION MUST NOT BE RELIED UPON AS HAVING BEEN AUTHORIZED
BY THE COMPANY. NEITHER THE DELIVERY OF THIS PROSPECTUS NOR ANY SALE MADE
HEREUNDER SHALL, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, CREATE ANY IMPLICATION THAT THERE HAS
BEEN NO CHANGE IN THE INFORMATION SET FORTH HEREIN OR IN THE AFFAIRS OF THE
COMPANY SINCE THE DATE AS OF WHICH THE INFORMATION IS GIVEN IN THIS PROSPECTUS.
THIS PROSPECTUS DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER OR SOLICITATION BY ANYONE IN ANY
JURISDICTION IN WHICH SUCH OFFER OR SOLICITATION IS NOT AUTHORIZED OR IN WHICH
THE PERSON MAKING SUCH OFFER OR SOLICITATION IS NOT QUALIFIED TO DO SO OR TO ANY
PERSON TO WHOM IT IS UNLAWFUL TO MAKE SUCH OFFER OR SOLICITATION.
------------------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
----
Notice to Investors.................... i
Forward-Looking Statements............. ii
Available Information.................. ii
Summary................................ 1
Risk Factors........................... 14
Use of Proceeds........................ 28
Dividend Policy........................ 28
Capitalization......................... 29
The Exchange Offer..................... 30
Selected Financial Data................ 38
Management's Discussion and Analysis of
Financial Condition and Results of
Operations........................... 40
Business............................... 52
Government Regulation.................. 75
Management............................. 85
Certain Transactions................... 88
Stock Ownership........................ 89
Description of Capital Stock........... 90
Description of Certain Indebtedness.... 91
Description of the Series A Preferred
Stock................................ 92
Certain Federal Income Tax
Considerations....................... 115
Plan of Distribution................... 120
Validity of the Securities............. 121
Independent Accountants................ 121
Glossary............................... G-1
Index to Financial Statements.......... F-1
- -------------------------------------------------------
- -------------------------------------------------------
- -------------------------------------------------------
- -------------------------------------------------------
[Network Plus Logo]
13.5% SERIES A1
CUMULATIVE PREFERRED STOCK
DUE 2009
------------------
PROSPECTUS
, 1998
------------------
- -------------------------------------------------------
- -------------------------------------------------------
154
PART II
INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
ITEM 20. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS
Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law (the "DGCL") empowers a
Delaware corporation to indemnify any person who was or is a party or is
threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action,
suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative
(other than an action by or in the right of such corporation) by reason of the
fact that such person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of such
corporation, or is or was serving at the request of such corporation as a
director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation or enterprise. A
corporation may, in advance of the final action of any civil, criminal,
administrative or investigative action, suit or proceeding, pay the expenses
(including attorneys' fees) incurred by any officer, director, employee or agent
in defending such action, provided that the director or officer undertakes to
repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that he or she is not
entitled to be indemnified by the corporation. A corporation may indemnify such
person against expenses (including attorneys' fees), judgments, fines and
amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by such person in
connection with such action, suit or proceeding if he or she acted in good faith
and in a manner he or she reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the
best interests of the corporation, and, with respect to any criminal action or
proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful.
A Delaware corporation may indemnify officers and directors in an action by
or in the right of the corporation to procure a judgment in its favor under the
same conditions, except that no indemnification is permitted without judicial
approval if the officer or director is adjudged to be liable to the corporation.
Where an officer or director is successful on the merits or otherwise in the
defense of any action referred to above, the corporation must indemnify him or
her against the expenses (including attorneys' fees) which he or she actually
and reasonably incurred in connection therewith. The indemnification provided is
not deemed to be exclusive of any other rights to which an officer or director
may be entitled under any corporation's by-law, agreement, vote or otherwise.
In accordance with Section 145 of the DGCL, Article Eighth of the Company's
Certificate of Incorporation (the "Certificate") and the Company's By-laws (the
"By-laws") provide that the Company shall indemnify each person who is or was a
director, officer or employee of the Company (including the heirs, executors,
administrators or estate of such person) or is or was serving at the request of
the Company as director, officer or employee of another corporation,
partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, to the fullest extent
permitted under subsections 145(a), (b), and (c) of the DGCL or any successor
statute. The indemnification provided by the Certificate and the By-laws shall
not be deemed exclusive of any other rights to which any of those seeking
indemnification or advancement of expenses may be entitled under any by-law,
agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise, both as
to action in his or her official capacity and as to action in another capacity
while holding such office, and shall continue as to a person who has ceased to
be a director, officer, employee or agent and shall inure to the benefit of the
heirs, executors and administrators of such a person. Expenses (including
attorneys' fees) incurred in defending a civil, criminal, administrative or
investigative action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on
behalf of the indemnified person to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be
determined that he or she is not entitled to be indemnified by the Company. The
Certificate further provides that a director of the Company shall not be
personally liable to the Company or its stockholders for monetary damages for
breach of fiduciary duty as a director, except for liability (i) for any breach
of the director's duty of loyalty to the Company or its stockholders, (ii) for
acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a
knowing violation of law, (iii) under Section 174 of the DGCL, or (iv) for any
transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit. If the
DGCL is amended to authorize corporate action further eliminating
II-1
155
or limiting the personal liability of directors, then the liability of a
director of the Company shall be eliminated or limited to the fullest extent
permitted by the DGCL as so amended.
The By-laws provide that the Company may purchase and maintain insurance on
behalf of its directors, officers, employees and agents against any liabilities
asserted against such persons arising out of such capacities.
ITEM 21. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
(a) Exhibits
EXHIBIT
NO. DESCRIPTION
- ------- -----------
3.1** -- Certificate of Incorporation of the Company.
3.2** -- Certificate of Designation of the Series A Preferred Stock.
3.3** -- Bylaws of the Company.
4.1** -- Exchange and Registration Rights Agreement dated as of
September 1, 1998 between the Company and the Purchasers.
4.2** -- Purchase Agreement dated as of September 1, 1998 between the
Company and the Purchasers.
5* -- Opinion of Hale and Dorr LLP.
8* -- Opinion of Hale and Dorr LLP with respect to certain tax
matters.
10.1** -- 1998 Stock Incentive Plan
10.2** -- 1998 Director Stock Option Plan
10.3+ -- Resale Solutions Switched Services Agreement dated as of
June 21, 1998 between the Company and Sprint Communications
Company L.P.
10.4+** -- Agreement for the Provision of Fiber Optic Facilities and
Services dated as of July 17, 1998 between the Company and
Northeast Optic Network, Inc.
10.5+** -- IRU Agreement dated as of July 17, 1998 between the Company
and Qwest Communications Corporation.
10.6** -- Net Lease by and between Network Plus Realty Trust,
Landlord, and Network Plus, Inc., Tenant, dated July 1,
1993.
10.7** -- Interconnection Agreement Under Sections 251 and 252 of the
Telecommunications Act of 1996, dated September 4, 1998, by
and between New England Telephone and Telegraph Company
d/b/a Bell Atlantic--Massachusetts and Network Plus Inc.
10.8+ -- Loan and Security Agreement dated October 7, 1998 by and
between Network Plus, Inc. as Borrower, Goldman Sachs Credit
Partners L.P. and Fleet National Bank as Lenders, Fleet
National Bank as Agent and Goldman Sachs Credit Partners
L.P. as Syndication and Arrangement Agent.
10.9+** -- Master Lease Agreement, dated as of August 8, 1997, between
Chase Equipment Leasing, Inc. and Network Plus, Inc., as
amended.
23.1 -- Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.
23.2* -- Consent of Hale and Dorr LLP (included in their opinion
filed as Exhibit 5).
24** -- Power of Attorney.
99.1** -- Form of Letter of Transmittal.
99.2** -- Form of Notice of Guaranteed Delivery.
99.3** -- Form of Letter to Clients.
99.4** -- Form of Letter to Nominees.
- ---------------
* To be filed by amendment.
** Previously filed.
+ Confidential treatment requested as to certain portions.
(b) Financial Statement Schedules:
All schedules have been omitted because they are not applicable or not
required or the required information is included in the financial statements or
notes thereto.
II-2
156
ITEM 22. UNDERTAKINGS
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that, for purposes of
determining any liability under the Securities Act, each filing of the
registrant's annual report pursuant to section 13(a) or section 15(d) of the
Exchange Act (and, where applicable, each filing of an employee benefit plan's
annual report pursuant to section 15(d) of the Exchange Act) that is
incorporated by reference in the registration statement shall be deemed to be a
new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the
offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona
fide offering thereof.
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act
may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of registrants
pursuant to the provisions described under Item 20 above, or otherwise, the
registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange
Commission, such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the
Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for
indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the
registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling
person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or
proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in
connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in
the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent,
submit to court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such
indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities
Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:
(1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act
of 1933, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part
of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in
a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or
497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this
registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.
(2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities
Act of 1933, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of
prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to
the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that
time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to respond to requests for
information that is incorporated by reference into the prospectus pursuant to
Items 4, 10(b), 11, or 13 of this Form, within one business day of receipt of
such request, and to send the incorporated documents by first class mail or
other equally prompt means. This includes information contained in documents
filed subsequent to the effective date of the registration statement through the
date of responding to the request.
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to supply by means of a
post-effective amendment all information concerning a transaction, and the
company being acquired involved therein, that was not the subject of and
included in this Registration Statement when it became effective.
II-3
157
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act, the Registrant has duly
caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the
undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Quincy, State of
Massachusetts, on October 16, 1998.
NETWORK PLUS CORP.
By: /s/ JAMES J. CROWLEY
------------------------------------
JAMES J. CROWLEY
EXECUTIVE VICE PRESIDENT AND
CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER
II-4
158
Index to Exhibits
EXHIBIT
NO. DESCRIPTION
- ------- -----------
3.1** -- Certificate of Incorporation of the Company.
3.2** -- Certificate of Designation of the Series A Preferred Stock.
3.3** -- Bylaws of the Company.
4.1** -- Exchange and Registration Rights Agreement dated as of
September 1, 1998 between the Company and the Purchasers.
4.2** -- Purchase Agreement dated as of September 1, 1998 between the
Company and the Purchasers.
5* -- Opinion of Hale and Dorr LLP.
8* -- Opinion of Hale and Dorr LLP with respect to certain tax
matters.
10.1** -- 1998 Stock Incentive Plan
10.2** -- 1998 Director Stock Option Plan
10.3+ -- Resale Solutions Switched Services Agreement dated as of
June 21, 1998 between the Company and Sprint Communications
Company L.P.
10.4+** -- Agreement for the Provision of Fiber Optic Facilities and
Services dated as of July 17, 1998 between the Company and
Northeast Optic Network, Inc.
10.5+** -- IRU Agreement dated as of July 17, 1998 between the Company
and Qwest Communications Corporation.
10.6** -- Net Lease by and between Network Plus Realty Trust,
Landlord, and Network Plus, Inc., Tenant, dated July 1,
1993.
10.7** -- Interconnection Agreement Under Sections 251 and 252 of the
Telecommunications Act of 1996, dated September 4, 1998, by
and between New England Telephone and Telegraph Company
d/b/a Bell Atlantic--Massachusetts and Network Plus Inc.
10.8+ -- Loan and Security Agreement by and between Network Plus,
Inc. as Borrower, Goldman Sachs Credit Partners L.P. and
Fleet National Bank as Lenders, Fleet National Bank as Agent
and Goldman Sachs Credit Partners L.P. as Syndication and
Arrangement Agent.
10.9+** -- Master Lease Agreement, dated as of August 8, 1997, between
Chase Equipment Leasing, Inc. and Network Plus, Inc., as
amended.
23.1 -- Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.
23.2* -- Consent of Hale and Dorr LLP (included in their opinion
filed as Exhibit 5).
24** -- Power of Attorney (included on the signature pages hereto).
99.1** -- Form of Letter of Transmittal.
99.2** -- Form of Notice of Guaranteed Delivery.
99.3** -- Form of Letter to Clients.
99.4** -- Form of Letter to Nominees.
- ---------------
* To be filed by amendment.
** Previously filed.
+ Confidential treatment requested as to certain portions.